bemis hall basement renovations

Transcription

PROJECT MANUAL
BEMIS HALL
BASEMENT RENOVATIONS
15 Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
September 23, 2015
ARCHITECT
ABACUS ARCHITECTS + PLANNERS
119 Braintree Street
Boston, MA 02134
617-562-4446
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
BEMIS HALL – BASEMENT RENOVATIONS
15 Bedford Road, Lincoln, MA
PROJECT MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
000110 Table of Contents
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
001116 Invitation to Bid
002113 Instructions to Bidders
004100 Form for General Bid
004113 Form for Sub-Bid
CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
005200 Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor
005213 Form of Subcontract
006113 Performance and Payment Bond
007200 General Conditions of the Contract
007316 Insurance Requirements
007336 Wage Rates
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 011000
Section 012300
General Requirements
Alternates
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
Section 024100
Demolition
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
Section 033000
Section 037300
Cast-In-Place Concrete – Refer to the Drawings
Concrete Patching
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
Section 042000
Unit Masonry
DIVISION 05 - METALS
Section 055000
Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
Section 061000
Section 064020
Rough Carpentry
Architectural Woodwork
* Filed Sub-Bid Required
TABLE OF CONTENTS
000110 - 1
Abacus Architects + Planners
September 23, 2015
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 078410
Section 079200
Penetration Firestopping
Joint Sealants
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
Section 081110
Section 081400
Section 083110
Section 085310
Section 087100
Section 088000
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Flush Wood Doors
Access Doors and Frames
Vinyl Windows
Door Hardware
Interior Glazing
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
Section 092110
Section 093000
Section 095100
Section 096500
Section 099000
Gypsum Board Assemblies
Tiling
Acoustical Ceilings
Resilient Wall Base
Painting and Coating
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
Section 101400
Section 102800
Section 104400
Section 107446
Signage
Toilet Accessories
Fire Protection Specialties
Window Wells
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
Section 122110
Horizontal Louver Blinds
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
Section 210000
Fire Protection
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
Section 220000 *
Plumbing
DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
Section 230000 *
Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
Section 260000 *
Electrical
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
* Filed Sub-Bid Required
TABLE OF CONTENTS
000110 - 2
September 23, 2015
BEMIS HALL BASEMENT RENOVATIONS
Lincoln, MA
Abacus
September 18, 2015
DOCUMENT 001116
INVITATION TO BID
The Town of Lincoln, MA, the Awarding Authority, invites sealed bids for renovation of Bemis Hall
Basement Renovations, located at 15 Bedford Road in accordance with Drawings and Specifications
prepared by Abacus Architects + Planners.
The work of this Contract includes all Labor, Materials, Equipment and any and all incidentals needed to complete this project. Building improvements include plumbing, mechanical, electrical,
walls, doors, windows and masonry. Bidding procedures shall be in accordance with Chapter 149 of
Massachusetts General Laws, as amended, including “Construction Reform” amendments contained in
Chapter 193 of the Acts of 2004.of Massachusetts Legislature. Bids will be accepted only from General
Bidders and Filed Sub-Bidders who are DCAM Certified.
Sealed bids submitted on forms furnished by the Awarding Authority and clearly identified as bids, endorsed with the name and address of the bidder and the name of the Project, will be received no later
than the times and dates specified below for receipt of bids and will forthwith be publicly opened and read
aloud.
 Sealed Filed Sub-Bids for the sub-trades designated below will be received by the Awarding Authority at the Town of Lincoln Facilities Office located at 6 Ballfield Road, Lincoln, MA.
01773 up until 2:00 PM on Wednesday October 14, 2015.
 Sealed General-Bids for the General Contract will be received by the Awarding Authority at the
Town of Lincoln Facilities Office located at 6 Ballfield Road, Lincoln, MA. 01773 up until
2:00 PM on Wednesday October 28, 2015.
Each Bid shall be accompanied by Bid Security equal to five (5) percent of the Bid amount in the form of a
Bid Bond, Cash or a Certified, Treasurer’s or Cashier’s Check issued by a responsible U.S. bank or Trust
Company, payable to the Town of Lincoln, MA. Bid Bond amount shall include the cost of any Alternates. Each Bidder shall attach the required Bid Bond or Check to the Bid Form. This requirement applies to the following:
 General Bidders
 Filed Sub Bidders
Each Bidder shall be certified by the Department of Capital Asset Management for the category of work
and dollar amount of this Project, and to be considered, shall submit with his or her Bid, a OWNER Certification and Update Statement indicating additional work or contracts performed or executed after the certification date.
 Estimated construction cost of this Project: $245.000.
 DCAM Certification Category: General Building Construction.
Filed Sub-Bids will be required for the Work of the following sub-trades:
PLUMBING
HVAC
ELECTRICAL WORK
Bidding Documents comprise Bidding Requirements and Contract Documents including all Addenda,
as defined in Document 002113 – INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS.
Each General Bidder may obtain two (2) complete sets of Bidding Documents and each Sub-Bidder
may obtain one (1) complete set of Bidding Documents at Town Offices 16 Lincoln Road Lincoln, MA
between the hours of 9:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m., upon deposit of $40 per set in the form of money
order or a certified check made payable to the Town of Lincoln, on or after 10 AM on Wednesday,
September 23, 2015. No partial sets will be issued.
 Additional sets may be purchased at the same office for $40 per set, non-refundable.
INVITATION TO BID
001116 - 1
Lincoln, MA
Abacus
September 18, 2015

Bidding Documents may also be downloaded in digital PDF format at
www.lincolntown.org/bids.aspx .
 Copies of the FORM FOR GENERAL BID and FORM FOR SUB-BID will be available at no
cost.
 Copies of Addenda will be mailed or delivered to each registered General Bidder and Filed
Sub-Bidder at no cost.
The full amount of each deposit for Bidding Documents will be refunded to each Bidder returning
complete sets of Bidding Documents (including Addenda if issued) to Awarding Authority in good
condition within thirty (30) days after the date of the General Bid opening. Deposits for Bidding Documents will be forfeited to the Awarding Authority if Bidding Documents are not returned within the
specified time limit.
Bidders shall address inquiries regarding availability of Bidding Documents, delivery time and other
similar matters to the Awarding Authority. Arrangements for delivery or mailing may be made directly with the Awarding Authority’s office, attention: Amy Pearson, Michael Haines (Telephone:
781.259.9400 x4304). A non-refundable $40 mailing and handling charge per set, payable to the
Awarding Authority, shall accompany each request for mailed Bidding Documents. No documents
will be mailed before receipt of the mailing charge. Copies of Addenda will be mailed or delivered to
registered bidders without charge.
A Pre-Bid Conference will be held at the Project Site at 2: PM on Monday October 5, 2015. All
bidders are invited and encouraged to attend.
The Bidding Documents may be obtained at the following places during normal business hours after
issuance:
Town of Lincoln
Facilities Department
6 Ballfield Road
Lincoln, MA. 01773
781.259.9400 X4304
Town of Lincoln
Town Offices
16 Lincoln Road
Lincoln, MA. 01773
781-259-2603
The Bid Securities of all General Bidders, except those of the three lowest responsible and eligible
General Bidders, will be returned within five (5) days, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded, after the opening of General Bids.
The successful General Bidder will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and a labor and materials Payment Bond as required by the Bidding Documents.
All bids for this Project are subject to the provisions of Massachusetts General Laws (Ter. Ed), Chapter 30, Section 39M as amended; Portions of Mass. G.L. Chapter 149, Sections 44A through 44L inclusive; and Chapter 149, Section 26 through 27D inclusive; except Section 44F, as amended by
Chapter 193 of the Acts of 2004 of the Massachusetts Legislature.
The minimum wages to be paid mechanics, apprentices, teamsters, chauffeurs, and laborers on the
Project shall be established by the Minimum Wage Schedule, as determined by the Commissioner of
Labor and Industries, pursuant to the provisions of M.G.L. Chapter 149, Section 25 to 27D, inclusive,
as amended, which schedule is included in the Bidding Documents.
MBE/WBE Goals: Comply with State requirement goals of 10.4% MBE/WBE participation.
The Awarding Authority reserves the right to waive any informalities and to reject any or all General
Bids if it be in the public interest so to do, and to reject any sub-bid on any sub-trade if it determines
that such Sub-bid does not represent the sub-bid of a person competent to perform the work as
specified or that less than three such Sub-bids were received and that the prices are not reasonable
for acceptance without further competition.
All bids shall remain in effect for 30 days, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded after
opening of General Bids. Successful bidders shall agree to commence work and complete the Work
in accordance with the dates set forth in the Bidding Documents.
Town of Lincoln
Lincoln, MA. 01773
INVITATION TO BID
001116 - 2
Lincoln, MA
Abacus
September 18, 2015
Instructions to Bidders
Receipt of Bids
All bids m u s t b e c o m p l e t e l y f i l l e d o u t a n d s i g n e d , s e a l e d i n a n
e n v e l o p e a n d a d d r e s s e d t o : Town of Lincoln Facilities Department,
6 Ballfield Road, Lincoln MA 01773. Filed Sub Bids are due by 2:00 PM on October
14, 2015 as indicated by the official time and date stamped on all bid envelopes by clock
in the Facilities Office. General Bids are due by 2:00 PM on October 28, 2015 as
indicated by the official time and date stamped on all bid envelopes by clock in the
Facilities Office. No bids received after the time established will be considered,
regardless of the cause. If, at the time of the scheduled bid receipt, the office(s) are
closed due to uncontrollable events including but not limited to fire, snow, ice, wind or
building evacuation, bids will be received until 11:30 AM on the next normal business
day.
All bids must be left with either a bid bond in accordance with Chapter 30, Section 39M or
Chapter 149, Section 44B, or a certified treasurer’s or cashier’s check issued by a
responsible bank, for five percent (5 %) of the value of the proposed work, payable to the
Town of Lincoln. This check to be the property of the Town of Lincoln if the Bidder fails
to execute the contract and satisfactory bond within ten (10) days after the contract is
presented to him.
Preparation and Submission of Bids
To be considered responsive, all bids must be submitted in sealed envelopes clearly
marked as Bemis Hall Basement Renovations, bearing on it the permanent name and
business address of the bidder. If forwarded by mail, the sealed envelope containing
the bid and marked as directed above must be enclosed in another envelope addressed
as specified in these instructions, preferably by registered mail. No responsibility will
be attached to the Awarding Authority for early opening of a bid not properly
addressed and identified. The bid price and signature shall be in ink and in longhand.
Each bidder is required to fill in all the blank spaces in the bid. All Addenda (if any)
must be signed, dated and enclosed in the sealed bid envelope.
References
Bidders must be able to establish their ability to provide the services requested
through references and by providing other relevant information upon request.
Interpretation of Documents
All interpretations of Bid Documents, the Specifications and supplemental instructions
will be in the form of written addenda to the specifications, which, if issued, will be
made available to bidders not later than (date) at www.lincolntown.org. Failure of
any bidder to receive any such addendum or interpretation shall not relieve any bidder
from any obligation under his bid as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS – TOWN OF LINCOLN
1
Lincoln, MA
Abacus
September 18, 2015
part of the contract documents and shall be specifically incorporated therein by
reference.
Modification of Bids
No modification of any bid will be considered by the Town of Lincoln ("Awarding
Authority") unless received by the Awarding Authority in writing prior to the time
established for the receipt of bids.
Bid Certifictates
These are included in the General bid and Sub bid forms.
Rule for Award
The contract will be awarded to the responsive and responsible bidder offering the lowest
total price for all items, including Unit Pricing. As applicable, the awarded bidder will
provide a 50% payment bond within ten (10) days of award. The Town of Lincoln
reserves t h e r i g h t to waive any informality or to reject any and all bids or to make
the award deemed in its own discretion to be in the best interest of the Town of Lincoln.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS – TOWN OF LINCOLN
2
Lincoln, MA
Abacus
September 18, 2015
DOCUMENT 004100
FORM FOR GENERAL BID
TO: The Awarding Authority
A.
BASE BID: The undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials required for
construction of Bemis Hall Basement Renovations in Lincoln, Massachusetts in accordance
with Contract Documents, including Drawings and Specifications, all as prepared by Abacus
Architects + Planners, for the Contract Price specified below, subject to additions and
deductions according to the terms of the Contract Documents.
B.
CONTRACT PRICE: The proposed Contract Price is
Dollars ($
C.
).
ALTERNATES:
1.
2.
For Alternate No. 1: Add: $___________ Subtract: $_________
D.
ADDENDA: This Bid includes Addenda numbered:_________________________
E.
SUB-DIVISION OF BID: The sub-division of the proposed Contract Price is as follows:
Item 1: The work of the General Contractor, being all work other than that covered
by Item 2:
Dollars ($
).
Item 2: Sub-Bids as follows:
Sub-Trade
Name of Sub-Bidder
Amount
Plumbing
$
HVAC
$
Electrical
$
004100 - 1
Bonds required
by General Bidder (Yes or No).
This column
does not apply
to Projects with
Subcontractor
Prequalification
under
c.149§44D3/4
and should be
left blank on
such Projects)
Lincoln, MA
Abacus
September 18, 2015
Total of Item 2: ___________________________________________
F.
SUB-BIDS: The undersigned agrees that each of the above named sub-bidders will be used for
the work indicated at the amount stated, unless a substitution is made. The undersigned further
agrees to pay the premiums for any performance and payment bonds furnished by sub-bidders
as requested herein by the undersigned, and that all of the cost of all such premiums is included
in the amount set forth in Item 1 of this bid. The undersigned further agrees that the cost of
premiums for payment and performance bonds furnished by sub-bidders pursuant to section
44d3/4 shall not be included in the amount set forth in Item 1, but shall be paid by the subbidders and included in their sub-bid price.
G.
The undersigned agrees that if he is selected as general contractor, he will promptly confer with
the awarding authority on the question of sub-bidders; and that the awarding authority may
substitute for any sub-bid listed above a sub-bid filed with the awarding authority by another
sub-bidder for the sub-trade against whose standing and ability the undersigned makes no
objection; and that the undersigned will use all such finally selected sub-bidders at the amounts
named in the respective sub-bids and be in every way as responsible for them and their work as
if they had been originally named in this general bid, the total contract price being adjusted to
conform thereto.
H.
UNIT PRICES: Should certain additional work be required, or should the quantities of certain
classes of work be increased or decreased from those on which the General Bid is to be based,
by order or approval of the Architect, the undersigned agrees that the attached Appendix
012201 - Unit Price Proposal Sheet will be the basis of payment to him or credit to the Awarding
Authority for such addition, increase or decrease in the Work. Unit Prices given shall represent
the exact net amount per unit to be paid the Contractor (in the case of additions or increases) or
to be refunded the Awarding Authority (in the case of decreases). No additional adjustment will
be allowed for overhead, profit, insurance, compensation insurance or other direct or indirect
expenses of Contractor or Subcontractors. The Awarding Authority shall have the right to reject
any or all proposed Unit Prices at any time prior to signing the Agreement, in which case the
cost of extra work shall be as determined by one of the other methods set forth in Article 7 of
the GENERAL CONDITIONS.
I.
ESTIMATED QUANTITIES: Estimated quantities identified in the Appendix 012201 - Unit Price
Proposal Sheet shall be included in the total Contract Price listed in paragraph B. of this Form
For General Bid.
J.
TIME OF COMPLETION: The undersigned agrees to commence work within <five (5) days> of
execution of a General Contract and to complete the Work so as to reach Substantial
Completion for each Phase on or before the date specified in the Project Manual. In case the
Work of a given Phase of the Work is not completed within the specified time, it is understood
and agreed that the Contractor shall pay the Owner, not as a penalty but as liquidated
damages, the sums stated in Document 002113 – INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, for each
calendar day after which completion was required for that Phase, as further provided in Division
1 of the Specifications.
K.
CONTRACT: The undersigned agrees that, if he is selected as General Contractor, he will,
within five (5) days, Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after presentation thereof
by the Awarding Authority, execute a Contract in accordance with the terms of this General Bid
and furnish a Performance Bond and also a Labor and Materials or Payment Bond, each of a
Surety Company qualified to do business under the laws of the Commonwealth and satisfactory
to the Awarding Authority, and each in the sum of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract
004100 - 2
Lincoln, MA
Abacus
September 18, 2015
Price, the premiums for which are to be paid by the General Contractor and are included in the
Contract Price.
L.
LABOR: The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in
harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the Work, and that he
will comply fully with all laws and regulations applicable to awards made subject to Section 44A
of Chapter 149 of the Massachusetts General Laws.
M.
OSHA CERTIFICATION: In accordance with M.G.L.c. 30, Section 39S bidders shall include with
their bids a certificate indicating “that all employees to be employed at the worksite will have
successfully completed a course in construction safety and health approved by the United
States Occupational Safety and Health Administration...”.
N.
CERTIFICATE OF ELIGIBILITY: The undersigned has included with this Bid his Certificate of
Eligibility and Update Statement as required by Chapter 149, Section 44D.
O.
NON-COLLUSION CERTIFICATION: The undersigned certifies under penalties of perjury that
this bid is in all respects bona fide, fair and made without collusion or fraud with any other
person. As used in this Paragraph, the word "person" shall mean any natural person, joint
venture, partnership, corporation, or any other business or legal entity.
P.
TAXES: As required by MGL Chapter. 62c, Section49A, Chapter 62C, the undersigned certifies
that the bidder has complied with all laws of the Commonwealth relating to taxes.
Q.
DEBARMENT: The undersigned further certifies under penalties of perjury that the said
undersigned is not presently debarred from doing public construction work in the
Commonwealth under provisions of Section 29F of Chapter 29, or any other applicable
debarment provisions of any other Chapter of the General Laws or any rule or regulation
promulgated thereunder.
Date:
Name of General Bidder:
By:
Title:
Business Address:
City and State:
NOTE: This proposal must bear the written signature of the Bidder. If the Bidder is a partnership,
the proposal must be signed by a partner. If the Bidder is a corporation, the proposal must be
signed by a duly authorized officer or agent of such corporation.
END OF DOCUMENT
004100 - 3
Lincoln, MA
Abacus
September 18, 2015
DOCUMENT 004113
FORM FOR SUB-BID
TO: All General Bidders Except Those Excluded
A.
BASE BID: The undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials required for
completing, in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and Addenda, all the work
specified in Section No._________ Trade:____________________ of the Contract Documents,
specifications, and in any plans specified in such Section, prepared by Abacus Architects +
Planners for construction of Bemis Hall Basement Renovations in Lincoln, Massachusetts
for the contract sum of:
Dollars
($
).
B.
ADDENDA: This sub-bid includes Addenda numbered:___________
C.
ALTERNATES
1.
2.
D.
EXCLUSIONS: This sub-bid
__
may be used by any General Bidder except________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
__
may be used by only the following General bidders_______
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
(To exclude General Bidders, insert "X" in one box only, and fill in blank following that box. Do
not answer "C" if no General Bidders are excluded).
E.
SUB-BID LISTING: The names of all persons, firms, and corporations furnishing to the
undersigned labor or labor and materials for the class or classes or part thereof of work for
which the provisions of the Section of the Specifications for this sub-trade require a listing in this
paragraph (including the undersigned if customarily furnished by persons on his own payroll and
FORM FOR SUB-BID
004113 - 1
Lincoln, MA
Abacus
September 18, 2015
in the absence of a contrary provision in the Specifications), the name of each such class of
work or part thereof and the bid price for each such class of work or part thereof are:
Name
Class of Work
Bid Price
(Do not give bid price for any class or part thereof furnished by the undersigned).
The undersigned agrees that the above list of bids to the undersigned represents bona fide bids
based on the herein before described drawings, Specifications, and Addenda, and that, if the undersigned is awarded the Contract, they will be used for the work indicated at the amounts stated,
if satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
F.
EXECUTION OF CONTRACT: The undersigned agrees that, if he is selected as a sub-bidder,
he will, within 5 days, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded, after presentation of a
subcontract by the general bidder selected as the general contractor, execute with such general
bidder a subcontract in accordance with the terms of this sub-bid, and contingent upon the
execution of the general contract, and, if requested so to do in the general bid by the general
bidder, who shall pay the premiums therefore, or if prequalification is required pursuant to
section 44D ¾, furnish a performance and payment bond of a surety company qualified to do
business under the laws of the commonwealth and satisfactory to the awarding authority, in the
full sum of the subcontract price.
G.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The undersigned further agrees to be bound to the General
Contractor by the terms of the herein before described Drawings, Specifications (including all
General Conditions stated therein), and Addenda, and to assume toward him all the obligations
and responsibilities that he, by those documents, assumes toward the Owner.
H.
BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS (Not required if bidders are pre-qualified for this project): The
undersigned offers the following information as evidence for his qualifications to perform the
work as bid upon according to all requirements of the Drawings and the Specifications.
1.
2.
Have been in business under present business name ________ years.
Ever failed to complete any work awarded? _____________.
3.
List one or more recent buildings with names of general contractor and architect on which
you served as subcontractor for work of similar character as required for the abovenamed buildings:
FORM FOR SUB-BID
004113 - 2
Lincoln, MA
Building
4.
Architect
Abacus
September 18, 2015
General Contractor
Amount
Bank Reference:
I.
LABOR: The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in
harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the Work, and that he
will comply fully with all laws and regulations applicable to awards made subject to Section 44A
of Chapter 149 of the Massachusetts General Laws.
J.
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION: The undersigned hereby certifies that he will comply with the minority
manpower ratio and specific action steps contained in the EEO Program included in the
Contract Documents.
K.
NON-COLLUSION CERTIFICATION: The undersigned certifies under penalties of perjury that
this bid is in all respects bona fide, fair and made without collusion or fraud with any other
person. As used in this Paragraph, the word "person" shall mean any natural person, joint
venture, partnership, corporation, or any other business or legal entity.
L.
TAXES: As required by MGL, C.62c,s 49A, Chapter 62C, the undersigned certifies that the
bidder has complied with all laws of the Commonwealth relating to taxes.
M.
DEBARMENT: The undersigned further certifies under penalties of perjury that the said
undersigned is not presently debarred from doing public construction work in the
Commonwealth under provisions of Section 29F of Chapter 29, or any other applicable
debarment provisions of any other Chapter of the General Laws or any rule or regulation
promulgated thereunder.
FORM FOR SUB-BID
004113 - 3
Lincoln, MA
Abacus
September 18, 2015
Date:
Signature:
Name of Sub-Bidder:
By:
Title:
Business Address:
City and State:
NOTE: This proposal must bear the written signature of the Bidder. If the Bidder is a partnership,
the proposal must be signed by a partner. If the Bidder is a corporation, the proposal must be
signed by a duly authorized officer or agent of such corporation.
END OF DOCUMENT
FORM FOR SUB-BID
004113 - 4
Lincoln, MA
Abacus
September 18, 2015
DOCUMENT 005200
FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT
A.
The “AIA A101 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor 2007 edition”, is
hereby made part of these Contract Documents. This form of agreement shall be used by
Contractor in fulfilling the requirements of these Contract Documents.
END OF DOCUMENT
FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
005200 - 1
Lincoln, MA
Abacus
September 18, 2015
DOCUMENT 005213
FORM OF SUBCONTRACT
THIS AGREEMENT MADE THIS _________ DAY OF _________, 2015 by and between
_______________________________ a corporation organized and existing under the laws of
_______________________________ an individual doing business as ________________________
hereinafter called the “Contractor” and ________________________________ a corporation organized
and existing under the laws of ____________________________an individual doing business as
_______________________________ hereinafter called the “Subcontractor”.
WITNESSETH that the Contractor and the Subcontractor for the considerations hereafter named, agree
as follows:
1.
The Subcontractor agrees to furnish all labor and materials required for the completion of all work
specified in Section No.__________________ of the Specifications for:
______________________________________________________________________________
(Subtrade)
and the Drawings referred to therein and Addenda No. ______, ___, ___, ___, ___, __, and ____
for the:
_______________________________________________________________________________
(Complete title of the Project and the Project Number taken from the title of the Specifications)
for the sum of____________________________________________________________________
($_______________________) and the Contractor agrees to pay the Subcontractor said sum for
said work. This price includes the following alternates (and other items set forth in the sub-bid):
Alternates(s) No. ___,____, ____, ____,_____,_____
(a) The Subcontractor agrees to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the hereinbefore described Drawings, Specifications (including all General Conditions stated therein) and Addenda No.
____, ____, ____, ____, ____, and ____, and to assume to the Contractor all the obligations and
responsibilities that the Contractor by those documents assumes to the Owner hereinafter called the
"Awarding Authority", except to the extent that provisions contained therein are by their terms or by
law applicable only to the Contractor.
(b) The Contractor agrees to be bound to the Subcontractor by the terms of the hereinbefore described documents and to assume to the Subcontractor all the obligations and responsibilities that
the Awarding Authority by the terms of the hereinbefore described documents assumes to the Contractor, except to the extent that provisions contained therein are by their terms or by law applicable
only to the Awarding Authority.
2.
The Contractor agrees to begin, prosecute and complete the entire Work specified by the Awarding
Authority in an orderly manner so that the Subcontractor will be able to begin, prosecute and complete the work described in this Subcontract; and, in consideration thereof, upon notice from the
FORM OF SUBCONTRACT
005213 - 1
Lincoln, MA
Abacus
September 18, 2015
Contractor, either oral or in writing, the Subcontractor agrees to begin prosecute and complete the
work described in this Subcontract in an orderly manner and with due consideration to the date or
time specified by the Awarding Authority for the completion of the entire Work.
3.
The Subcontractor agrees to furnish to the Contractor within a reasonable time after the execution of
this Subcontract, evidence of worker's compensation insurance as required by law and evidence of
public liability and property damage insurance of the type and in limits required to be furnished to
the Awarding Authority by the Contractor.
4.
The Contractor agrees that no claim for services rendered or materials furnished by the Contractor
to the Subcontractor shall be valid unless written notice thereof is given by the Contractor to the
Subcontractor during the first ten (10) days of the calendar month following that in which the claim
originated.
5.
This agreement is contingent upon the execution of a General Contract between the Contractor and
the Awarding Authority for the complete Work.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this agreement the day and year first abovewritten.
SEAL
ATTEST ______________________________ ________________________________________
(Name of Subcontractor)
By ____________________________________________________
SEAL
ATTEST ______________________________ ________________________________________
(Name of Contractor)
By ____________________________________________________
END OF DOCUMENT
FORM OF SUBCONTRACT
005213 - 2
Lincoln, MA
Abacus
September 18, 2015
SECTION 006113
PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
The American Institute of Architects "Performance and Payment Bond", Document No. A-312 1984, is hereby made part of these Contract Documents. This form of performance bond shall
be used by Contractor and Surety in fulfilling the requirements of these Contract Documents.
B.
The Performance Bond shall be in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract
Price for faithful performance of this Contract.
C.
The Payment Bond shall be in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price
for faithful performance of this Contract.
D.
The cost of the Performance Bond shall be included in the Contract Amount.
END OF DOCUMENT
006113 - 1
Lincoln, MA
Abacus
September 18, 2015
DOCUMENT 007200
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.
The "AIA A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, 2007 edition", is hereby
made part of these Contract Documents. These conditions apply to the Work of the Contractor
in fulfilling the requirements of the Contract Documents.
END OF DOCUMENT
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
007200 - 1
Lincoln, MA
Abacus
September 18, 2015
DOCUMENT 007316
INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
A.
The General Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect him from
claims under worker's compensation acts and from claims for damages because of bodily injury,
including death, and property damage which might arise from and during operations under this
Contract, whether such operations be by himself or by a Subcontractor or anyone directly or
indirectly employed by either of them.
B.
Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained all insurance
required herein nor until such insurance has been approved by the Owner. Contractor shall not
allow any Subcontractor to commence work until the insurance required of the Subcontractor
has been so obtained and approved.
C.
Subcontracts: Contractor shall either (1) require each Subcontractor to procure and to maintain
during the life of his Subcontract, Subcontractor's General Liability and Property Damage
Insurance of same type and in same manner as specified herein, or (2) insure activities of his
Subcontractors in his own policy.
D.
All insurance required by this Section shall be provided by a Best "A"-rated company, or
companies, authorized to do business in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and satisfactory
to the Owner and shall be written for not less than any limits of liability specified herein, or
required by law, whichever is greater. The Owner shall be named as an additional insured
under all policies.
E.
Certificates: Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be submitted in triplicate to
the Owner simultaneously with the execution to the Contract. Certificates shall indicate that
broad form Contractual Liability coverage is in force, as well as deletions of the XCU exclusions.
Certificates shall contain a provision that the insurance company will notify the Owner by
registered mail at least sixty (60) calendar days in advance of any cancellation, change or
expiration of the policies. Certificates shall include description of coverage, effective dates and
expiration dates of policies.
F.
Deductibles: In the event of paid claims, Contractor shall bear costs of any amounts deductible.
G.
Waiver: Submit to the consent of their respective insurers, the Owner and the Contractor waive
all rights against each other and against the subcontractors, consultants, agents and employees
of the other, for damages to the Project covered by any property insurance.
007316 - 1
Lincoln, MA
1.3
Abacus
September 18, 2015
COVERAGE AND LIMITS
A.
Worker's Compensation Insurance: Procure and maintain during the life of this Contract
Workers Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance as required by State law for all
employees to be engaged in work at the site of the Project. In case of any such work sublet,
Contractor shall require subcontractors similarly to provide Workers Compensation and
Employer's Liability Insurance for all of the latter's employees to be engaged in such work
unless such employees are covered by the protection afforded by the Contractor's Insurance.
The limit of liability for Employers Liability insurance shall be not less than [$500,000.00]. In
case any class of employees engaged in hazardous work on the Project under this Contract is
not protected under the Workers Compensation Statute, the Contractor shall provide and shall
cause each Subcontractor to provide Employer's Liability Insurance with a limit of at least
[$1,000,000] for each accident for the protection of such of his employees as are not otherwise
protected.
B.
Contractor's General Liability and Property Damage Insurance: Procure and maintain during the
life of this Contract, Comprehensive Contractor's General Liability Insurance, with the Owner as
additional named insured, covering bodily injury, including accidental death, with limits of
[$1,000,000] per person, [$1,000,000] per occurrence; and property damage insurance with
limits of [$1,000,000] per occurrence, including products and completed operations, explosion,
collapse, undermining and damage to underground utilities (X.C.U) and Broad Form Property
Damage Coverage. Before any blasting is done, Contractor shall present evidence that blasting
damage is included in his insurance coverage. Provide a separate policy for completed
operations for a period of two (2) years from date of Final Completion of the Project. Any policy
issued shall include permission for partial or total occupancy by Owner within the scope of this
Contract. Coverage shall also include Owner's and Contractor's protective liability favoring the
Owner and an umbrella of excess liability in the amount of [$10,000,000 (ten million dollars)]
minimum.
C.
Contractor's Automobile Liability Insurance: Procure and maintain during the life of this Contract
Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance, including all owned, non-owned, and hired
automobiles, with the Owner as additional named insured, covering bodily injury, including
accidental death, with limits of [$1,000,000] per person, [$1,000,000] per occurrence and
property damage insurance with limits of [$1,000,000] per occurrence.
D.
All-Risk Insurance: Procure and maintain during the life of this Contract All-Risk builder's Risk
Insurance on a 100% completed value basis, with the Owner named as an additional insured as
his interests may appear. In the event of paid claims, the Contractor shall bear the costs of any
amounts deductible under the policy.
E.
Boiler and Machinery Insurance: Procure and maintain boiler and machinery insurance which
shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by
Owner.
END OF DOCUMENT
007316 - 2
THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
EXECUTIVE OFFICE OF LABOR AND WORKFORCE DEVELOPMENT
DEPARTMENT OF LABOR STANDARDS
Prevailing Wage Rates
As determined by the Director under the provisions of the
Massachusetts General Laws, Chapter 149, Sections 26 to 27H
CHARLES D. BAKER
Governor
RONALD L. WALKER, II
Secretary
WILLIAM D MCKINNEY
KARYN E. POLITO
Lt. Governor
Awarding Authority:
Director
Town of Lincoln
Contract Number:
City/Town:
LINCOLN
Description of Work:
Bemis Hall Basement Renovations - Improvements to Bemis Hall including masonry, plumbing, electrical,
mechanical, walls, ceilings and doors.
Job Location:
15 Bedford Road Lincoln MA 01773
Information about Prevailing Wage Schedules for Awarding Authorities and Contractors
• This wage schedule applies only to the specific project referenced at the top of this page and uniquely identified by the
“Wage Request Number” on all pages of this schedule.
• An Awarding Authority must request an updated wage schedule from the Department of Labor Standards (“DLS”) if it has
not opened bids or selected a contractor within 90 days of the date of issuance of the wage schedule. For CM AT RISK
projects (bid pursuant to G.L. c.149A), the earlier of: (a) the execution date of the GMP Amendment, or (b) the bid for the first
construction scope of work must be within 90-days of the wage schedule issuance date.
• The wage schedule shall be incorporated in any advertisement or call for bids for the project as required by M.G.L. c. 149,
§ 27. The wage schedule shall be made a part of the contract awarded for the project. The wage schedule must be posted in a
conspicuous place at the work site for the life of the project in accordance with M.G.L. c. 149 § 27. The wages listed on the
wage schedule must be paid to employees performing construction work on the project whether they are employed by the prime
contractor, a filed sub-bidder, or any sub-contractor.
• All apprentices working on the project are required to be registered with the Massachusetts Division of Apprentice
Standards (DAS). Apprentice must keep his/her apprentice identification card on his/her person during all work hours on the
project. An apprentice registered with DAS may be paid the lower apprentice wage rate at the applicable step as provided on
the prevailing wage schedule. If an apprentice rate is not listed on the prevailing wage schedule for the trade in which an
apprentice is registered with the DAS, the apprentice must be paid the journeyworker's rate for the trade.
• The wage rates will remain in effect for the duration of the project, except in the case of multi-year public construction
projects. For construction projects lasting longer than one year, awarding authorities must request an updated wage schedule.
Awarding authorities are required to request these updates no later than two weeks before the anniversary of the date the
contract was executed by the awarding authority and the general contractor. For multi-year CM AT RISK projects, awarding
authority must request an annual update no later than two weeks before the anniversary date, determined as the earlier of: (a)
the execution date of the GMP Amendment, or (b) the execution date of the first amendment to permit procurement of
construction services. Contractors are required to obtain the wage schedules from awarding authorities, and to pay no less than
these rates to covered workers. The annual update requirement is not applicable to 27F “rental of equipment” contracts.
• Every contractor or subcontractor which performs construction work on the project is required to submit weekly payroll
reports and a Statement of Compliance directly to the awarding authority by mail or email and keep them on file for three years.
Each weekly payroll report must contain: the employee’s name, address, occupational classification, hours worked, and wages
paid. Do not submit weekly payroll reports to DLS. A sample of a payroll reporting form may be obtained at
http://www.mass.gov/dols/pw.
• Contractors with questions about the wage rates or classifications included on the wage schedule have an affirmative
obligation to inquire with DLS at (617) 626-6953.
• Employees not receiving the prevailing wage rate set forth on the wage schedule may report the violation to the Fair Labor
Division of the office of the Attorney General at (617) 727-3465.
• Failure of a contractor or subcontractor to pay the prevailing wage rates listed on the wage schedule to all employees who
perform construction work on the project is a violation of the law and subjects the contractor or subcontractor to civil and
criminal penalties.
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
Wage Request Number:
20150914-048
Classification
Health
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Effective Date
Base Wage
08/01/2015
$31.65
$10.41
$9.33
$0.00
$51.39
12/01/2015
$31.65
$10.41
$10.08
$0.00
$52.14
06/01/2016
$32.15
$10.41
$10.08
$0.00
$52.64
08/01/2016
$32.15
$10.91
$10.08
$0.00
$53.14
$0.00
$53.95
Construction
(2 AXLE) DRIVER - EQUIPMENT
TEAMSTERS JOINT COUNCIL NO. 10 ZONE B
(3 AXLE) DRIVER - EQUIPMENT
12/01/2016
$32.15
$10.91
$10.89
08/01/2015
$31.72
$10.41
$9.33
$0.00
$51.46
$10.41
$10.08
$0.00
$52.21
$0.00
$52.71
12/01/2015
(4 & 5 AXLE) DRIVER - EQUIPMENT
ADS/SUBMERSIBLE PILOT
PILE DRIVER LOCAL 56 (ZONE 1)
AIR TRACK OPERATOR
LABORERS - ZONE 2
$31.72
06/01/2016
$32.22
$10.41
$10.08
08/01/2016
$32.22
$10.91
$10.08
$0.00
$53.21
12/01/2016
$32.22
$10.91
$10.89
$0.00
$54.02
08/01/2015
$31.84
$10.41
$9.33
$0.00
$51.58
12/01/2015
$31.84
$10.41
$10.08
$0.00
$52.33
06/01/2016
$32.34
$10.41
$10.08
$0.00
$52.83
08/01/2016
$32.34
$10.91
$10.08
$0.00
$53.33
12/01/2016
$32.34
$10.91
$10.89
$0.00
$54.14
08/01/2015
$88.29
$9.80
$19.23
$0.00
$117.32
06/01/2015
$31.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.50
12/01/2015
$32.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.00
06/01/2016
$32.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.50
12/01/2016
$33.65
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$53.25
06/01/2015
$33.43
$10.40
$5.95
$0.00
$49.78
$0.00
$50.73
For apprentice rates see "Apprentice- LABORER"
ASBESTOS REMOVER - PIPE / MECH. EQUIPT.
HEAT & FROST INSULATORS LOCAL 6 (BOSTON)
ASPHALT RAKER
LABORERS - ZONE 2
12/01/2015
$34.38
$10.40
$5.95
06/01/2015
$31.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.00
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.50
$0.00
$52.00
12/01/2015
$31.90
06/01/2016
$32.40
$7.30
$12.30
12/01/2016
$33.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.75
06/01/2015
$42.83
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$67.38
12/01/2015
$44.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.63
06/01/2016
$44.83
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$69.38
12/01/2016
$46.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.63
06/01/2017
$47.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$71.63
12/01/2017
$48.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$72.63
06/01/2015
$42.83
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$67.38
12/01/2015
$44.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.63
$0.00
$69.38
ASPHALT/CONCRETE/CRUSHER PLANT-ON SITE
OPERATING ENGINEERS LOCAL 4
For apprentice rates see "Apprentice- OPERATING ENGINEERS"
BACKHOE/FRONT-END LOADER
06/01/2016
$44.83
$10.00
$14.55
12/01/2016
$46.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.63
06/01/2017
$47.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$71.63
12/01/2017
$48.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$72.63
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 2 of 37
Classification
BARCO-TYPE JUMPING TAMPER
LABORERS - ZONE 2
Health
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Effective Date
Base Wage
06/01/2015
$31.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.00
12/01/2015
$31.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.50
06/01/2016
$32.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.00
12/01/2016
$33.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.75
06/01/2015
$31.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.50
$0.00
$52.00
BLOCK PAVER, RAMMER / CURB SETTER
LABORERS - ZONE 2
12/01/2015
$32.40
$7.30
$12.30
06/01/2016
$32.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.50
12/01/2016
$33.65
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$53.25
01/01/2015
$40.32
$6.97
$16.21
$0.00
$63.50
01/01/2016
$41.62
$6.97
$16.21
$0.00
$64.80
01/01/2017
$42.92
$6.97
$16.21
$0.00
$66.10
BOILER MAKER
BOILERMAKERS LOCAL 29
Apprentice - BOILERMAKER - Local 29
Effective Date - 01/01/2015
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$6.97
$10.54
$0.00
$43.72
$26.21
$6.97
$10.54
$0.00
$43.72
70
$28.22
$6.97
$11.35
$0.00
$46.54
75
$30.24
$6.97
$12.16
$0.00
$49.37
80
$32.26
$6.97
$12.97
$0.00
$52.20
85
$34.27
$6.97
$13.78
$0.00
$55.02
90
$36.29
$6.97
$14.59
$0.00
$57.85
95
$38.30
$6.97
$15.40
$0.00
$60.67
Apprentice Base Wage Health
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
65
$26.21
2
65
3
4
5
6
7
8
Effective Date -
01/01/2016
Step
percent
1
65
$27.05
$6.97
$10.54
$0.00
$44.56
2
65
$27.05
$6.97
$10.54
$0.00
$44.56
3
70
$29.13
$6.97
$11.35
$0.00
$47.45
4
75
$31.22
$6.97
$12.16
$0.00
$50.35
5
80
$33.30
$6.97
$12.97
$0.00
$53.24
6
85
$35.38
$6.97
$13.78
$0.00
$56.13
7
90
$37.46
$6.97
$14.59
$0.00
$59.02
8
95
$39.54
$6.97
$15.40
$0.00
$61.91
Notes:
Apprentice to Journeyworker Ratio:1:5
BRICK/STONE/ARTIFICIAL MASONRY (INCL. MASONRY
WATERPROOFING)
BRICKLAYERS LOCAL 3 (WALTHAM)
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
08/01/2015
$49.86
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$78.61
02/01/2016
$50.43
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$79.18
08/01/2016
$51.33
$10.18
$18.65
$0.00
$80.16
02/01/2017
$51.90
$10.18
$18.65
$0.00
$80.73
20150914-048
Page 3 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - BRICK/PLASTER/CEMENT MASON - Local 3 Waltham
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$53.68
$29.92
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$58.67
70
$34.90
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$63.65
4
80
$39.89
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$68.64
5
90
$44.87
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$73.62
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
50
$24.93
2
60
3
Effective Date -
02/01/2016
Step
percent
1
50
$25.22
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$53.97
2
60
$30.26
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$59.01
3
70
$35.30
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$64.05
4
80
$40.34
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$69.09
5
90
$45.39
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$74.14
Total Rate
Notes:
BULLDOZER/GRADER/SCRAPER
06/01/2015
12/01/2015
$42.42
$43.66
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$66.97
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.21
$0.00
$68.96
06/01/2016
$44.41
$10.00
$14.55
12/01/2016
$45.64
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.19
06/01/2017
$46.63
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$71.18
12/01/2017
$47.62
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$72.17
06/01/2015
$36.20
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$56.90
12/01/2015
$36.95
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$57.65
06/01/2016
$37.70
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$58.40
12/01/2016
$38.70
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$59.40
06/01/2015
$35.05
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$55.75
12/01/2015
$35.80
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$56.50
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$57.25
$0.00
$58.25
CAISSON & UNDERPINNING BOTTOM MAN
LABORERS - FOUNDATION AND MARINE
CAISSON & UNDERPINNING LABORER
06/01/2016
$36.55
12/01/2016
$37.55
$7.30
$13.40
06/01/2015
$35.05
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$55.75
12/01/2015
$35.80
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$56.50
06/01/2016
$36.55
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$57.25
12/01/2016
$37.55
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$58.25
CAISSON & UNDERPINNING TOP MAN
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 4 of 37
Classification
CARBIDE CORE DRILL OPERATOR
LABORERS - ZONE 2
Health
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Effective Date
Base Wage
06/01/2015
$31.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.00
12/01/2015
$31.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.50
06/01/2016
$32.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.00
12/01/2016
$33.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.75
03/01/2015
$35.75
$9.80
$16.48
$0.00
$62.03
CARPENTER
CARPENTERS -ZONE 2 (Eastern Massachusetts)
Apprentice -
CARPENTER - Zone 2 Eastern MA
Effective Date -
03/01/2015
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$1.63
$0.00
$29.31
$9.80
$1.63
$0.00
$32.88
$9.80
$11.59
$0.00
$46.42
$26.81
$9.80
$11.59
$0.00
$48.20
80
$28.60
$9.80
$13.22
$0.00
$51.62
6
80
$28.60
$9.80
$13.22
$0.00
$51.62
7
90
$32.18
$9.80
$14.85
$0.00
$56.83
8
90
$32.18
$9.80
$14.85
$0.00
$56.83
Step
percent
1
50
$17.88
$9.80
2
60
$21.45
3
70
$25.03
4
75
5
Notes:
CEMENT MASONRY/PLASTERING
07/01/2015
BRICKLAYERS LOCAL 3 (WALTHAM)
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
01/01/2016
$45.82
$46.44
20150914-048
$10.90
$18.71
$1.30
$76.73
$10.90
$18.71
$1.30
$77.35
Page 5 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - CEMENT MASONRY/PLASTERING - Eastern Mass (Waltham)
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$10.90
$12.21
$0.00
$46.02
$27.49
$10.90
$13.71
$1.30
$53.40
65
$29.78
$10.90
$14.71
$1.30
$56.69
4
70
$32.07
$10.90
$15.71
$1.30
$59.98
5
75
$34.37
$10.90
$16.71
$1.30
$63.28
6
80
$36.66
$10.90
$17.71
$1.30
$66.57
7
90
$41.24
$10.90
$18.71
$1.30
$72.15
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
50
$22.91
2
60
3
Effective Date -
01/01/2016
Step
percent
1
50
$23.22
$10.90
$12.21
$0.00
$46.33
2
60
$27.86
$10.90
$13.71
$1.30
$53.77
3
65
$30.19
$10.90
$14.71
$1.30
$57.10
4
70
$32.51
$10.90
$15.71
$1.30
$60.42
5
75
$34.83
$10.90
$16.71
$1.30
$63.74
6
80
$37.15
$10.90
$17.71
$1.30
$67.06
7
90
$41.80
$10.90
$18.71
$1.30
$72.71
Total Rate
Notes:
Steps 3,4 are 500 hrs. All other steps are 1,000 hrs.
CHAIN SAW OPERATOR
06/01/2015
LABORERS - ZONE 2
$31.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.00
$0.00
$51.50
12/01/2015
$31.90
$7.30
$12.30
06/01/2016
$32.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.00
12/01/2016
$33.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.75
06/01/2015
$43.83
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.38
12/01/2015
$45.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$69.63
06/01/2016
$45.83
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.38
12/01/2016
$47.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$71.63
06/01/2017
$48.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$72.63
12/01/2017
$49.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$73.63
06/01/2015
$29.61
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$54.16
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$55.03
$0.00
$55.55
CLAM SHELLS/SLURRY BUCKETS/HEADING MACHINES
COMPRESSOR OPERATOR
12/01/2015
$30.48
06/01/2016
$31.00
$10.00
$14.55
12/01/2016
$31.87
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$56.42
06/01/2017
$32.56
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$57.11
12/01/2017
$33.25
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$57.80
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 6 of 37
Classification
DELEADER (BRIDGE)
PAINTERS LOCAL 35 - ZONE 2
Health
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Base Wage
07/01/2015
$48.56
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$72.51
01/01/2016
$49.51
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$73.46
07/01/2016
$50.46
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$74.41
01/01/2017
$51.41
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$75.36
Apprentice - PAINTER Local 35 - BRIDGES/TANKS
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$7.85
$0.00
$0.00
$32.13
$26.71
$7.85
$3.66
$0.00
$38.22
$29.14
$7.85
$3.99
$0.00
$40.98
$31.56
$7.85
$4.32
$0.00
$43.73
$33.99
$7.85
$14.11
$0.00
$55.95
$36.42
$7.85
$14.44
$0.00
$58.71
$38.85
$7.85
$14.77
$0.00
$61.47
$43.70
$7.85
$15.44
$0.00
$66.99
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
50
$24.28
2
55
3
60
4
65
5
70
6
75
7
80
8
90
Effective Date -
Pension
Effective Date
01/01/2016
Step
percent
1
50
$24.76
$7.85
$0.00
$0.00
$32.61
2
55
$27.23
$7.85
$3.66
$0.00
$38.74
3
60
$29.71
$7.85
$3.99
$0.00
$41.55
4
65
$32.18
$7.85
$4.32
$0.00
$44.35
5
70
$34.66
$7.85
$14.11
$0.00
$56.62
6
75
$37.13
$7.85
$14.44
$0.00
$59.42
7
80
$39.61
$7.85
$14.77
$0.00
$62.23
8
90
$44.56
$7.85
$15.44
$0.00
$67.85
Notes:
Steps are 750 hrs.
DEMO: ADZEMAN
LABORERS - ZONE 2
06/01/2015
$35.25
$7.30
$13.20
$0.00
$55.75
12/01/2015
$36.00
$7.30
$13.20
$0.00
$56.50
06/01/2015
$36.25
$7.30
$13.20
$0.00
$56.75
$0.00
$57.50
DEMO: BACKHOE/LOADER/HAMMER OPERATOR
LABORERS - ZONE 2
12/01/2015
$37.00
$7.30
$13.20
06/01/2015
$36.00
$7.30
$13.20
$0.00
$56.50
$0.00
$57.25
DEMO: BURNERS
LABORERS - ZONE 2
12/01/2015
$36.75
$7.30
$13.20
06/01/2015
$36.25
$7.30
$13.20
$0.00
$56.75
12/01/2015
$37.00
$7.30
$13.20
$0.00
$57.50
06/01/2015
$36.00
$7.30
$13.20
$0.00
$56.50
12/01/2015
$36.75
$7.30
$13.20
$0.00
$57.25
DEMO: CONCRETE CUTTER/SAWYER
LABORERS - ZONE 2
DEMO: JACKHAMMER OPERATOR
LABORERS - ZONE 2
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 7 of 37
Classification
Health
Pension
LABORERS - ZONE 2
Total Rate
Base Wage
06/01/2015
$35.25
$7.30
$13.20
$0.00
$55.75
12/01/2015
$36.00
$7.30
$13.20
$0.00
$56.50
06/01/2015
$42.42
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$66.97
12/01/2015
$43.66
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.21
06/01/2016
$44.41
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.96
12/01/2016
$45.64
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.19
$0.00
$71.18
DEMO: WRECKING LABORER
Supplemental
Unemployment
Effective Date
DIRECTIONAL DRILL MACHINE OPERATOR
06/01/2017
$46.63
$10.00
$14.55
12/01/2017
$47.62
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$72.17
08/01/2015
$58.86
$9.80
$19.23
$0.00
$87.89
08/01/2015
$42.04
$9.80
$19.23
$0.00
$71.07
08/01/2015
$63.06
$9.80
$19.23
$0.00
$92.09
08/01/2015
$88.23
$9.80
$19.23
$0.00
$117.26
09/01/2015
$45.67
$13.00
$15.89
$0.00
$74.56
03/01/2016
$46.17
$13.00
$16.39
$0.00
$75.56
09/01/2015
$45.67
$13.00
$15.89
$0.00
$74.56
03/01/2016
$46.17
$13.00
$16.39
$0.00
$75.56
DIVER
DIVER TENDER
DIVER TENDER (EFFLUENT)
DIVER/SLURRY (EFFLUENT)
DRAWBRIDGE OPERATOR (Construction)
ELECTRICIANS LOCAL 103
For apprentice rates see "Apprentice- ELECTRICIAN"
ELECTRICIAN
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 8 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - ELECTRICIAN - Local 103
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$13.00
$0.55
$0.00
$31.82
$18.27
$13.00
$0.55
$0.00
$31.82
45
$20.55
$13.00
$11.86
$0.00
$45.41
4
45
$20.55
$13.00
$11.86
$0.00
$45.41
5
50
$22.84
$13.00
$12.23
$0.00
$48.07
6
55
$25.12
$13.00
$12.58
$0.00
$50.70
7
60
$27.40
$13.00
$12.95
$0.00
$53.35
8
65
$29.69
$13.00
$13.32
$0.00
$56.01
9
70
$31.97
$13.00
$13.69
$0.00
$58.66
10
75
$34.25
$13.00
$14.06
$0.00
$61.31
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
40
$18.27
2
40
3
Effective Date -
03/01/2016
Step
percent
1
40
$18.47
$13.00
$0.55
$0.00
$32.02
2
40
$18.47
$13.00
$0.55
$0.00
$32.02
3
45
$20.78
$13.00
$11.84
$0.00
$45.62
4
45
$20.78
$13.00
$11.84
$0.00
$45.62
5
50
$23.09
$13.00
$12.71
$0.00
$48.80
6
55
$25.39
$13.00
$13.07
$0.00
$51.46
7
60
$27.70
$13.00
$13.39
$0.00
$54.09
8
65
$30.01
$13.00
$13.81
$0.00
$56.82
9
70
$32.32
$13.00
$14.18
$0.00
$59.50
10
75
$34.63
$13.00
$14.55
$0.00
$62.18
Total Rate
Notes: :
App Prior 1/1/03; 30/35/40/45/50/55/65/70/75/80
Apprentice to Journeyworker Ratio:2:3***
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS LOCAL 4
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
01/01/2015
$53.30
$13.58
$14.21
$0.00
$81.09
01/01/2016
$54.53
$14.43
$14.96
$0.00
$83.92
01/01/2017
$55.86
$15.28
$15.71
$0.00
$86.85
20150914-048
Page 9 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR - Local 4
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$13.58
$0.00
$0.00
$40.23
$29.32
$13.58
$14.21
$0.00
$57.11
65
$34.65
$13.58
$14.21
$0.00
$62.44
4
70
$37.31
$13.58
$14.21
$0.00
$65.10
5
80
$42.64
$13.58
$14.21
$0.00
$70.43
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
50
$26.65
2
55
3
Effective Date -
01/01/2016
Step
percent
1
50
$27.27
$14.43
$0.00
$0.00
$41.70
2
55
$29.99
$14.43
$14.96
$0.00
$59.38
3
65
$35.44
$14.43
$14.96
$0.00
$64.83
4
70
$38.17
$14.43
$14.96
$0.00
$67.56
5
80
$43.62
$14.43
$14.96
$0.00
$73.01
Notes:
Steps 1-2 are 6 mos.; Steps 3-5 are 1 year
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR HELPER
01/01/2015
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS LOCAL 4
01/01/2016
$37.31
$38.17
$13.58
$14.21
$0.00
$65.10
$14.43
$14.96
$0.00
$67.56
$0.00
$70.09
01/01/2017
$39.10
$15.28
$15.71
06/01/2015
$31.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.00
12/01/2015
$31.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.50
06/01/2016
$32.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.00
12/01/2016
$33.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.75
05/01/2015
$40.22
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$64.52
11/01/2015
$40.80
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$65.10
05/01/2016
$41.69
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$65.99
11/01/2016
$42.28
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$66.58
05/01/2017
$43.16
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$67.46
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$68.19
$0.00
$68.90
For apprentice rates see "Apprentice - ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR"
FENCE & GUARD RAIL ERECTOR
LABORERS - ZONE 2
FIELD ENG.INST.PERSON-BLDG,SITE,HVY/HWY
11/01/2017
$43.89
05/01/2018
$44.60
$10.00
$14.30
05/01/2015
$41.65
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$65.95
11/01/2015
$42.24
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$66.54
05/01/2016
$43.13
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$67.43
11/01/2016
$43.73
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$68.03
05/01/2017
$44.62
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$68.92
11/01/2017
$45.35
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$69.65
05/01/2018
$46.07
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$70.37
FIELD ENG.PARTY CHIEF-BLDG,SITE,HVY/HWY
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 10 of 37
Classification
FIELD ENG.ROD PERSON-BLDG,SITE,HVY/HWY
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Base Wage
05/01/2015
$21.68
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$45.98
11/01/2015
$22.02
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$46.32
05/01/2016
$22.54
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$46.84
11/01/2016
$22.89
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$47.19
05/01/2017
$23.42
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$47.72
$10.00
$14.30
$0.00
$48.14
$0.00
$48.57
11/01/2017
$23.84
Health
Pension
Effective Date
05/01/2018
$24.27
$10.00
$14.30
09/01/2015
$45.67
$13.00
$15.89
$0.00
$74.56
03/01/2016
$46.17
$13.00
$16.39
$0.00
$75.56
09/01/2015
$34.25
$13.00
$14.06
$0.00
$61.31
03/01/2016
$34.63
$13.00
$14.55
$0.00
$62.18
06/01/2015
$35.64
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$60.19
12/01/2015
$36.69
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$61.24
06/01/2016
$37.31
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$61.86
12/01/2016
$38.35
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$62.90
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$63.74
$0.00
$64.57
FIRE ALARM INSTALLER
FIRE ALARM REPAIR / MAINTENANCE
/ COMMISSIONING ELECTRICIANS
LOCAL 103
For apprentice rates see "Apprentice- TELECOMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN"
FIREMAN (ASST. ENGINEER)
06/01/2017
$39.19
12/01/2017
$40.02
$10.00
$14.55
06/01/2015
$20.50
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$40.10
12/01/2015
$20.50
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$40.10
06/01/2016
$20.50
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$40.10
12/01/2016
$20.50
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$40.10
09/01/2015
$41.59
$9.80
$17.53
$0.00
$68.92
FLAGGER & SIGNALER
LABORERS - ZONE 2
FLOORCOVERER
FLOORCOVERERS LOCAL 2168 ZONE I
Apprentice - FLOORCOVERER - Local 2168 Zone I
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$9.80
$1.79
$0.00
$32.39
$22.87
$9.80
$1.79
$0.00
$34.46
60
$24.95
$9.80
$12.16
$0.00
$46.91
65
$27.03
$9.80
$12.16
$0.00
$48.99
70
$29.11
$9.80
$13.95
$0.00
$52.86
75
$31.19
$9.80
$13.95
$0.00
$54.94
80
$33.27
$9.80
$15.74
$0.00
$58.81
85
$35.35
$9.80
$15.74
$0.00
$60.89
Step
percent
1
50
$20.80
2
55
3
4
5
6
7
8
Notes:
Steps are 750 hrs.
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 11 of 37
Classification
FORK LIFT/CHERRY PICKER
Health
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Effective Date
Base Wage
06/01/2015
$42.83
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$67.38
12/01/2015
$44.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.63
06/01/2016
$44.83
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$69.38
12/01/2016
$46.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.63
06/01/2017
$47.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$71.63
$0.00
$72.63
12/01/2017
$48.08
$10.00
$14.55
06/01/2015
$29.61
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$54.16
$0.00
$55.03
GENERATOR/LIGHTING PLANT/HEATERS
12/01/2015
$30.48
$10.00
$14.55
06/01/2016
$31.00
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$55.55
12/01/2016
$31.87
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$56.42
06/01/2017
$32.56
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$57.11
12/01/2017
$33.25
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$57.80
07/01/2015
$38.06
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$62.01
01/01/2016
$39.01
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$62.96
07/01/2016
$39.96
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$63.91
01/01/2017
$40.91
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$64.86
GLAZIER (GLASS PLANK/AIR BARRIER/INTERIOR
SYSTEMS)
GLAZIERS LOCAL 35 (ZONE 2)
Apprentice - GLAZIER - Local 35 Zone 2
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$7.85
$0.00
$0.00
$26.88
$20.93
$7.85
$3.66
$0.00
$32.44
$22.84
$7.85
$3.99
$0.00
$34.68
65
$24.74
$7.85
$4.32
$0.00
$36.91
5
70
$26.64
$7.85
$14.11
$0.00
$48.60
6
75
$28.55
$7.85
$14.44
$0.00
$50.84
7
80
$30.45
$7.85
$14.77
$0.00
$53.07
8
90
$34.25
$7.85
$15.44
$0.00
$57.54
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
50
$19.03
2
55
3
60
4
Effective Date -
01/01/2016
Step
percent
1
50
$19.51
$7.85
$0.00
$0.00
$27.36
2
55
$21.46
$7.85
$3.66
$0.00
$32.97
3
60
$23.41
$7.85
$3.99
$0.00
$35.25
4
65
$25.36
$7.85
$4.32
$0.00
$37.53
5
70
$27.31
$7.85
$14.11
$0.00
$49.27
6
75
$29.26
$7.85
$14.44
$0.00
$51.55
7
80
$31.21
$7.85
$14.77
$0.00
$53.83
8
90
$35.11
$7.85
$15.44
$0.00
$58.40
Notes:
Steps are 750 hrs.
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 12 of 37
Classification
HOISTING ENGINEER/CRANES/GRADALLS
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Base Wage
06/01/2015
$42.83
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$67.38
12/01/2015
$44.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.63
06/01/2016
$44.83
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$69.38
12/01/2016
$46.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.63
06/01/2017
$47.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$71.63
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$72.63
12/01/2017
$48.08
Health
Pension
Effective Date
Apprentice - OPERATING ENGINEERS - Local 4
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$10.00
$0.00
$0.00
$33.56
$25.70
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$50.25
65
$27.84
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$52.39
4
70
$29.98
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$54.53
5
75
$32.12
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$56.67
6
80
$34.26
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$58.81
7
85
$36.41
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$60.96
8
90
$38.55
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$63.10
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
55
$23.56
2
60
3
Effective Date -
12/01/2015
Step
percent
1
55
$24.24
$10.00
$0.00
$0.00
$34.24
2
60
$26.45
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$51.00
3
65
$28.65
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$53.20
4
70
$30.86
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$55.41
5
75
$33.06
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$57.61
6
80
$35.26
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$59.81
7
85
$37.47
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$62.02
8
90
$39.67
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$64.22
Notes:
HVAC (DUCTWORK)
08/01/2015
SHEETMETAL WORKERS LOCAL 17 - A
$43.31
$10.20
$21.48
$2.25
$77.24
$2.25
$78.24
02/01/2016
$44.31
$10.20
$21.48
08/01/2016
$45.46
$10.20
$21.48
$2.25
$79.39
02/01/2017
$46.56
$10.20
$21.48
$2.25
$80.49
08/01/2017
$47.66
$10.20
$21.48
$2.25
$81.59
02/01/2018
$48.81
$10.20
$21.48
$2.25
$82.74
09/01/2015
$45.67
$13.00
$15.89
$0.00
$74.56
03/01/2016
$46.17
$13.00
$16.39
$0.00
$75.56
For apprentice rates see "Apprentice- SHEET METAL WORKER"
HVAC (ELECTRICAL CONTROLS)
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 13 of 37
Classification
HVAC (TESTING AND BALANCING - AIR)
Health
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Effective Date
Base Wage
08/01/2015
$43.31
$10.20
$21.48
$2.25
$77.24
02/01/2016
$44.31
$10.20
$21.48
$2.25
$78.24
08/01/2016
$45.46
$10.20
$21.48
$2.25
$79.39
02/01/2017
$46.56
$10.20
$21.48
$2.25
$80.49
$2.25
$81.59
08/01/2017
$47.66
$10.20
$21.48
02/01/2018
$48.81
$10.20
$21.48
$2.25
$82.74
09/01/2015
$49.69
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$76.28
03/01/2016
$50.69
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$77.28
09/01/2016
$51.69
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$78.28
03/01/2017
$52.69
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$79.28
09/01/2015
$49.69
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$76.28
03/01/2016
$50.69
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$77.28
09/01/2016
$51.69
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$78.28
03/01/2017
$52.69
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$79.28
06/01/2015
$31.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.50
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.00
$0.00
$52.50
For apprentice rates see "Apprentice- SHEET METAL WORKER"
HVAC (TESTING AND BALANCING -WATER)
PIPEFITTERS LOCAL 537
For apprentice rates see "Apprentice- PIPEFITTER" or "PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER"
HVAC MECHANIC
HYDRAULIC DRILLS
LABORERS - ZONE 2
12/01/2015
$32.40
06/01/2016
$32.90
$7.30
$12.30
12/01/2016
$33.65
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$53.25
09/01/2015
$43.81
$11.50
$13.80
$0.00
$69.11
09/01/2016
$45.81
$11.50
$13.80
$0.00
$71.11
09/01/2017
$47.81
$11.50
$13.80
$0.00
$73.11
09/01/2018
$50.06
$11.50
$13.80
$0.00
$75.36
09/01/2019
$52.56
$11.50
$13.80
$0.00
$77.86
INSULATOR (PIPES & TANKS)
HEAT & FROST INSULATORS LOCAL 6 (BOSTON)
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 14 of 37
Classification
Base Wage
Effective Date
Health
Apprentice - ASBESTOS INSULATOR (Pipes & Tanks) - Local 6 Boston
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$11.50
$10.05
$0.00
$43.46
$26.29
$11.50
$10.80
$0.00
$48.59
70
$30.67
$11.50
$11.55
$0.00
$53.72
80
$35.05
$11.50
$12.30
$0.00
$58.85
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
50
$21.91
2
60
3
4
Effective Date -
09/01/2016
Step
percent
1
50
$22.91
$11.50
$10.05
$0.00
$44.46
2
60
$27.49
$11.50
$10.80
$0.00
$49.79
3
70
$32.07
$11.50
$11.55
$0.00
$55.12
4
80
$36.65
$11.50
$12.30
$0.00
$60.45
Notes:
Steps are 1 year
IRONWORKER/WELDER
03/16/2015
IRONWORKERS LOCAL 7 (BOSTON AREA)
$42.11
$7.70
Apprentice - IRONWORKER - Local 7 Boston
$20.25
$0.00
$70.06
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$7.70
$20.25
$0.00
$53.22
$29.48
$7.70
$20.25
$0.00
$57.43
$31.58
$7.70
$20.25
$0.00
$59.53
$33.69
$7.70
$20.25
$0.00
$61.64
$35.79
$7.70
$20.25
$0.00
$63.74
$37.90
$7.70
$20.25
$0.00
$65.85
Step
percent
1
60
$25.27
2
70
3
75
4
80
5
85
6
90
Notes:
** Structural 1:6; Ornamental 1:4
Apprentice to Journeyworker Ratio:**
JACKHAMMER & PAVING BREAKER OPERATOR
LABORERS - ZONE 2
06/01/2015
$31.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.00
12/01/2015
$31.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.50
06/01/2016
$32.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.00
$0.00
$52.75
12/01/2016
$33.15
$7.30
$12.30
06/01/2015
$31.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$50.75
12/01/2015
$31.65
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.25
06/01/2016
$32.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.75
12/01/2016
$32.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.50
LABORER
LABORERS - ZONE 2
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 15 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - LABORER - Zone 2
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$38.29
$21.81
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$41.41
80
$24.92
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$44.52
90
$28.04
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$47.64
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
60
$18.69
2
70
3
4
Effective Date -
12/01/2015
Step
percent
1
60
$18.99
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$38.59
2
70
$22.16
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$41.76
3
80
$25.32
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$44.92
4
90
$28.49
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$48.09
Notes:
LABORER: CARPENTER TENDER
LABORERS - ZONE 2
06/01/2015
$31.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$50.75
12/01/2015
$31.65
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.25
$0.00
$51.75
06/01/2016
$32.15
$7.30
$12.30
12/01/2016
$32.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.50
06/01/2015
$31.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$50.75
12/01/2015
$31.65
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.25
06/01/2016
$32.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.75
12/01/2016
$32.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.50
06/01/2015
$31.35
$7.30
$12.25
$0.00
$50.90
12/01/2015
$31.85
$7.30
$12.25
$0.00
$51.40
06/01/2015
$31.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.00
12/01/2015
$31.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.50
06/01/2016
$32.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.00
$0.00
$52.75
LABORER: CEMENT FINISHER TENDER
LABORERS - ZONE 2
LABORER: HAZARDOUS WASTE/ASBESTOS REMOVER
LABORERS - ZONE 2
LABORER: MASON TENDER
LABORERS - ZONE 2
12/01/2016
$33.15
$7.30
$12.30
06/01/2015
$31.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$50.75
$0.00
$51.25
LABORER: MULTI-TRADE TENDER
LABORERS - ZONE 2
12/01/2015
$31.65
$7.30
$12.30
06/01/2016
$32.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.75
12/01/2016
$32.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.50
06/01/2015
$31.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$50.75
12/01/2015
$31.65
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.25
06/01/2016
$32.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.75
12/01/2016
$32.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.50
LABORER: TREE REMOVER
LABORERS - ZONE 2
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 16 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
This classification applies to all tree work associated with the removal of standing trees, and trimming and removal of branches and limbs when the work is not done for
a utility company for the purpose of operation, maintenance or repair of utility company equipment. For apprentice rates see "Apprentice- LABORER"
LASER BEAM OPERATOR
LABORERS - ZONE 2
06/01/2015
$31.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.00
12/01/2015
$31.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.50
06/01/2016
$32.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.00
$0.00
$52.75
12/01/2016
$33.15
$7.30
$12.30
08/01/2015
$38.08
$10.18
$17.25
$0.00
$65.51
$0.00
$65.96
MARBLE & TILE FINISHERS
BRICKLAYERS LOCAL 3 - MARBLE & TILE
Apprentice -
02/01/2016
$38.53
$10.18
$17.25
08/01/2016
$39.23
$10.18
$17.33
$0.00
$66.74
02/01/2017
$39.69
$10.18
$17.33
$0.00
$67.20
MARBLE & TILE FINISHER - Local 3 Marble & Tile
Effective Date -
08/01/2015
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$10.18
$17.25
$0.00
$46.47
$22.85
$10.18
$17.25
$0.00
$50.28
70
$26.66
$10.18
$17.25
$0.00
$54.09
80
$30.46
$10.18
$17.25
$0.00
$57.89
90
$34.27
$10.18
$17.25
$0.00
$61.70
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
50
$19.04
2
60
3
4
5
Effective Date -
02/01/2016
Step
percent
1
50
$19.27
$10.18
$17.25
$0.00
$46.70
2
60
$23.12
$10.18
$17.25
$0.00
$50.55
3
70
$26.97
$10.18
$17.25
$0.00
$54.40
4
80
$30.82
$10.18
$17.25
$0.00
$58.25
5
90
$34.68
$10.18
$17.25
$0.00
$62.11
Notes:
MARBLE MASONS,TILELAYERS & TERRAZZO MECH
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
08/01/2015
$49.90
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$78.65
02/01/2016
$50.47
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$79.22
08/01/2016
$51.37
$10.18
$18.65
$0.00
$80.20
02/01/2017
$51.94
$10.18
$18.65
$0.00
$80.77
20150914-048
Page 17 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - MARBLE-TILE-TERRAZZO MECHANIC - Local 3 Marble & Tile
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$53.70
$29.94
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$58.69
70
$34.93
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$63.68
4
80
$39.92
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$68.67
5
90
$44.91
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$73.66
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
50
$24.95
2
60
3
Effective Date -
02/01/2016
Step
percent
1
50
$25.24
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$53.99
2
60
$30.28
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$59.03
3
70
$35.33
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$64.08
4
80
$40.38
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$69.13
5
90
$45.42
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$74.17
Notes:
MECH. SWEEPER OPERATOR (ON CONST. SITES)
06/01/2015
12/01/2015
$42.42
$43.66
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$66.97
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.21
$0.00
$68.96
06/01/2016
$44.41
$10.00
$14.55
12/01/2016
$45.64
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.19
06/01/2017
$46.63
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$71.18
12/01/2017
$47.62
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$72.17
06/01/2015
$42.42
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$66.97
12/01/2015
$43.66
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.21
06/01/2016
$44.41
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.96
12/01/2016
$45.64
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.19
06/01/2017
$46.63
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$71.18
$0.00
$72.17
$0.00
$60.70
MECHANICS MAINTENANCE
12/01/2017
$47.62
$10.00
$14.55
04/01/2015
$34.69
$9.80
$16.21
MILLWRIGHT (Zone 2)
MILLWRIGHTS LOCAL 1121 - Zone 2
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 18 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - MILLWRIGHT - Local 1121 Zone 2
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$9.80
$4.48
$0.00
$33.36
$22.55
$9.80
$13.36
$0.00
$45.71
75
$26.02
$9.80
$14.18
$0.00
$50.00
85
$29.49
$9.80
$14.99
$0.00
$54.28
Step
percent
1
55
$19.08
2
65
3
4
Notes:
Steps are 2,000 hours
MORTAR MIXER
06/01/2015
LABORERS - ZONE 2
12/01/2015
$31.40
$31.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.00
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.50
$0.00
$52.00
06/01/2016
$32.40
$7.30
$12.30
12/01/2016
$33.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.75
06/01/2015
$21.97
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$46.52
12/01/2015
$22.62
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$47.17
06/01/2016
$23.01
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$47.56
12/01/2016
$23.66
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$48.21
06/01/2017
$24.17
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$48.72
12/01/2017
$24.69
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$49.24
06/01/2015
$25.68
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$50.23
12/01/2015
$26.43
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$50.98
$0.00
$51.44
OILER (OTHER THAN TRUCK CRANES,GRADALLS)
OILER (TRUCK CRANES, GRADALLS)
06/01/2016
$26.89
$10.00
$14.55
12/01/2016
$27.64
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$52.19
06/01/2017
$28.24
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$52.79
12/01/2017
$28.85
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$53.40
06/01/2015
$42.42
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$66.97
12/01/2015
$43.66
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.21
06/01/2016
$44.41
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.96
12/01/2016
$45.64
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.19
06/01/2017
$46.63
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$71.18
12/01/2017
$47.62
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$72.17
07/01/2015
$48.56
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$72.51
$0.00
$73.46
OTHER POWER DRIVEN EQUIPMENT - CLASS II
PAINTER (BRIDGES/TANKS)
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
01/01/2016
$49.51
$7.85
$16.10
07/01/2016
$50.46
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$74.41
01/01/2017
$51.41
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$75.36
20150914-048
Page 19 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - PAINTER Local 35 - BRIDGES/TANKS
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$7.85
$0.00
$0.00
$32.13
$26.71
$7.85
$3.66
$0.00
$38.22
60
$29.14
$7.85
$3.99
$0.00
$40.98
4
65
$31.56
$7.85
$4.32
$0.00
$43.73
5
70
$33.99
$7.85
$14.11
$0.00
$55.95
6
75
$36.42
$7.85
$14.44
$0.00
$58.71
7
80
$38.85
$7.85
$14.77
$0.00
$61.47
8
90
$43.70
$7.85
$15.44
$0.00
$66.99
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
50
$24.28
2
55
3
Effective Date -
01/01/2016
Step
percent
1
50
$24.76
$7.85
$0.00
$0.00
$32.61
2
55
$27.23
$7.85
$3.66
$0.00
$38.74
3
60
$29.71
$7.85
$3.99
$0.00
$41.55
4
65
$32.18
$7.85
$4.32
$0.00
$44.35
5
70
$34.66
$7.85
$14.11
$0.00
$56.62
6
75
$37.13
$7.85
$14.44
$0.00
$59.42
7
80
$39.61
$7.85
$14.77
$0.00
$62.23
8
90
$44.56
$7.85
$15.44
$0.00
$67.85
Notes:
Steps are 750 hrs.
PAINTER (SPRAY OR SANDBLAST, NEW) *
* If 30% or more of surfaces to be painted are new construction,
NEW paint rate shall be used.PAINTERS LOCAL 35 - ZONE 2
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
07/01/2015
$39.46
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$63.41
$0.00
$64.36
01/01/2016
$40.41
$7.85
$16.10
07/01/2016
$41.36
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$65.31
01/01/2017
$42.31
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$66.26
20150914-048
Page 20 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - PAINTER Local 35 Zone 2 - Spray/Sandblast - New
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$7.85
$0.00
$0.00
$27.58
$21.70
$7.85
$3.66
$0.00
$33.21
60
$23.68
$7.85
$3.99
$0.00
$35.52
4
65
$25.65
$7.85
$4.32
$0.00
$37.82
5
70
$27.62
$7.85
$14.11
$0.00
$49.58
6
75
$29.60
$7.85
$14.44
$0.00
$51.89
7
80
$31.57
$7.85
$14.77
$0.00
$54.19
8
90
$35.51
$7.85
$15.44
$0.00
$58.80
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
50
$19.73
2
55
3
Effective Date -
01/01/2016
Step
percent
1
50
$20.21
$7.85
$0.00
$0.00
$28.06
2
55
$22.23
$7.85
$3.66
$0.00
$33.74
3
60
$24.25
$7.85
$3.99
$0.00
$36.09
4
65
$26.27
$7.85
$4.32
$0.00
$38.44
5
70
$28.29
$7.85
$14.11
$0.00
$50.25
6
75
$30.31
$7.85
$14.44
$0.00
$52.60
7
80
$32.33
$7.85
$14.77
$0.00
$54.95
8
90
$36.37
$7.85
$15.44
$0.00
$59.66
Notes:
Steps are 750 hrs.
PAINTER (SPRAY OR SANDBLAST, REPAINT)
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
07/01/2015
$37.52
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$61.47
$0.00
$62.42
01/01/2016
$38.47
$7.85
$16.10
07/01/2016
$39.42
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$63.37
01/01/2017
$40.37
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$64.32
20150914-048
Page 21 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - PAINTER Local 35 Zone 2 - Spray/Sandblast - Repaint
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$7.85
$0.00
$0.00
$26.61
$20.64
$7.85
$3.66
$0.00
$32.15
60
$22.51
$7.85
$3.99
$0.00
$34.35
4
65
$24.39
$7.85
$4.32
$0.00
$36.56
5
70
$26.26
$7.85
$14.11
$0.00
$48.22
6
75
$28.14
$7.85
$14.44
$0.00
$50.43
7
80
$30.02
$7.85
$14.77
$0.00
$52.64
8
90
$33.77
$7.85
$15.44
$0.00
$57.06
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
50
$18.76
2
55
3
Effective Date -
01/01/2016
Step
percent
1
50
$19.24
$7.85
$0.00
$0.00
$27.09
2
55
$21.16
$7.85
$3.66
$0.00
$32.67
3
60
$23.08
$7.85
$3.99
$0.00
$34.92
4
65
$25.01
$7.85
$4.32
$0.00
$37.18
5
70
$26.93
$7.85
$14.11
$0.00
$48.89
6
75
$28.85
$7.85
$14.44
$0.00
$51.14
7
80
$30.78
$7.85
$14.77
$0.00
$53.40
8
90
$34.62
$7.85
$15.44
$0.00
$57.91
Notes:
Steps are 750 hrs.
PAINTER (TRAFFIC MARKINGS)
06/01/2015
LABORERS - ZONE 2
$31.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$50.75
$0.00
$51.25
12/01/2015
$31.65
$7.30
$12.30
06/01/2016
$32.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.75
12/01/2016
$32.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.50
07/01/2015
$38.06
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$62.01
01/01/2016
$39.01
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$62.96
07/01/2016
$39.96
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$63.91
01/01/2017
$40.91
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$64.86
For Apprentice rates see "Apprentice- LABORER"
PAINTER / TAPER (BRUSH, NEW) *
* If 30% or more of surfaces to be painted are new construction,
NEW paint rate shall be used.PAINTERS LOCAL 35 - ZONE 2
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 22 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - PAINTER - Local 35 Zone 2 - BRUSH NEW
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$7.85
$0.00
$0.00
$26.88
$20.93
$7.85
$3.66
$0.00
$32.44
60
$22.84
$7.85
$3.99
$0.00
$34.68
4
65
$24.74
$7.85
$4.32
$0.00
$36.91
5
70
$26.64
$7.85
$14.11
$0.00
$48.60
6
75
$28.55
$7.85
$14.44
$0.00
$50.84
7
80
$30.45
$7.85
$14.77
$0.00
$53.07
8
90
$34.25
$7.85
$15.44
$0.00
$57.54
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
50
$19.03
2
55
3
Effective Date -
01/01/2016
Step
percent
1
50
$19.51
$7.85
$0.00
$0.00
$27.36
2
55
$21.46
$7.85
$3.66
$0.00
$32.97
3
60
$23.41
$7.85
$3.99
$0.00
$35.25
4
65
$25.36
$7.85
$4.32
$0.00
$37.53
5
70
$27.31
$7.85
$14.11
$0.00
$49.27
6
75
$29.26
$7.85
$14.44
$0.00
$51.55
7
80
$31.21
$7.85
$14.77
$0.00
$53.83
8
90
$35.11
$7.85
$15.44
$0.00
$58.40
Notes:
Steps are 750 hrs.
PAINTER / TAPER (BRUSH, REPAINT)
07/01/2015
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
$36.12
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$60.07
$0.00
$61.02
01/01/2016
$37.07
$7.85
$16.10
07/01/2016
$38.02
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$61.97
01/01/2017
$38.97
$7.85
$16.10
$0.00
$62.92
20150914-048
Page 23 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - PAINTER Local 35 Zone 2 - BRUSH REPAINT
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$7.85
$0.00
$0.00
$25.91
$19.87
$7.85
$3.66
$0.00
$31.38
60
$21.67
$7.85
$3.99
$0.00
$33.51
4
65
$23.48
$7.85
$4.32
$0.00
$35.65
5
70
$25.28
$7.85
$14.11
$0.00
$47.24
6
75
$27.09
$7.85
$14.44
$0.00
$49.38
7
80
$28.90
$7.85
$14.77
$0.00
$51.52
8
90
$32.51
$7.85
$15.44
$0.00
$55.80
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
50
$18.06
2
55
3
Effective Date -
01/01/2016
Step
percent
1
50
$18.54
$7.85
$0.00
$0.00
$26.39
2
55
$20.39
$7.85
$3.66
$0.00
$31.90
3
60
$22.24
$7.85
$3.99
$0.00
$34.08
4
65
$24.10
$7.85
$4.32
$0.00
$36.27
5
70
$25.95
$7.85
$14.11
$0.00
$47.91
6
75
$27.80
$7.85
$14.44
$0.00
$50.09
7
80
$29.66
$7.85
$14.77
$0.00
$52.28
8
90
$33.36
$7.85
$15.44
$0.00
$56.65
Notes:
Steps are 750 hrs.
PANEL & PICKUP TRUCKS DRIVER
PIER AND DOCK CONSTRUCTOR (UNDERPINNING AND
DECK)
12/01/2012
$30.28
$9.07
$8.00
$0.00
$47.35
08/01/2015
$42.04
$9.80
$19.23
$0.00
$71.07
08/01/2015
$42.04
$9.80
$19.23
$0.00
$71.07
PILE DRIVER
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 24 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - PILE DRIVER - Local 56 Zone 1
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$9.80
$19.23
$0.00
$50.05
$25.22
$9.80
$19.23
$0.00
$54.25
70
$29.43
$9.80
$19.23
$0.00
$58.46
4
75
$31.53
$9.80
$19.23
$0.00
$60.56
5
80
$33.63
$9.80
$19.23
$0.00
$62.66
6
80
$33.63
$9.80
$19.23
$0.00
$62.66
7
90
$37.84
$9.80
$19.23
$0.00
$66.87
8
90
$37.84
$9.80
$19.23
$0.00
$66.87
Step
percent
1
50
$21.02
2
60
3
Notes:
PIPEFITTER & STEAMFITTER
09/01/2015
$49.69
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$76.28
$0.00
$77.28
03/01/2016
$50.69
$9.70
$16.89
09/01/2016
$51.69
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$78.28
03/01/2017
$52.69
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$79.28
Apprentice - PIPEFITTER - Local 537
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$9.70
$7.50
$0.00
$37.08
$22.36
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$48.95
60
$29.81
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$56.40
70
$34.78
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$61.37
80
$39.75
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$66.34
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
40
$19.88
2
45
3
4
5
Effective Date -
03/01/2016
Step
percent
1
40
$20.28
$9.70
$7.50
$0.00
$37.48
2
45
$22.81
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$49.40
3
60
$30.41
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$57.00
4
70
$35.48
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$62.07
5
80
$40.55
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$67.14
Notes:
** 1:3; 3:15; 1:10 thereafter / Steps are 1 yr.
Refrig/AC Mechanic **1:1;1:2;2:4;3:6;4:8;5:10;6:12;7:14;8:17;9:20;10:23(Max)
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 25 of 37
Classification
PIPELAYER
LABORERS - ZONE 2
Health
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Effective Date
Base Wage
06/01/2015
$31.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.00
12/01/2015
$31.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.50
06/01/2016
$32.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.00
12/01/2016
$33.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.75
09/01/2015
$50.46
$10.82
$15.14
$0.00
$76.42
$0.00
$77.57
PLUMBERS & GASFITTERS
PLUMBERS & GASFITTERS LOCAL 12
03/01/2016
$51.61
$10.82
$15.14
09/01/2016
$52.66
$10.82
$15.14
$0.00
$78.62
03/01/2017
$53.66
$10.82
$15.14
$0.00
$79.62
Apprentice - PLUMBER/GASFITTER - Local 12
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$10.82
$5.63
$0.00
$34.11
$20.18
$10.82
$6.37
$0.00
$37.37
55
$27.75
$10.82
$8.56
$0.00
$47.13
4
65
$32.80
$10.82
$10.03
$0.00
$53.65
5
75
$37.85
$10.82
$11.48
$0.00
$60.15
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
35
$17.66
2
40
3
Effective Date -
03/01/2016
Step
percent
1
35
$18.06
$10.82
$5.61
$0.00
$34.49
2
40
$20.64
$10.82
$6.36
$0.00
$37.82
3
55
$28.39
$10.82
$8.56
$0.00
$47.77
4
65
$33.55
$10.82
$10.02
$0.00
$54.39
5
75
$38.71
$10.82
$11.48
$0.00
$61.01
Notes:
** 1:2; 2:6; 3:10; 4:14; 5:19/Steps are 1 yr
Step4 with lic$56.90 Step5 with lic$63.40
PNEUMATIC CONTROLS (TEMP.)
09/01/2015
$49.69
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$76.28
03/01/2016
$50.69
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$77.28
09/01/2016
$51.69
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$78.28
03/01/2017
$52.69
$9.70
$16.89
$0.00
$79.28
06/01/2015
$31.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.00
12/01/2015
$31.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.50
06/01/2016
$32.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.00
12/01/2016
$33.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.75
06/01/2015
$32.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.75
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.25
$0.00
$52.75
$0.00
$53.50
PNEUMATIC DRILL/TOOL OPERATOR
LABORERS - ZONE 2
POWDERMAN & BLASTER
LABORERS - ZONE 2
12/01/2015
$32.65
06/01/2016
$33.15
$7.30
$12.30
12/01/2016
$33.90
$7.30
$12.30
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 26 of 37
Classification
POWER SHOVEL/DERRICK/TRENCHING MACHINE
Health
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Effective Date
Base Wage
06/01/2015
$42.83
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$67.38
12/01/2015
$44.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.63
06/01/2016
$44.83
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$69.38
12/01/2016
$46.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.63
06/01/2017
$47.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$71.63
$0.00
$72.63
12/01/2017
$48.08
$10.00
$14.55
06/01/2015
$42.83
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$67.38
$0.00
$68.63
PUMP OPERATOR (CONCRETE)
12/01/2015
$44.08
$10.00
$14.55
06/01/2016
$44.83
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$69.38
12/01/2016
$46.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.63
06/01/2017
$47.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$71.63
12/01/2017
$48.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$72.63
06/01/2015
$29.61
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$54.16
12/01/2015
$30.48
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$55.03
06/01/2016
$31.00
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$55.55
12/01/2016
$31.87
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$56.42
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$57.11
$0.00
$57.80
PUMP OPERATOR (DEWATERING, OTHER)
06/01/2017
$32.56
12/01/2017
$33.25
$10.00
$14.55
07/01/2015
$27.88
$7.98
$8.92
$0.00
$44.78
05/01/2016
$28.03
$7.98
$9.31
$0.00
$45.32
07/01/2016
$28.03
$8.23
$9.31
$0.00
$45.57
05/01/2017
$28.18
$8.23
$9.72
$0.00
$46.13
07/01/2017
$28.18
$8.48
$9.72
$0.00
$46.38
07/01/2015
$29.18
$7.98
$8.92
$0.00
$46.08
05/01/2016
$29.33
$7.98
$9.31
$0.00
$46.62
07/01/2016
$29.33
$8.23
$9.31
$0.00
$46.87
05/01/2017
$29.48
$8.23
$9.72
$0.00
$47.43
07/01/2017
$29.48
$8.48
$9.72
$0.00
$47.68
06/01/2015
$42.42
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$66.97
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.21
$0.00
$68.96
READY MIX CONCRETE DRIVERS after 4/30/10
(Drivers Hired After 4/30/2010) TEAMSTERS LOCAL 25c
READY-MIX CONCRETE DRIVER
TEAMSTERS LOCAL 25c
RECLAIMERS
12/01/2015
$43.66
06/01/2016
$44.41
$10.00
$14.55
12/01/2016
$45.64
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.19
06/01/2017
$46.63
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$71.18
12/01/2017
$47.62
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$72.17
04/01/2011
$24.24
$8.67
$15.51
$0.00
$48.42
05/01/2011
$24.24
$6.34
$6.23
$0.00
$36.81
RESIDENTIAL WOOD FRAME (All Other Work)
CARPENTERS -ZONE 2 (Residential Wood)
RESIDENTIAL WOOD FRAME CARPENTER **
** The Residential Wood Frame Carpenter classification applies
only to the construction of new, wood frame residences that do
not exceed four stories including the basement. CARPENTERS -ZONE
2 (Residential Wood)
As of 9/1/09 Carpentry work on wood-frame residential WEATHERIZATION projects shall be paid the RESIDENTIAL WOOD FRAME CARPENTER rate.
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 27 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - CARPENTER (Residential Wood Frame) - Zone 2
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$6.34
$0.00
$0.00
$20.88
$14.54
$6.34
$6.23
$0.00
$27.11
65
$15.76
$6.34
$6.23
$0.00
$28.33
4
70
$16.97
$6.34
$6.23
$0.00
$29.54
5
75
$18.18
$6.34
$6.23
$0.00
$30.75
6
80
$19.39
$6.34
$6.23
$0.00
$31.96
7
85
$20.60
$6.34
$6.23
$0.00
$33.17
8
90
$21.82
$6.34
$6.23
$0.00
$34.39
Step
percent
1
60
$14.54
2
60
3
Notes:
RIDE-ON MOTORIZED BUGGY OPERATOR
06/01/2015
LABORERS - ZONE 2
$31.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.00
$0.00
$51.50
12/01/2015
$31.90
$7.30
$12.30
06/01/2016
$32.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.00
12/01/2016
$33.15
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.75
06/01/2015
$42.42
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$66.97
12/01/2015
$43.66
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.21
06/01/2016
$44.41
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.96
12/01/2016
$45.64
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.19
06/01/2017
$46.63
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$71.18
12/01/2017
$47.62
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$72.17
08/01/2015
$40.11
$11.00
$12.00
$0.00
$63.11
$11.00
$12.00
$0.00
$64.01
ROLLER/SPREADER/MULCHING MACHINE
ROOFER (Inc.Roofer Waterproofng &Roofer Damproofg)
ROOFERS LOCAL 33
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
02/01/2016
$41.01
20150914-048
Page 28 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - ROOFER - Local 33
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$11.00
$3.38
$0.00
$34.44
$24.07
$11.00
$12.00
$0.00
$47.07
65
$26.07
$11.00
$12.00
$0.00
$49.07
4
75
$30.08
$11.00
$12.00
$0.00
$53.08
5
85
$34.09
$11.00
$12.00
$0.00
$57.09
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
50
$20.06
2
60
3
Effective Date -
02/01/2016
Step
percent
1
50
$20.51
$11.00
$3.38
$0.00
$34.89
2
60
$24.61
$11.00
$12.00
$0.00
$47.61
3
65
$26.66
$11.00
$12.00
$0.00
$49.66
4
75
$30.76
$11.00
$12.00
$0.00
$53.76
5
85
$34.86
$11.00
$12.00
$0.00
$57.86
Notes: ** 1:5, 2:6-10, the 1:10; Reroofing: 1:4, then 1:1
Step 1 is 2000 hrs.; Steps 2-5 are 1000 hrs.
ROOFER SLATE / TILE / PRECAST CONCRETE
ROOFERS LOCAL 33
08/01/2015
$40.36
$11.00
$12.00
$0.00
$63.36
$0.00
$64.26
02/01/2016
$41.26
$11.00
$12.00
08/01/2015
$43.31
$10.20
$21.48
$2.25
$77.24
$2.25
$78.24
For apprentice rates see "Apprentice- ROOFER"
SHEETMETAL WORKER
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
02/01/2016
$44.31
$10.20
$21.48
08/01/2016
$45.46
$10.20
$21.48
$2.25
$79.39
02/01/2017
$46.56
$10.20
$21.48
$2.25
$80.49
08/01/2017
$47.66
$10.20
$21.48
$2.25
$81.59
02/01/2018
$48.81
$10.20
$21.48
$2.25
$82.74
20150914-048
Page 29 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - SHEET METAL WORKER - Local 17-A
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$10.20
$4.90
$0.00
$32.42
$17.32
$10.20
$4.90
$0.00
$32.42
45
$19.49
$10.20
$9.59
$1.18
$40.46
4
45
$19.49
$10.20
$9.59
$1.18
$40.46
5
50
$21.66
$10.20
$10.45
$1.27
$43.58
6
50
$21.66
$10.20
$10.70
$1.28
$43.84
7
60
$25.99
$10.20
$12.17
$1.45
$49.81
8
65
$28.15
$10.20
$13.04
$1.54
$52.93
9
75
$32.48
$10.20
$14.76
$1.72
$59.16
10
85
$36.81
$10.20
$15.98
$1.89
$64.88
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
40
$17.32
2
40
3
Effective Date -
02/01/2016
Step
percent
1
40
$17.72
$10.20
$4.90
$0.00
$32.82
2
40
$17.72
$10.20
$4.90
$0.00
$32.82
3
45
$19.94
$10.20
$9.59
$1.19
$40.92
4
45
$19.94
$10.20
$9.59
$1.19
$40.92
5
50
$22.16
$10.20
$10.45
$1.28
$44.09
6
50
$22.16
$10.20
$10.70
$1.29
$44.35
7
60
$26.59
$10.20
$12.17
$1.47
$50.43
8
65
$28.80
$10.20
$13.04
$1.56
$53.60
9
75
$33.23
$10.20
$14.76
$1.75
$59.94
10
85
$37.66
$10.20
$15.98
$1.92
$65.76
Notes:
Steps are 6 mos.
SIGN ERECTOR
06/01/2013
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
$25.81
20150914-048
$7.07
$7.05
$0.00
$39.93
Page 30 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - SIGN ERECTOR - Local 35 Zone 2
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$7.07
$0.00
$0.00
$19.98
$14.20
$7.07
$2.45
$0.00
$23.72
60
$15.49
$7.07
$2.45
$0.00
$25.01
4
65
$16.78
$7.07
$2.45
$0.00
$26.30
5
70
$18.07
$7.07
$7.05
$0.00
$32.19
6
75
$19.36
$7.07
$7.05
$0.00
$33.48
7
80
$20.65
$7.07
$7.05
$0.00
$34.77
8
85
$21.94
$7.07
$7.05
$0.00
$36.06
9
90
$23.23
$7.07
$7.05
$0.00
$37.35
Step
percent
1
50
$12.91
2
55
3
Notes:
Steps are 4 mos.
SPECIALIZED EARTH MOVING EQUIP < 35 TONS
SPECIALIZED EARTH MOVING EQUIP > 35 TONS
SPRINKLER FITTER
SPRINKLER FITTERS LOCAL 550 - (Section A) Zone 1
08/01/2015
09/14/2015
$10.41
$9.33
$0.00
$51.68
$0.00
$52.43
12/01/2015
$31.94
$10.41
$10.08
06/01/2016
$32.44
$10.41
$10.08
$0.00
$52.93
08/01/2016
$32.44
$10.91
$10.08
$0.00
$53.43
12/01/2016
$32.44
$10.91
$10.89
$0.00
$54.24
08/01/2015
$32.23
$10.41
$9.33
$0.00
$51.97
12/01/2015
$32.23
$10.41
$10.08
$0.00
$52.72
06/01/2016
$32.73
$10.41
$10.08
$0.00
$53.22
08/01/2016
$32.73
$10.91
$10.08
$0.00
$53.72
12/01/2016
$32.73
$10.91
$10.89
$0.00
$54.53
03/01/2015
$54.43
$8.42
$14.90
$0.00
$77.75
10/01/2015
$55.58
$8.42
$14.90
$0.00
$78.90
$8.67
$15.05
$0.00
$79.30
$0.00
$80.30
01/01/2016
Issue Date:
$31.94
$55.58
03/01/2016
$56.58
$8.67
$15.05
10/01/2016
$57.73
$8.67
$15.05
$0.00
$81.45
03/01/2017
$58.73
$8.67
$15.05
$0.00
$82.45
20150914-048
Page 31 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - SPRINKLER FITTER - Local 550 (Section A) Zone 1
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$35.87
$21.77
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$38.59
45
$24.49
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$41.31
4
50
$27.22
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$44.04
5
55
$29.94
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$46.76
6
60
$32.66
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$49.48
7
65
$35.38
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$52.20
8
70
$38.10
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$54.92
9
75
$40.82
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$57.64
10
80
$43.54
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$60.36
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
35
$19.05
2
40
3
Effective Date -
10/01/2015
Step
percent
1
35
$19.45
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$36.27
2
40
$22.23
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$39.05
3
45
$25.01
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$41.83
4
50
$27.79
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$44.61
5
55
$30.57
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$47.39
6
60
$33.35
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$50.17
7
65
$36.13
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$52.95
8
70
$38.91
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$55.73
9
75
$41.69
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$58.51
10
80
$44.46
$8.42
$8.40
$0.00
$61.28
Notes: Apprentice entered prior 9/30/10:
40/45/50/55/60/65/70/75/80/85
Steps are 850 hours
STEAM BOILER OPERATOR
06/01/2015
$42.42
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$66.97
12/01/2015
$43.66
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.21
06/01/2016
$44.41
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.96
12/01/2016
$45.64
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.19
06/01/2017
$46.63
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$71.18
12/01/2017
$47.62
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$72.17
06/01/2015
$42.42
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$66.97
12/01/2015
$43.66
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.21
06/01/2016
$44.41
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.96
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.19
$0.00
$71.18
$0.00
$72.17
TAMPERS, SELF-PROPELLED OR TRACTOR DRAWN
12/01/2016
$45.64
06/01/2017
$46.63
$10.00
$14.55
12/01/2017
$47.62
$10.00
$14.55
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 32 of 37
Classification
TELECOMMUNICATION TECHNICIAN
Health
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Effective Date
Base Wage
09/01/2015
$34.25
$13.00
$14.06
$0.00
$61.31
03/01/2016
$34.63
$13.00
$14.55
$0.00
$62.18
Apprentice - TELECOMMUNICATION TECHNICIAN - Local 103
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$13.00
$0.41
$0.00
$27.11
$13.70
$13.00
$0.41
$0.00
$27.11
45
$15.41
$13.00
$11.03
$0.00
$39.44
45
$15.41
$13.00
$11.03
$0.00
$39.44
50
$17.13
$13.00
$11.30
$0.00
$41.43
55
$18.84
$13.00
$11.58
$0.00
$43.42
60
$20.55
$13.00
$11.86
$0.00
$45.41
65
$22.26
$13.00
$12.13
$0.00
$47.39
9
70
$23.98
$13.00
$12.41
$0.00
$49.39
10
75
$25.69
$13.00
$12.68
$0.00
$51.37
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
40
$13.70
2
40
3
4
5
6
7
8
Effective Date -
03/01/2016
Step
percent
1
40
$13.85
$13.00
$0.42
$0.00
$27.27
2
40
$13.85
$13.00
$0.42
$0.00
$27.27
3
45
$15.58
$13.00
$11.52
$0.00
$40.10
4
45
$15.58
$13.00
$11.52
$0.00
$40.10
5
50
$17.32
$13.00
$11.79
$0.00
$42.11
6
55
$19.05
$13.00
$12.06
$0.00
$44.11
7
60
$20.78
$13.00
$12.34
$0.00
$46.12
8
65
$22.51
$13.00
$12.62
$0.00
$48.13
9
70
$24.24
$13.00
$12.90
$0.00
$50.14
10
75
$25.97
$13.00
$13.17
$0.00
$52.14
Notes:
TERRAZZO FINISHERS
08/01/2015
$48.80
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$77.55
02/01/2016
$49.37
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$78.12
08/01/2016
$50.27
$10.18
$18.65
$0.00
$79.10
$10.18
$18.65
$0.00
$79.67
02/01/2017
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
$50.84
20150914-048
Page 33 of 37
Classification
Effective Date
Base Wage
Health
Apprentice - TERRAZZO FINISHER - Local 3 Marble & Tile
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$53.15
$29.28
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$58.03
70
$34.16
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$62.91
4
80
$39.04
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$67.79
5
90
$43.92
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$72.67
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Step
percent
1
50
$24.40
2
60
3
Effective Date -
02/01/2016
Step
percent
1
50
$24.69
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$53.44
2
60
$29.62
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$58.37
3
70
$34.56
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$63.31
4
80
$39.50
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$68.25
5
90
$44.43
$10.18
$18.57
$0.00
$73.18
Notes:
TEST BORING DRILLER
06/01/2015
12/01/2015
$36.45
$37.20
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$57.15
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$57.90
$0.00
$58.65
06/01/2016
$37.95
$7.30
$13.40
12/01/2016
$38.95
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$59.65
06/01/2015
$35.17
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$55.87
12/01/2015
$35.92
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$56.62
06/01/2016
$36.67
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$57.37
12/01/2016
$37.67
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$58.37
06/01/2015
$35.05
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$55.75
12/01/2015
$35.80
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$56.50
06/01/2016
$36.55
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$57.25
12/01/2016
$37.55
$7.30
$13.40
$0.00
$58.25
06/01/2015
$42.42
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$66.97
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.21
$0.00
$68.96
TEST BORING DRILLER HELPER
TEST BORING LABORER
TRACTORS/PORTABLE STEAM GENERATORS
12/01/2015
$43.66
06/01/2016
$44.41
$10.00
$14.55
12/01/2016
$45.64
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.19
06/01/2017
$46.63
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$71.18
12/01/2017
$47.62
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$72.17
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 34 of 37
Classification
TRAILERS FOR EARTH MOVING EQUIPMENT
Total Rate
08/01/2015
$32.52
$10.41
$9.33
$0.00
$52.26
12/01/2015
$32.52
$10.41
$10.08
$0.00
$53.01
06/01/2016
$33.02
$10.41
$10.08
$0.00
$53.51
08/01/2016
$33.02
$10.91
$10.08
$0.00
$54.01
$10.91
$10.89
$0.00
$54.82
$7.30
$13.80
$0.00
$68.43
$0.00
$69.18
06/01/2015
LABORERS (COMPRESSED AIR)
Supplemental
Unemployment
Base Wage
12/01/2016
TUNNEL WORK - COMPRESSED AIR
$33.02
$47.33
Health
Pension
Effective Date
12/01/2015
$48.08
$7.30
$13.80
06/01/2016
$48.83
$7.30
$13.80
$0.00
$69.93
12/01/2016
$49.83
$7.30
$13.80
$0.00
$70.93
06/01/2015
$49.33
$7.30
$13.80
$0.00
$70.43
12/01/2015
$50.08
$7.30
$13.80
$0.00
$71.18
06/01/2016
$50.83
$7.30
$13.80
$0.00
$71.93
12/01/2016
$51.83
$7.30
$13.80
$0.00
$72.93
06/01/2015
$39.40
$7.30
$13.80
$0.00
$60.50
12/01/2015
$40.15
$7.30
$13.80
$0.00
$61.25
06/01/2016
$40.90
$7.30
$13.80
$0.00
$62.00
$0.00
$63.00
TUNNEL WORK - COMPRESSED AIR (HAZ. WASTE)
LABORERS (COMPRESSED AIR)
TUNNEL WORK - FREE AIR
LABORERS (FREE AIR TUNNEL)
12/01/2016
$41.90
$7.30
$13.80
06/01/2015
$41.40
$7.30
$13.80
$0.00
$62.50
$0.00
$63.25
TUNNEL WORK - FREE AIR (HAZ. WASTE)
LABORERS (FREE AIR TUNNEL)
12/01/2015
$42.15
$7.30
$13.80
06/01/2016
$42.90
$7.30
$13.80
$0.00
$64.00
12/01/2016
$43.90
$7.30
$13.80
$0.00
$65.00
08/01/2015
$31.94
$10.41
$9.33
$0.00
$51.68
12/01/2015
$31.94
$10.41
$10.08
$0.00
$52.43
06/01/2016
$32.44
$10.41
$10.08
$0.00
$52.93
08/01/2016
$32.44
$10.91
$10.08
$0.00
$53.43
12/01/2016
$32.44
$10.91
$10.89
$0.00
$54.24
06/01/2015
$31.40
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.00
12/01/2015
$31.90
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$51.50
$7.30
$12.30
$0.00
$52.00
$0.00
$52.75
VAC-HAUL
WAGON DRILL OPERATOR
LABORERS - ZONE 2
06/01/2016
$32.40
12/01/2016
$33.15
$7.30
$12.30
06/01/2015
$42.83
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$67.38
12/01/2015
$44.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$68.63
06/01/2016
$44.83
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$69.38
12/01/2016
$46.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$70.63
06/01/2017
$47.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$71.63
12/01/2017
$48.08
$10.00
$14.55
$0.00
$72.63
09/01/2015
$50.46
$10.82
$15.14
$0.00
$76.42
03/01/2016
$51.61
$10.82
$15.14
$0.00
$77.57
09/01/2016
$52.66
$10.82
$15.14
$0.00
$78.62
$10.82
$15.14
$0.00
$79.62
WASTE WATER PUMP OPERATOR
WATER METER INSTALLER
PLUMBERS & GASFITTERS LOCAL 12
03/01/2017
$53.66
For apprentice rates see "Apprentice- PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER" or "PLUMBER/GASFITTER"
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 35 of 37
Classification
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Health
Pension
$25.66
$8.70
$4.48
$0.00
$38.84
09/01/2013
$36.55
$8.70
$6.58
$0.00
$51.83
09/01/2013
$29.94
$8.70
$6.05
$0.00
$44.69
09/01/2013
$23.52
$8.70
$5.24
$0.00
$37.46
09/01/2013
$36.35
$8.70
$9.43
$0.00
$54.48
09/01/2013
$32.08
$8.70
$6.59
$0.00
$47.37
09/01/2013
$23.52
$8.70
$3.72
$0.00
$35.94
09/01/2013
$19.25
$8.70
$2.85
$0.00
$30.80
09/01/2013
$42.77
$8.70
$11.78
$0.00
$63.25
Effective Date
Base Wage
09/01/2013
Outside Electrical - East
CABLE TECHNICIAN (Power Zone)
OUTSIDE ELECTRICAL WORKERS - EAST LOCAL 104
For apprentice rates see "Apprentice- LINEMAN"
CABLEMAN (Underground Ducts & Cables)
DRIVER / GROUNDMAN CDL
DRIVER / GROUNDMAN -Inexperienced (<2000 Hrs)
EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (Class A CDL)
EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (Class B CDL)
GROUNDMAN
GROUNDMAN -Inexperienced (<2000 Hrs.)
JOURNEYMAN LINEMAN
Apprentice - LINEMAN (Outside Electrical) - East Local 104
Pension
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
$8.70
$4.24
$0.00
$38.60
$27.80
$8.70
$4.71
$0.00
$41.21
70
$29.94
$8.70
$5.43
$0.00
$44.07
4
75
$32.08
$8.70
$6.16
$0.00
$46.94
5
80
$34.22
$8.70
$6.88
$0.00
$49.80
6
85
$36.35
$8.70
$7.62
$0.00
$52.67
7
90
$38.49
$8.70
$8.83
$0.00
$56.02
Step
percent
1
60
$25.66
2
65
3
Notes:
TELEDATA CABLE SPLICER
01/01/2015
01/01/2016
TELEDATA LINEMAN/EQUIPMENT OPERATOR
01/01/2016
TELEDATA WIREMAN/INSTALLER/TECHNICIAN
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
01/01/2015
01/01/2015
01/01/2016
$28.12
$28.98
$26.49
$27.31
$26.49
$27.31
20150914-048
$4.25
$3.09
$0.00
$35.46
$4.25
$3.12
$0.00
$36.35
$4.25
$3.04
$0.00
$33.78
$4.25
$3.07
$0.00
$34.63
$4.25
$3.04
$0.00
$33.78
$4.25
$3.07
$0.00
$34.63
Page 36 of 37
Classification
TREE TRIMMER
Supplemental
Unemployment
Total Rate
Health
Pension
$18.05
$3.55
$0.00
$0.00
$21.60
$18.51
$3.55
$0.00
$0.00
$22.06
Effective Date
Base Wage
02/01/2015
01/31/2016
This classification applies only to tree work done: (a) for a utility company, R.E.A. cooperative, or railroad or coal mining company, and (b) for the purpose of
operating, maintaining, or repairing the utility company’s equipment, and (c) by a person who is using hand or mechanical cutting methods and is not on the ground.
This classification does not apply to wholesale tree removal.
TREE TRIMMER GROUNDMAN
02/01/2015
$15.92
$3.55
$0.00
$0.00
$19.47
01/31/2016
$16.32
$3.55
$0.00
$0.00
$19.87
This classification applies only to tree work done: (a) for a utility company, R.E.A. cooperative, or railroad or coal mining company, and (b) for the purpose of
operating, maintaining, or repairing the utility company’s equipment, and (c) by a person who is using hand or mechanical cutting methods and is on the ground. This
classification does not apply to wholesale tree removal.
Additional Apprentice Information:
Minimum wage rates for apprentices employed on public works projects are listed above as a percentage of the pre-determined hourly wage rate established by the
Commissioner under the provisions of the M.G.L. c. 149, ss. 26-27D. Apprentice ratios are established by the Division of Apprenticeship Training pursuant to M.G.L.
c. 23, ss. 11E-11L.
All apprentices must be registered with the Division of Apprenticeship Training in accordance with M.G.L. c. 23, ss. 11E-11L.
All steps are six months (1000 hours.)
Ratios are expressed in allowable number of apprentices to journeymen or fraction thereof, unless otherwise specified.
** Multiple ratios are listed in the comment field.
*** APP to JM; 1:1, 2:2, 2:3, 3:4, 4:4, 4:5, 4:6, 5:7, 6:7, 6:8, 6:9, 7:10, 8:10, 8:11, 8:12, 9:13, 10:13, 10:14, etc.
**** APP to JM; 1:1, 1:2, 2:3, 2:4, 3:5, 4:6, 4:7, 5:8, 6:9, 6:10, 7:11, 8:12, 8:13, 9:14, 10:15, 10:16, etc.
Issue Date:
09/14/2015
20150914-048
Page 37 of 37
September 23, 2015
SECTION 011000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
Related Documents
Project Requirements
Specification Information
Definitions
Industry Standards
Codes and Regulations
Progress Schedule
Schedule of Values
Payment Requests
Procedures and Controls
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
Submittals
Warranties
Cutting and Patching
Temporary Facilities and Utilities
Products and Substitutions
Delivery, Storage and Handling
Owner-Furnished (OFCI) Products
Labels
Record Documents
Project Close Out
Final Cleaning and Repair
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
All of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. This Section applies to all Work performed
under the Contract.
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Project Identification: Bemis Hall – Basement Renovations, 15 Bedford Road, Lincoln, MA.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Existing Site Conditions and Restrictions: The existing building will be occupied during
construction. Parking is not allowed on the Ownerʼs property.
Utility Costs: The Owner will allow the use of existing utility systems and pay for cost of
utility services consumed, including electricity, water and gas. Do not waste. The
Contractor shall provide and pay for temporary heat prior to the complete enclosure of the
building and availability of suitable permanent systems.
Temporary Offices:
A separate field office for the Architect and the Owner's
Representative is not required.
Toilet Facilities: The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary toilets outside the
building.
B.
Permits and Fees: Apply for, obtain, and pay for permits, fees, and utility company
backcharges required to perform the work. Submit copies to Architect.
C.
Codes: Comply with applicable codes and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Submit
copies of inspection reports, notices and similar communications to Architect.
D.
Dimensions: Verify dimensions indicated on drawings with field dimensions before fabrication
or ordering of materials. Do not scale drawings.
E.
Existing Conditions: Notify Architect of existing conditions differing from those indicated on the
drawings.
011000 - 1
F.
Contractorʼs Conduct on Premises: The Contractor and their employees shall behave in a
respectful, courteous and safe manner. Abusive, harassing, and lewd behavior is prohibited.
Music playing is prohibited. Alcohol, tobacco, and drug use is prohibited.
1.
1.3
September 23, 2015
Comply with Ownerʼs security requirements.
SPECIFICATION INFORMATION
A.
These specifications are a specialized form of technical writing edited from master
specifications and contain deviations from traditional writing formats. Capitalization, underlining
and bold print is only used to assist reader in finding information and no other meaning is
implied.
B.
Except where specifically indicated otherwise, the subject of all imperative statements is the
Contractor.
C.
Sections are generally numbered in conformance with Construction Specifications Institute
Masterformat System. Numbering sequence is not consecutive. Refer to the table of contents
for names and numbers of sections included in this Project.
D.
Pages are numbered separately for each section. Each section is noted with "End of Section"
to indicate the last page of a section.
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B.
"Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C.
"Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as
"directed."
D.
"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E.
"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F.
"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G.
"Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H.
"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
011000 - 2
I.
1.5
September 23, 2015
"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
Referenced standards are part of the Contract Documents and have the same force and effect
as if bound with these specifications.
B.
Except where specifically indicated otherwise, comply with the current standard in effect as of
the date of the Owner/Contractor Agreement. Obtain copies of industry standards directly from
publisher.
C.
The titles of industry standard organizations are commonly abbreviated; full titles may be found
in Encyclopedia of Associations or consult Architect.
1.6
CODES AND REGULATIONS
A.
Comply with all applicable codes, ordinances, regulations and requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Submit copies of all permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, notices,
judgments, and communications from authorities having jurisdiction to the Architect.
1.7
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A.
1.8
Provide comprehensive bar chart schedule showing all major and critical minor portions of the
work, sequence of work and duration of each activity. Update and reissue regularly, but not less
than monthly.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
1.9
Prepare Schedule of Values to coordinate with application for payment breakdown. Submit at
least 10 days before first payment application. Update and reissue regularly, but not less than
monthly.
PAYMENT REQUESTS
A.
Provide three copies of each request on completely filled out copies of AIA G702 and
continuation sheet G703. Substantiate requests with complete documentation; include change
orders to date. Provide partial lien waivers for work in progress and full lien waivers for
completed work.
B.
Record Drawing Certification: Certify as a part of each application for payment that the project
record documents are current at the time of application is submitted. The Contractor shall
require such drawings to be current as a condition of approving any payment to the trade
Contractor and Subcontractor.
C.
Before first payment application, provide the following:
1.
2.
List of subcontractors, suppliers and fabricators.
Schedule of values.
011000 - 3
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
A.
Progress schedule.
Submittal schedule keyed to project schedule.
List of Contractor's key project personnel.
Copies of permits and other communications from authorities.
Contractor's certificate of insurance.
Performance and payment bonds if required.
Unit price schedule.
Before final payment application, provide and complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.10
September 23, 2015
Complete closeout requirements.
Complete punch list items.
Settle all claims.
Transmit record documents to Architect.
Prove that all taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid.
Remove temporary facilities and surplus materials.
Change lock cylinders or cores.
Clean the work.
Submit consent of surety, if any, for final payment.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
Project Meetings: Arrange for and attend meetings with the Architect and such other persons
as the Architect requests to have present. The Contractor shall be represented by a principal,
project manager, general superintendent or other authorized main office representative, as well
as by the Contractor's field superintendent. An authorized representative of any subcontractor
or sub-subcontractor shall attend such meetings if the representative's presence is requested by
the Architect. Such representatives shall be empowered to make binding commitments on all
matters to be discussed at such meetings, including costs, payments, change orders, time
schedules and manpower. Any notices required under the Contract may be served on such
representatives. Written reports of meeting minutes shall be prepared by the Contractor and
distributed by the Contractor to attendees, the Architect, and Owner within three business days.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pre-Construction Conference:
Attendance by Architect, Contractor, major
subcontractors.
Agenda shall include: Quality of workmanship, coordination,
interpretations, job schedule, submittals, approvals, requisition procedures, testing,
protection of construction, indoor air quality, and construction waste management.
Interior Finishes Meeting: Attendance by Architect, Contractor, major subcontractors.
Agenda shall include as applicable: Quality of workmanship, environmental conditions for
application of finishes, drywall details, millwork details, condition of surfaces to receive
finishes, tile work, painting work, samples and test areas and approvals, coordination with
mechanical and electrical interfaces and penetrations, indoor air quality.
Progress Meetings: Hold regularly before preparation of payment requests and additional
meetings as requested by the Architect. Attendance by Architect, Contractor, and others
as determined by Contractor. Agenda shall include work in progress and payment
requests.
Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before
each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction, as specified.
Preinstallation Conferences may be part of Progress Meeting agenda. Attendance by
Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by
the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations
011000 - 4
September 23, 2015
that have preceded or will follow. Agenda shall include a review of progress of other
construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration.
B.
Emergency Contacts: Furnish the Owner and Architect, in writing, the names and telephone
numbers of individuals to be contacted in the event of an out-of-hours emergency at the building
site. Post a similar list readily visible from the outside of the field office or a location acceptable
to the Architect.
C.
Layout: Layout work and be responsible for all lines, elevations, and measurements of the
building, grading, utilities and other work executed under the contract. Retain a registered
professional engineer or registered land surveyor, acceptable to the Architect, to initially
establish exterior lines and required elevations of all buildings and structures to be erected on
the site. The registered professional engineer or registered land surveyor shall certify the actual
location of the constructed facilities in relation to property lines, building lines, easements, setbacks, and other restrictive boundaries.
D.
Field Measurements: Verify measurements at the building prior to ordering materials or
commencing work. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed because of differences
between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the Drawings. Differences which
may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for decision before proceeding with the work.
E.
Field Measurements for Fixed Equipment: Dimensions for fixed equipment to be supplied under
this Contract or separate contracts shall be determined by field measurements taken jointly by
the Contractor and the equipment supplier involved. A record of the field measurements shall
be kept until time of substantial completion of the project, or until the equipment has been fully
installed and accepted by the Owner, whichever is later. Responsibility for fixed equipment
fabricated accurately to field measurements for proper fit and operation shall be that of the
Contractor. Contractor shall pay all costs involved in correcting any misfitting fixed equipment
as fabricated.
F.
Project Limit Line: The boundaries of the site do not limit the responsibility of the Contractor to
perform the work in its entirety. Make utility connections as indicated.
G.
Matching: Where matching is indicated, the Architect shall be the sole and final judge of what is
an acceptable match. Mockups and sample submissions are required.
H.
Observation: Notify the Architect and authorities having jurisdiction at least thirty-six hours in
advance of concealing any work.
I.
Utilities: Prior to interrupting utilities, services or facilities, notify the utility owner and the Owner
and obtain their written approval a minimum 48 hours in advance.
J.
Furnishings, Fixtures, and Equipment: Cooperate and permit the Owner to install their
furnishings and equipment during the progress of the work. Owner's installation of furnishings
or equipment does not signify Owner's acceptance of any portion of the work.
K.
Clean-Up: Frequently clean-up all waste, remove from site regularly, and legally dispose of offsite.
L.
Installer's Acceptance of Conditions: All installers shall inspect substrates and conditions under
which work is to be executed and shall report in writing to the Contractor all conditions
detrimental to the proper execution and completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until
011000 - 5
September 23, 2015
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work means installer accepts previous work
and conditions.
M.
Coordination: The Contractor shall be fully responsible for coordinating all trades, coordinating
construction sequences and schedules, and coordinating the actual installed location and
interface of all work.
1.
2.
N.
Request For Interpretation (RFIs):
1.
2.
3.
4.
O.
Prior to beginning mechanical, electrical and fire protection work, the Contractor shall
prepare coordination drawings showing the exact alignment, physical location and
configuration of the mechanical, electrical and fire protection installations and
demonstrating to the Contractor's satisfaction that the installations will clear all
obstructions, permit proper clearances for the Work of other trades, and present an
orderly appearance where exposed.
The Contractor shall be solely liable and
responsible for any costs and delays resulting from the Contractor's failure to prepare
such coordination drawings or from the negligent preparation of such coordination
drawings.
Exact locations and groupings of mechanical, electrical and fire protection fixtures,
switches, heads and outlets shall be obtained from the Architect before the Work is
roughed in. Work installed without such information from the Architect shall be relocated
at the Contractor's expense if the Architect so requests.
Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract
Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and
submit an RFI in the form specified.
a.
RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than
Contractor will be returned with no response.
Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation.
Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return
it. Allow three working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after
1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a.
Requests for approval of submittals.
b.
Requests for approval of substitutions.
c.
Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
d.
Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e.
Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f.
Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
Existing Articles of Unusual Value: If during demolition, excavation, or disposal work articles of
unusual value or of historical or archaeological significance are encountered, the ownership of
such articles is retained by the Owner, and information regarding their discovery shall be
immediately furnished to the Architect. If the nature of the article is such that work cannot
proceed without danger of damage, work in the area shall be immediately discontinued until the
Architect has determined the proper procedure to be followed. Delays in time thereby shall be a
condition for which the time of the Contract may be extended. Costs incurred after discovery in
the salvaging of such articles shall be borne by the Owner.
011000 - 6
1.11
September 23, 2015
SUBMITTALS
A.
Required Submittals: Submit shop drawings, product data, initial selection samples, verification
samples, calculations, coordination drawings, schedules, and all other submittals as specified in
individual specification sections.
B.
Submittal Schedule: Within 30 days after award of contract and before first application for
payment, prepare list of submittals in chronological sequence showing all submittals and
proposed date first due at Architect's office and proposed date due to be returned to Contractor.
Note relevant specification section number.
C.
Contractor's Preparation of Submittals: Modify and customize all submittals to show interface
with adjacent work and attachment to building. Identify each submittal with name of project,
date, Contractor's name, subcontractor's name, manufacturer's name, submittal name, relevant
specification section numbers, and Submittal Schedule reference number. Stamp and sign
each submittal to show the Contractor's review and approval of each submittal before delivery to
Architect's office; unstamped and unsigned submittals will be returned without action by the
Architect. Leave 4" x 6" open space for Architect's "action" stamp.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Product Data:
Provide manufacturer's preprinted literature including, without limitation,
manufacturer's standard printed description of product, materials and construction,
recommendations for application and use, certification of compliance with standards,
instructions for installation, and special coordination requirements. Collect data into one
submittal for each unit of work or system; mark each copy to show which choices and options
are applicable to project.
1.
E.
Installer Copy: Verify that the Installer has a current copy of the relevant product data,
including installation instructions, before permitting installation to begin.
Shop Drawings: Provide accurately prepared, large scale and detailed shop drawings prepared
specifically for this project. Show adjacent conditions and related work. Show accurate field
dimensions and clearly note field conditions. Identify materials and products in the work shown.
Note special coordination required.
1.
F.
Electronic Submittals: Provide a copy of all submittals in electronic format to the
Architect. Architect will return a file of reviewed submittal in electronic format to the
Contractor for distribution to subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, governing authorities
and others as necessary for proper performance of the Work. Unless otherwise
amenable to the Architect, additional hard copies of submittals will not be reviewed by the
Architect (or Consultant) and will not be returned to the Contractor.
Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.
Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Architect and Construction Manager.
Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Architect.
After Architect's action, follow specified distribution procedure.
Samples: Provide units identical with final materials and products to be installed in the work.
Where indicated, prepare samples to match Architect's sample. Label each sample with
011000 - 7
September 23, 2015
description, source, generic name or manufacturer's name and model number. Architect will
review samples for confirmation of visual design intent, color, pattern, texture and type only;
Architect will not test samples for compliance with other Contract requirements which shall
remain the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
1.
2.
Initial Selection Samples Submittal Quantities: For initial selection purposes, submit 1 set
of samples showing the complete range of colors and finishes available.
Verification Samples Submittal Quantities: For verification of an initial selection, submit 3
sets of samples; one set will be returned to Contractor to be maintained at project site for
quality control comparisons.
G.
Timing of Submittals: Submit submittals in a timely fashion to allow at least 10 business days
for each office's review and handling. This means that submittals which have to be reviewed by
the Architect and one of their consultants require at least 20 business days for review and
handling. Add ten business days for each additional consultant who must review a submission.
H.
Architect's Action on Submittals: Architect will review submittals, stamp with "action stamp",
mark action, and return to Contractor. Architect will review submittals only for conformance with
the design concept of the project. The Contractor is responsible for confirming compliance with
other Contract requirements, including without limitation, performance requirements, field
dimensions, fabrication methods, means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of
construction, coordination with other work. The Architect's review and approval of submittals
shall be held to the limitations stated in the Owner/Architect Agreement and the Conditions of
the Contract. In no case shall approval or acceptance by the Architect be interpreted as a
release of Contractor of their responsibilities to fulfill all of the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.
2.
1.12
Required Resubmittal: Unless submittal is noted "reviewed" or "reviewed except as
noted, resubmission not required," make corrections or changes to original and resubmit
to Architect.
Distribution: When submittal is noted "reviewed" or "reviewed as noted, resubmittal not
required," make prints or copies and distribute to Owner, Subcontractors involved, and to
all other parties requiring information from the submittal for performance or coordination
of related work.
WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties Required:
requirements.
Refer to individual trade sections for specific product warranty
B.
Procurement: Where a warranty is required, do not purchase or subcontract for materials or
work until it has been determined that parties required to countersign warranties are willing to do
so.
C.
Warranty Forms: Submit written warranty to Owner through Architect for approval prior to
execution. Furnish two copies of executed warranty to Owner for their records; furnish two
additional conformed copies where required for maintenance manual.
D.
Work Covered: Contractor shall remove and replace other work of project which has been
damaged as a result of failure of warranteed work or equipment, or which must be removed and
replaced to provide access to work under warranty. Unless otherwise specified, warranty shall
cover full cost of replacement or repair, and shall not be pro-rated on basis of useful service life.
011000 - 8
September 23, 2015
E.
Warranty Extensions: Work repaired or replaced under warranty shall be warranted until the
original warranty expiration date or for ninety days whichever is later in time.
F.
Warranty Effective Starting Date: Guarantee period for all work, material and equipment shall
begin on the date of substantial completion, not when subcontractor has completed their work
nor when equipment is turned on. In addition to the one year guarantees for the entire work
covered by these Contract Documents, refer to the various sections of the specifications for
extended guarantee or maintenance requirements for various material and equipment.
1.13
A.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
Limitations: Do not cut and patch any work in a manner that would result in a failure of the work
to perform as intended, decreased energy performance, increased maintenance, decreased
operational life, or decreased safety.
1.
Structural Work: Do not cut structural work or bearing walls without written approval from
Architect. Where cutting and patching of structural work is necessary and approved by
Architect, perform work in a manner which will not diminish structural capacity nor
increase deflection of member. Provide temporary shoring and bracing as necessary.
Ensure the safety of people and property at all times.
B.
Cutting and Patching Materials: Use materials identical to materials to be cut and patched. If
identical materials are not available or cannot be used, use materials that match existing
materials to the greatest extent possible. Provide finished work that will result in equal to or
better than existing performance characteristics.
C.
Inspection: Before cutting and patching, examine surfaces and conditions under which work is
to be performed and correct unsafe and unsatisfactory conditions prior to proceeding.
D.
Protection: Protect adjacent work from damage. Protect the work from adverse conditions.
E.
Cutting: Cut work using methods least likely to damage adjoining work. Use tools designed for
sawing or grinding, not hammering or chopping. Use saws or drills to ensure neat, accurately
formed holes to sizes required with minimum disturbance to adjacent work. Temporarily cover
openings; maintain weathertightness and safety.
1.
Utilities: Locate utilities before cutting. Provide temporary utilities as needed. Cap,
valve, or plug and seal ends of abandoned utilities to prevent entrance of moisture or
other foreign matter.
F.
Patching: Patch with seams and joints which are durable and not visible. Comply with specified
tolerances for similar new work; create true even planes with uniform continuous appearance.
Restore finishes of patched areas and, if necessary, extend finish restoration onto adjoining
unpatched area to eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. Repaint entire assemblies,
not just patched area. Remove and replace work which has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner as determined by the Architect.
G.
Qualifications: Retain experienced and specialized firms, original installers if possible, to
perform cutting and patching. Workmen shall be skilled in type of cutting and patching required.
011000 - 9
1.14
September 23, 2015
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND UTILITIES
A.
Scope of Temporary Work: This article is not intended to limit the scope of temporary work
required under the Contract. Provide all temporary facilities and utilities needed.
B.
Permits and Fees: Obtain and pay for all permits, fees and charges related to temporary work.
C.
Codes and Authorities Having Jurisdiction for Temporary Facilities and Utilities: Comply with all
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, codes, utility companies, OSHA, and industry
standards including, but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
NFPA Code 241, Building Construction and Demolition Operations.
ANSI-A10 Series, Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition.
NECA National Joint Guideline NJG-6, Temporary Job Utilities and Services.
Electrical Service: NEMA, NECA, and UL.
D.
Field Offices: Provide Contractor's field offices as needed. Keep current copies of all Contract
Documents and project paperwork neatly on file at jobsite. Permit Architect's unrestricted use of
Contractor's field office facilities including copiers, telephones, plan tables, and other
equipment. Furnish, maintain, and pay for light, power, phone, fax, and other field office
services.
E.
Shops and Sheds: At Contractor's option, provide shops and sheds for Contractor's use as
needed. Locate shops and sheds where acceptable to Owner and authorities having
jurisdiction. Prior to completion of construction, temporary storage facilities and surplus stored
materials shall be removed from the site.
F.
Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat as needed to protect the work and create a suitable
work environment. Provide temporary heat to protect the exterior construction against injury or
damage resulting from cold temperature and dampness, to heat materials, and to maintain the
minimum temperatures specified herein and in individual specification sections. Protect building
from soot, smoke and fire damage. Do not use heaters which would interfere with curing of
mortar and grout or damage any materials.
G.
Pumping and Drainage: Protect excavations, trenches, buildings and materials from rain water,
ground water, backup or leakage of sewers, drains and other piping, and from water of any
other origin. Promptly remove any accumulation of water. Provide and operate all pumps,
piping and other equipment necessary for pumping, drainage and protection from water.
H.
Equipment and Tools: Provide all equipment including, but not limited to, hoists, lifts,
scaffolding, machines, tools and the like, as needed for execution of the work. Provide safe
access to all parts of the work.
I.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures to maintain proper temperatures and to
prevent weather damage. Always maintain legal means of egress.
J.
Snow and Ice: Remove all snow and ice which interferes with work or safety.
K.
Streets, Walks and Grounds: Maintain public and private roads and walks clear of debris
caused by construction operations. Repair all damage caused to streets, drives, curbs,
sidewalks, fences, poles and similar items where disturbed or damaged by building construction
and leave them in as good condition after completion of the work as before operations started.
011000 - 10
September 23, 2015
L.
Protection: Protect nearby property and the public from construction activities. Provide and
maintain barricades, warning signs and lights, railings, walkways and similar items.
Immediately repair damaged property to its condition before being damaged.
M.
Public Services: Provide temporary public services such as, street lighting, night lighting,
sidewalks, covered passages, signs, signals and the like, as requested by authorities having
jurisdiction.
N.
Construction Fencing: Provide construction fencing and barriers as applicable to the project
and as required by code to protect personnel, the public, and to control access.
O.
Security: Secure site against unauthorized entry at all times. Provide secure, locked temporary
enclosures. Protect the work at all times. Provide watchman service, if necessary, to protect
the work.
P.
Signs: Erect project identification signs in compliance with details to be provided by Architect.
Signs shall be minimum 4' x 8' exterior grade plywood and shall contain the names of the
project, Owner, Architect, major Consultants, Contractor, and major financing institution. Except
for safety and warning signs, no other signs are permitted. Location as acceptable to the
Architect.
Q.
Fire Prevention: Take every precaution to prevent fire. Provide and maintain in good operating
condition suitable and adequate fire protection equipment and services, and comply with
recommendations regarding fire protection made by the representative of the fire insurance
company carrying insurance on the Work or by the local fire chief or fire marshal. The area
within the site limits shall be kept orderly and clean, and all combustible rubbish shall be
promptly removed from the site.
R.
Egress: Maintain safe and legal means of egress at all times. At all times, provide at least two
separate means of egress.
S.
Mold Control and Remediation During Construction: The Contractor shall protect construction
materials and building systems from moisture damage and from conditions which promote mold
growth during and after construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for mold remediation
and replacement of materials which cannot be successfully remediated in accordance with the
following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Materials which become wet prior to installation shall be cleaned, treated and dried in
accordance with EPA Guidelines.
Materials which exhibit mold growth prior to installation shall not be installed and shall be
removed from the site.
Materials which exhibit mold growth after installation shall be remediated in accordance
with EPA Guidelines for Remediating Building Materials with Mold Growth Caused by
Clean Water. The Contractor shall engage and pay for a qualified industrial hygienist
acceptable to the Owner to determine the cause of the mold growth, and to certify in
writing that materials have been successfully remediated. In the event that the industrial
hygienist recommends methods of remediation in addition to those in the Guidelines, the
Contractor shall also be responsible for the additional remediation. Materials which can
not be successfully remediated shall be removed and replaced with new materials at no
additional expense to the Owner.
011000 - 11
4.
T.
1.15
September 23, 2015
Prior to the start of construction, the Contractor shall submit the name of the person in the
Contractor's organization responsible for ensuring compliance with these requirements
for mold control and remediation.
Existing Mold-Contaminated Materials: In the event that mold-contaminated materials are
encountered during remodeling operations, the Contractor shall stop work in that area and notify
the Owner and Architect in writing. The Owner will engage and pay for an industrial hygienist to
evaluation the situation to advise the Contractor on the proper course of action.
PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Specified Products: In all cases in which a manufacturer's name, trade name or other
proprietary designation is used in connection with materials or articles to be furnished under this
Contract, whether or not the phrase "or equal" is used after such name, the Contractor shall
provide the product of the named manufacturers without substitution, unless a written request
for a substitution has been submitted by the Contractor and approved in writing by the Architect.
B.
Deviations from Detailed Requirements: If the Contractor proposes to use material which, while
suitable for the intended use, deviates in any way from the detailed requirements of the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall inform the Architect in writing of the nature of such deviations
at the time the materials is submitted for approval, and shall request written approval of the
deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
C.
Approval of Substitutions: In requesting approval of deviations or substitutions, the Contractor
shall provide evidence, including, but not limited to manufacturer's data, leading to a reasonable
certainty that the proposed substitution or deviation will provide a quality of result at least equal
to that attainable if the detailed requirements of the Contract Documents were strictly followed.
If, in the opinion of the Architect, the evidence presented by the Contractor does not provide a
sufficient basis for such reasonable certainty, the Architect may reject such substitution or
deviation without further investigation.
D.
Intent of Contract Documents: The Contract Documents are intended to produce a building of
consistent character and quality of design. All components of the building including visible
items of mechanical and electrical equipment have been selected to have a coordinated design
in relation to the overall appearance of the building. The Architect shall judge the design and
appearance of proposed substitutes on the basis of the suitability in relation to the overall
design of the Project, as well as for their intrinsic merits. The Architect will not approve as equal
to materials specified proposed substitutes which in the Architect's opinion, would be out of
character, obtrusive, or otherwise inconsistent with the character or quality of design of the
Project. In order to permit coordinated design of color and finishes the Contractor shall furnish
the substituted material in any color, finish texture, or pattern which would have been available
from the manufacturer originally specified, at no additional cost to the owner.
E.
Additional Costs or Impact: Any additional cost, or any loss or damage arising from the
substitution of any material or any method for those originally specified shall be borne by the
contractor, notwithstanding approval or acceptance of such substitution by the Owner or the
Architect, unless such substitution was made at the written request or direction of the Owner
and the Architect. Any decrease in the cost of the substitution shall be returned to the Owner.
F.
Manufacturers: To the greatest degree possible, provide primary materials and products from
one manufacturer for each type or kind. Provide secondary materials as recommended by
manufacturers of primary materials.
011000 - 12
September 23, 2015
G.
Substitution Requests: Refer to Section 016200 - SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM. Submit
3 copies. Identify product to be replaced by substitute by reference to specification sections and
drawing numbers. Provide Contractor's certification and evidence to prove compliance with
Contract Document requirements as acceptable to Architect.
H.
Substitution Conditions: Substitution requests will be returned without action unless one of the
following conditions is satisfied. The Contractor shall state which of the following conditions
applies to the requested substitution:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Request is due to an "or equal" clause.
Specified material or product cannot be coordinated with other work.
Specified material or product is not acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Substantial advantage is offered Owner in terms of cost, time, or other valuable
consideration.
Specified material or product is not available.
I.
Invalid Substitutions: Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of shop drawings,
samples, product data or other submittal is not a valid request for, nor an approval of a
substitution unless the Contractor presents the information when first submitted as a Request
for Substitution.
J.
Compatibility of Materials Used in the Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.16
A.
1.17
A.
Ensure complete compatibility between materials.
Compatibility shall include adhesion, erosion, solubility, differential thermal response, and
galvanic action.
Provide evidence of compatibility.
Provide custom testing where evidence is not available.
Where materials are not compatible, provide necessary isolation or transition materials
and provide details of same.
Correct defects resulting from incompatibility including de-construction and reconstruction of assemblies – whether materials are part of a submittal and substitution
process or not.
Proposed substitutions may be rejected where compatibility information is not provided;
or where compatibility is not adequately addressed, according to the Architectʼs
judgment; or where incompatible materials would negatively impact the projectʼs success.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Manufacturer's Instructions:
Strictly comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations and prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. Minimize longterm storage at the site. Maintain environmental conditions, temperature, ventilation, and
humidity within range permitted by manufacturers of materials and products used.
OWNER-FURNISHED CONTRACTOR-INSTALLED (OFCI) PRODUCTS
Owner will furnish products indicated. The Contractorʼs Work includes providing support
systems to receive Owner's equipment and making plumbing, mechanical, and electrical
connections.
1.
Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to
Contractor.
011000 - 13
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
1.18
A.
1.19
September 23, 2015
Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be present
for and assist in Owner's inspection.
If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for
replacement.
Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's
warranties to Contractor.
Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished
products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall
designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to
Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product.
Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items at
Project site.
Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during
storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.
If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor
shall repair or replace them.
Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner-furnished items into the Work.
Owner-Furnished Products: None at this issue.
LABELS
Labels, Trademarks, & Tradenames: Locate required labels on inconspicuous surfaces. Do not
provide labels, nameplates, or trademarks which are not required. Provide permanent data
plate on each item of equipment stating manufacturer, model, serial number, capacity, ratings
and all other essential data.
RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
General: Keep record documents neatly and accurately. Record information as the work
progresses and deliver to Architect at time of final acceptance. Include in record documents all
field changes made, all relevant dimensions, and all relevant details of the work. Keep record
documents up to date with all field orders and change orders clearly indicated.
B.
Drawings: Keep four separate sets of blackline prints at the site, one set each for mechanical,
electrical, plumbing, and architectural/structural disciplines. Neatly and accurately note all
deviations from the Contract Documents and the exact actual location of the work as installed.
Marked-up and colored prints will be used as a guide to determine the progress of the work
installed. Requisitions for payment will not be approved until the record documents are accurate
and up-to-date.
1.
2.
3.
Work Outside Building: Record data outside of building to an accuracy of plus or minus 1
inch and determine and record the invert elevation of all drain lines.
At completion of the work, submit one complete set of marked-up prints for review. After
acceptance, these marked-up prints shall be used in the preparation of the record
drawings.
Architect shall furnish Contractor with AutoCAD files for originals of the Contract
Drawings. Make modifications to these files as shown on the marked-up prints. Remove
superseded data to show the completed installation.
011000 - 14
4.
September 23, 2015
Deliver the completed AutoCAD record drawings, in the same version as Contract
Drawings, properly titled and dated to the Architect. Indicate preparer of record drawings.
These record drawings shall become the property of the Owner.
C.
Specifications: Maintain one clean copy of complete specifications [including addenda,
modifications, and bulletins with changes, substitutions, and selected options clearly noted.
Circle or otherwise clearly indicate which manufacturer and products are actually used.
D.
Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Manuals shall be submitted which contain the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Description of the system provided.
Handling, storage, and installation instructions.
Detailed description of the function of each principal component of the systems or
equipment.
Operating procedures, including prestartup, startup, normal operation, emergency
shutdown, normal shutdown and troubleshooting.
Maintenance procedures including lubrication requirements, intervals between lubrication,
preventative and repair procedures, and complete spare parts list with cross reference to
original equipment manufacturer's part numbers.
Control and alarm features including schematic of control systems, control loop electric
ladder diagrams, controller operating set points, settings for alarms and shutdown
systems, pump curves and fan curves.
Safety and environmental considerations.
E.
Copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Three copies of the manuals shall be provided
within sufficient time to allow for training of Owner's personnel. Submit one copy of the manuals
to the Architect for review no later than 90 calendar days prior to substantial completion, or
building turn over, whichever comes first. Submit the remaining five copies within 15 days after
first review set is returned to contractor. Progress payment may be withheld if this requirement
is not met.
F.
Additional Requirements for Operating and Maintenance Manuals: The requirements for
manuals applies to each packaged and field-fabricated operating system. The manuals shall be
provided in three-ring side binders with durable plastic covers. The manuals shall contain a
detailed table of contents and have tab dividers for major sections and special equipment.
G.
Framed Data: Provide charts and lists of all valves, circuits, switches, controls and equipment.
Install on walls under glass at locations directed by Architect.
1.20
A.
PROJECT CLOSE OUT
Complete the following prior to Substantial Completion:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Provide Contractor's Punch List of incomplete items stating reason for incompletion and
value of incompletion.
Advise Owner of insurance change over requirements.
Submit all warranties, maintenance contracts, final certificates and similar documents.
Obtain Certificate of Occupancy and similar releases which permit the Owner's full and
unrestricted use of the areas claimed "Substantially Complete".
Submit record documents.
Deliver maintenance stocks of materials where specified.
011000 - 15
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
September 23, 2015
Make final change over of lock cylinders or cores and advise Owner of change of security
responsibility.
Complete startup of all systems and instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation and
routine maintenance of systems and equipment.
Complete clean up and restoration of damaged finishes.
Remove all temporary facilities and utilities that are no longer needed.
Request Architect's inspection for Substantial Completion.
B.
Architect will either issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of work
which must be performed prior to issue of certificate.
C.
Complete the following prior to Final Acceptance and payment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.21
A.
FINAL CLEANING AND REPAIR
Clean Up: Immediately prior to the Architect's inspection for Substantial Completion, the
Contractor shall completely clean the premises and clean and prepare the completed work in
order for it to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Such work shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Obtain Certificate of Substantial Completion.
Submit final application for payment, showing final accounting of changes in the work.
Provide final releases and lien waivers not previously submitted.
Submit certified copy of final punch list stating that Contractor has completed or corrected
each item.
Submit final meter readings, record of stored fuel and similar information.
Submit Consent of Surety for final payment.
Submit evidence of Contractor's continuing insurance coverage (if required by Contract
Documents).
Concrete and ceramic surfaces shall be cleaned and washed.
Resilient coverings shall be cleaned, waxed and buffed as applicable.
Woodwork shall be dusted and cleaned.
Sash, fixtures and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned.
Stains, spots, dust, marks and smears shall be removed from all surfaces.
Hardware and metal surfaces shall be cleaned and polished.
Glass and plastic surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by professional window cleaners.
Damaged, broken or scratched glass or plastic shall be replaced by the Contractor at the
Contractor's expense.
Vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces with high efficiency particulate arrestor (HEPA)
vacuum.
Use low-emitting, environmentally friendly cleaning agents and procedures.
Pest Control: Engage a licensed exterminator, who practices integrated pest management
(IPM), to inspect the project and eliminate rodents, termites and all other insects and pests.
Coordinate pest control plan with Owner. Ownerʼs written approval is required prior to
application. Submit proposed program to Owner and Architect. Program shall clearly indicate
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Area or areas to be treated.
Manufacturer's printed instructions and MSDS for each chemical to be used.
Pollution preventive measures to be employed.
011000 - 16
C.
September 23, 2015
Repairs: Repair and touch-up all damaged and deteriorated products and surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [Not Used]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [Not Used]
END OF SECTION
011000 - 17
September 23, 2015
SECTION 012300
ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
For each of the alternates Scheduled at the end of this Section, state the amount in the
proposal to be added to or deducted from the Contract Sum for the work.
ALTERNATES
A.
Definition: "Alternates" are alternate products, materials, equipment, systems, methods, units of
work or major elements of the construction, which may, at the Owner's option and under the
terms established by the Contract or Agreement, be selected for the work in lieu of the
corresponding requirements of the Contract Documents. Selection may occur prior to the
Contract Date, or may, by the Agreement, be deferred for possible selection at a subsequent
date.
B.
Alternate Requirements: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Each
alternate is defined using abbreviated language, recognizing that the Contract Documents
define the requirements. Coordinate related work to ensure that work affected by each
alternate is complete and properly interfaced with work of each selected alternate.
C.
Provide written proposals for each alternate on the Bid Form for Owner's consideration. Each
proposal amount shall include the entire cost of the alternate portion of the work including
overhead, profit, and other costs including cost of interfacing and coordinating the alternate with
related and adjacent work.
D.
Selection of Alternates: Selection of alternates to be included in the work will be by the Owner.
E.
Notification: Immediately following award of Contract, prepare and distribute to each entity a
notification of status of each alternate. Indicate which alternates have been accepted, rejected,
or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include full description of negotiated modifications
to alternates, if any
PART 2 - PRODUCTS [Not Used]
ALTERNATES
012300 - 1
September 23, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A.
Alternate No. 1: Provide interior fixed glass lites (six total) with clear finished fir trim at wall
between corridor and CoA Program Space. Provide doors and associated trim between Corridor
and CoA Program Space clear finished fir. Base bid is no windows in corridor wall (just GWB
primed for paint) and doors with associated trim to be primed for paint.
B.
Alternate No. 2: Provide new window well and vinyl windows and adjacent construction as
indicated on the Drawings. Base bid is no work in the area of the window (except insulated
interior stud wall and GWB).
END OF SECTION
ALTERNATES
012300 - 2
September 23, 2015
SECTION 024100
DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are hereby made a part of this Section of
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1.
1.3
Demolition and removal of selected portions of buildings and structures and as required
for new work. Refer to the Drawings for additional requirements.
Demolition and removal of selected site elements and as required for new work. Refer to
the Drawings for additional requirements.
Salvage of existing items to be reused or turned over to the facility.
Removal and legal disposal of demolished materials off site. Except those items
specifically designated to be relocated, reused, or turned over to the facility, all existing
removed materials, items, trash and debris shall become property of the Contractor and
shall be completely removed from the site and legally disposed of at her/his expense.
Salvage value belongs to the Contractor. On-site sale of materials is not permitted.
Demolition and removal work shall properly prepare for alteration work and new
construction to be provided under the Contract.
Scheduling and sequencing operations without interruption to utilities serving occupied
areas. If interruption is required, obtain written permission from the utility company and
the Owner. Provide temporary services as necessary to serve occupied and usable
facilities when permanent utilities must be interrupted, or schedule interruption when the
least amount of inconvenience will result.
Section 011000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for Temporary Facilities And Controls:
a.
Maintenance of access, cleaning during construction, dust and noise control.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to the
Owner ready for reuse, at a location designated by the Owner. Protect from weather until
accepted by Owner.
DEMOLITION
024100 - 1
September 23, 2015
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated. Protect from weather until reinstallation.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with early and late starting
and finishing dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted
if applicable.
Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
Use of elevator and stairs.
Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of
egress, including for other occupants affected by selective demolition operations.
Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
Ownerʼs partial occupancy of completed Work.
Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building.
B.
Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed
and salvaged, and turned over the Owner.
C.
Predemolition Videotapes: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
selective demolition operations. Comply with Division 01. Submit before Work begins.
D.
Landfill Records: Provide trip tickets (receipts) indicating receipt and acceptance of hazardous
wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Examination of Existing Conditions: The Contractor shall examine the Contract Drawings for
demolition and removal requirements and provisions for new work. Verify all existing conditions
and dimensions before commencing work. The Contractor shall visit the site and examine the
existing conditions as he finds them and shall inform herself/himself of the character, extent and
type of demolition and removal work to be performed. Submit any questions regarding the
extent and character of the demolition and removal work in the manner and within the time
period established for receipt of such questions during the bidding period.
B.
Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work
similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
C.
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications:
program.
D.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
DEMOLITION
024100 - 2
Certified by an EPA-approved certification
September 23, 2015
E.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
F.
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Section 011000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Project Meetings. Review methods and
procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by selective demolition operations.
Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
2.1
SALVAGING
A.
Salvaged for Reinstallation: Materials indicated on the Drawings or designated in the field by
the Owner to be salvaged and reinstalled shall be carefully removed and stored at a location
acceptable to the Architect and Owner.
B.
Salvaged for Storage: Materials indicated on the Drawings or designated in the field by the
Owner to be salvaged and stored shall be carefully removed and delivered to the Owner at
locations determined by Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
DEMOLITION
024100 - 3
September 23, 2015
E.
Engage a professional engineer registered in the state that the project is located to survey
condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural
deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during
selective demolition operations.
F.
Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction videotapes.
1.
G.
3.2
Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be
reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements,
materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.3
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies and Owner.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before
proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass
area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other
parts of building.
Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. Where entire wall is to be removed,
existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall.
Prior to commencing cutting work in existing surfaces, take all precautionary measures to
assure that mechanical and electrical services to the particular area have been made
inactive.
Coordinate with Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, and Electrical
subcontractors. Only licensed tradesmen of that particular trade shall disconnect and
cap existing mechanical and electrical items that are to be removed, abandoned and/or
relocated.
If, during the process of cutting work, existing utility lines are encountered which are not
indicated on the Drawings, regardless of their condition, immediately report such items to
the Architect. Do not proceed with work in such areas until instructions are issued by the
Architect. Continue work in other areas.
PREPARATION
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
2.
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 011000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Temporary Facilities and Controls.
Maintain adequate passage to and from all exits at all times. Before any work is done
which significantly alters access or egress patterns, consult with the Architect and obtain
approval of code required egress. Under no condition block or interfere with the free flow
of people at legally required exits, or in any way alter the required condition of such exits.
DEMOLITION
024100 - 4
B.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.
3.4
Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
Remove temporary shoring, bracing and structural supports when no longer required.
Post warning signs and place barricades as applicable during placement and removal of
temporary shoring.
Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and
facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around demolition area(s).
1.
D.
September 23, 2015
Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered
passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary
barricades as required to limit access to demolition areas.
Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids,
flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with demolition operations.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable
fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
Removed and Salvaged Items:
DEMOLITION
024100 - 5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
September 23, 2015
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
Transport items to storage area designated by the Owner.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
equipment to match new equipment.
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
D.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
E.
Items for Re-use and Preservation of Existing Surfaces to Remain:
1.
2.
3.5
The Contractor shall inspect closely each item specifically designated to be relocated, reused, or turned over to the Owner prior to its removal, and immediately report damages
and defects to the Architect and the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
subsequent damage to the same other than latent defects not readily apparent from close
inspection, and shall bear responsibility for its repair or same replacement as directed by
the Architect, to the satisfaction of the Owner.
Unless special surface preparation is specified under other Specification Sections, leave
existing surfaces that are to remain in a condition suitable to receive new materials and/or
finishes.
PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PROPERTY
A.
Provide all measures required by federal, state and municipal laws, regulations, and ordinances
for the protection of surrounding property, the public, workmen, and Ownerʼs employees during
all demolition and removal operations. Measures are to be taken, but not limited to installation
of sidewalks, sheds, barricades, fences, warning lights and signs, trash chutes and temporary
lighting.
B.
Protect all walks, roads, streets, curbs, pavements, trees and plantings, on and off premises,
and bear all costs for correcting such damage as directed by the Architect, and to the
satisfaction of the Owner.
C.
Demolition shall be performed in such a manner that will insure the safety of adjacent property.
Protect adjacent property from damage and protect persons occupying adjacent property from
injuries which might occur from falling debris or other cause and so as not to cause interference
with the use of other portions of the building, of adjacent buildings or the free access and safe
passage to and from the same.
DEMOLITION
024100 - 6
September 23, 2015
D.
Every precaution shall be taken to protect against movement or settlement of the building, of
adjacent buildings, sidewalks, roads, streets, curbs and pavements. Provide and place at the
Contractorʼs own expense, all necessary bracing and shoring in connection with demolition and
removal work.
E.
Remove portions of structures with care by using tools and methods that will not transfer heavy
shocks to existing and adjacent building structures, both internal and external of the particular
work area.
F.
Provide and maintain in proper condition, suitable fire resistive dust barriers around areas where
interior demolition and removal work is in progress. Dust barriers shall prevent the dust
migration to adjacent areas. Remove dust barriers upon completion of major demolition and
removal in the particular work area.
3.6
DISCOVERY OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A.
If hazardous materials, such as chemicals, asbestos-containing materials, or other hazardous
materials are discovered during the course of the work, cease work in affected area only and
immediately notify the Architect and the Owner of such discovery. Do not proceed with work in
such areas until instructions are issued by the Architect. Continue work in other areas.
B.
If unmarked containers are discovered during the course of the work, cease work in the affected
area only and immediately notify the Architect and the Owner of such discovery. Do not
proceed with work in such areas until instructions are issued by the Architect. Take immediate
precautions to prohibit endangering the containers integrity. Continue work in other areas.
3.7
CUTTING
A.
Perform all cutting of existing surfaces in a manner which will ensure a minimal difference
between the cut area and new materials when patched. Use extreme care when cutting existing
surfaces containing concealed utility lines which are indicated to remain and bear full
responsibility for repairing or replacement of all such utilities that are accidentally damaged.
B.
Provide a flush saw cut edge where pavement, curb and concrete removals abut new
construction work or existing surfaces to remain undisturbed.
3.8
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
DEMOLITION
024100 - 7
3.9
September 23, 2015
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Premises shall be left in a clean condition and ready to accept alteration
work and new construction.
END OF SECTION
DEMOLITION
024100 - 8
September 23, 2015
SECTION 037300
CONCRETE PATCHING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
General Requirements, apply to the work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Fill with concrete all existing openings in slabs and decks of floors and roofs where such
openings are not required for the completion of the Work.
B.
Patching existing disturbed concrete surfaces.
1.
1.03
A.
RELATED WORK
Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited to:
1.
2.
1.04
Cut and remove designated portions of interior slab-on-grade as required for trench work.
Section 022210, Selective Demolition.
Section 035300, Concrete Toppings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for all
products in concrete, including certifications and other data as may be required to show
compliance with the Contract Documents.
B.
Manufacturer's Review: Submit written signed statement, that Contract Documents have been
reviewed by qualified representatives of the materials manufacturer, and that materials and
system to be used for floor underlayment are proper and adequate for the applications shown.
1.05
A.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Owner reserves the right to retain an independent testing laboratory to inspect the work.
Neither presence of the testing laboratory, nor any observations and testing performed by the
laboratory shall relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities for the Work.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers identified with brand, type, grade, date
of manufacture, class, lot number, and other qualifying information.
B.
Store materials in original sealed containers, in dry enclosed storage area, within temperature
range recommended by manufacturer.
CONCRETE PATCHING
037300 - 1
1.07
September 23, 2015
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain manufacturer's current installation instructions at Project site.
B.
Maintain interior building area above 50oF before, during, and after installation of concrete
underlayment until structure and subfloor temperatures are stabilized.
C.
Provide and maintain adequate ventilation until underlayment cures completely.
D.
Coordinate application of concrete underlayment with work of other Sections.
1.08
A.
PROTECTION
Protect adjacent surfaces and repair, restore, or replace soiled or damaged in performance of
underlayment work.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Concrete Materials:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Portland Cement: ANSI/ASTM C 150, Type 1 unless other types specified in writing by
Architect/Engineer.
a. Use one brand of cement throughout project, unless otherwise acceptable to
Architect.
Normal Weight Aggregates: ANSI/ASTM C 33, and as herein specified. Provide
aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete.
a. Local aggregates not complying with ANSI/ASTM C 33, but which have shown by
special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability,
may be used when acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.
Water: Potable and free of substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel.
Bonding Agent: Silpro C-21 Acrylic Latex manufactured by Silpro Masonry Systems, Inc., Ayer,
MA.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
CUTTING FOR TRENCHES
A.
B.
C.
3.02
Cut out designated portions of existing concrete slab to accommodate trench excavation.
Perform cutting of concrete slab-on-grade with suitable saws.
Cut slabs in straight lines parallel to trench, leaving no jagged edges.
FILLING OF OPENINGS
A.
Shortly before placing concrete, saturate the perimeter edges of the openings with water. After
the free or glistening water disappears, the edges shall be given a thorough coating of neat
cement slurry mixed to the consistency of thick paste and scrubbed in with a stiff bristle brush.
B.
The concrete mixture shall consist of one part cement, approximately one part fine aggregate
and approximately two parts coarse aggregate by damp loose volume. The coarse aggregate
CONCRETE PATCHING
037300 - 2
September 23, 2015
shall have a maximum size of 3/8". The exact proportions of fine and coarse aggregate shall
be adjusted to produce a well-graded total aggregate. Mixing water shall not exceed 4-1/2
gallons per sack of cement (0.399 absolute ratio by weight). The mixture shall be of zero
slump.
C.
Place mix and strike level with adjacent surfaces.
D.
Install all framing , formwork and dowels required for the placing of concrete and of bonding
new concrete to existing.
E.
A commercial nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, approved by the Architect, may be used in lieu of
the specified concrete mix.
F.
Color and texture of concrete shall match that of existing abutting concrete.
3.03
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A.
General: Repair all concrete surfaces disturbed by the Work.
B.
Patching: Repair disturbed areas by patching with cement mortar .
1.
2.
Cut out concrete as required to complete the Work. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to
the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush-coat the area to be
patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound has
dried. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement
so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at
inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE PATCHING
037300 - 3
September 23, 2015
SECTION 042000
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
1.
1.3
Concrete masonry units.
Face brick, including installation of salvaged brick.
Granite sills, including remodeling existing granite.
Remodeling existing masonry.
Remodeling existing granite sills.
Mortar and grout.
Flashing and sheet metal built into masonry assemblies.
Reinforcing steel, masonry joint reinforcement, ties and anchors.
Installing loose lintels at openings, duct penetrations and as indicated, furnished under
Section 055000 – METAL FABRICATIONS.
Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for sealing control and expansion joints in unit
masonry.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For the following:
1.
2.
C.
Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Exposed concrete masonry units.
Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks.
Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used
on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 1
4.
September 23, 2015
Accessories embedded in masonry.
D.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
E.
Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be
used to comply with cold-weather requirements.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for
testing indicated.
B.
Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one
source from a single manufacturer for each product required.
C.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including
color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and
from one source or producer for each aggregate.
D.
Preconstruction Testing Service: The Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency
to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by
the Owner. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
1.
Prism Test: For each type of construction required, per ASTM C 1314.
E.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those
of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and
inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
F.
Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 01 for mockups.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Build sample panels for typical exterior and interior walls in sizes approximately 48 inches
long by 48 inches high by full thickness.
Where masonry is to match existing, erect panels adjacent and parallel to existing
surface.
Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated.
Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;
relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic
qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically
approved by Architect in writing.
a.
G.
Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are
specifically approved by Architect in writing.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01. Agenda shall include protection of air barrier membrane during construction.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 2
1.5
September 23, 2015
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D.
Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and
emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on
elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with
weatherproof cover.
E.
Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Protection of Air Barrier Membrane: During construction, protect air barrier membrane from
penetrations which allow air to pass through air barrier assemblies. Engage original installer to
repair damage promptly using identical materials and methods of installation, and to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
B.
Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1.
2.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold
cover in place.
C.
Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
D.
Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 3
E.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by
frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained
in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1.
F.
September 23, 2015
Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days
after completing cleaning.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the
standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified
dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will
impair the quality of completed masonry.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUS)
A.
Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90, normal weight unless indicated otherwise manufactured
to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.
B.
Shapes: Provide standard shapes indicated and as required for building configuration. Provide
special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and
other special conditions.
2.3
BRICK
A.
Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBS.
1.
2.
3.
Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per
ASTM C 67.
Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated
"not effloresced."
Where shown to "match existing," provide face brick matching color range, texture, and
size of existing adjacent brickwork.
B.
Building (Common) Brick where Concealed: ASTM C 62, Grade SW.
C.
General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
1.
For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose
unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces
finished.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 4
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
September 23, 2015
Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate
special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes,
and lintels.
Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on
exposed surfaces.
Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result
in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
Units which are sawn and less than one-half full size shall not be used.
STONE TRIM UNITS
A.
Granite: Provide granite complying with ASTM C 615 and NBGQA's "Specifications for
Architectural Granite" and as follows:
B.
Provide stone units accurately shaped, with exposed faces dressed true, and with beds and
joints at right angles to faces.
1.
2.
2.5
For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications for Architectural
Granite."
For limestone, comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Regional Materials: Provide aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime that have been
extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.
B.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
C.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
D.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry
mortar.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
LanXess; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.
Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.
Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.
E.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate
consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.
F.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
G.
Water: Potable.
2.6
REINFORCEMENT
A.
Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 5
B.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Interior Walls: Mill-galvanized, carbon steel.
Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
Wire Size and Spacing: As required by Code.
Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:
1.
2.7
September 23, 2015
Ladder type with 1 side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches
in width, plus 1 side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 inches or less in width.
TIES AND ANCHORS
A.
Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from
materials that comply with subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire:
ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B-2 coating.
Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 316.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Stainless Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or
horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
1.
Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel. Mill-galvanized wire may be used at interior walls, unless otherwise
indicated.
C.
Partition Top Anchors: 0.097-inch-thick metal plate with 3/8-inch-diameter metal rod 6 inches
long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in
and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
D.
Stone Anchors: Fabricate dowels, cramps, and other stone anchors from stainless steel.
2.8
MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A.
2.9
Anchor Bolts: L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563
hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Metal Flashing:
1.
2.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.
Configuration: Provide continuous flashing including preformed outside, inside corners,
and end dams with smooth uninterrupted soldered seams and hemmed edges to
maintain continuity. See drawings for profiles required.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 6
September 23, 2015
B.
Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: Compatible with flashing material.
C.
Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products
or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other
and to substrates. Verify compatibility between flashing materials and substrates.
D.
Transition Strips: Provide long-term compatible 6” wide transition strips to seal embedded
flashing terminations to air barrier membrane. Comply with requirements of section 072700 –
AIR BARRIERS.
E.
Drip Edge: Provide type 316, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick stainless steel drip edge plates with
factory applied adhesive strip for all through-wall flashing conditions. Provide preformed outside
and inside corner drip plate corners with smooth uninterrupted soldered seams and hemmed
drip edges to maintain continuity. Custom sizes will be required see drawings for profiles
required.
2.10
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.
Compressible Filler:
Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.
B.
Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying
with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain
lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C.
Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D.
Weep/Vent Products: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and
width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from
manufacturer's standard.
2.11
A.
MASONRY CLEANERS
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing
mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use
by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
2.12
A.
Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
EaCo Chem, Inc.
ProSoCo, Inc.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 7
2.
B.
September 23, 2015
Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to
provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1.
2.
3.
For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.
For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other
applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
C.
Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of
portland cement by weight.
D.
Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1.
2.
Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1.
2.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
B.
Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual
locations of piping connections.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths
indicated.
B.
Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C.
Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 8
September 23, 2015
D.
Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut
units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. Do not use units cut to less
than one-half size.
E.
Do not install concrete masonry units with more than 5 percent damage to the face. Do not
install brick units which will show defects after installation.
F.
Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
G.
Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.
H.
Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.3
For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4
inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint
thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.
For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than
1/8 inch.
For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more
than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for
warpage of units.
LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B.
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in bond
pattern indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs. Prior to installation review bond pattern with Architect.
C.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh
masonry.
D.
Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 9
September 23, 2015
E.
Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams,
lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof
structure above, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above.
Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells
of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to
provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors
48 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate,
or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches
final position.
At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above to comply with Section 078440 – FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS.
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A.
Lay hollow brick and concrete masonry units as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B.
Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.
C.
Set stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar
holes.
1.
2.
Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear
water.
Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting.
D.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint), unless otherwise indicated.
3.5
CAVITY WALLS
A.
Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 10
1.
2.
September 23, 2015
Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. Where one wythe is of
clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable (two-piece) type
reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties to allow for
differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align.
Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers.
B.
Bond wythes of cavity walls together using bonding system indicated on Drawings.
C.
Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds
away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove
mortar fins protruding into cavity.
D.
Coordinate and allow access for air and vapor barrier membrane installed in cavity under
Section 072700 - AIR BARRIERS.
3.6
MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8
inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.
Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.
B.
Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D.
Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.7
ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A.
Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to
comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.8
Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural
member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid
materials.
Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and
attached to structure.
Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches
o.c. horizontally.
ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS
A.
Anchor masonry veneers with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fasten screw-attached anchors through insulation and sheathing to wall framing and to
concrete and masonry backup as applicable with metal fasteners of type indicated.
Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide air space indicated on the Drawings
between back of masonry veneer and face of insulation.
Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and
down.
Space anchors as required by Code.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 11
3.9
September 23, 2015
CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.
Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for inplane wall or partition movement.
B.
Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction
of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if
any.
Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry.
Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated.
Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch
for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 - JOINT
SEALANTS.
Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a
compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section
079200 - JOINT SEALANTS but not less than 3/8 inch.
1.
3.10
Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side
of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for
application of sealant.
Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint.
Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant.
Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is
complete for application of sealant.
Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.
LINTELS
A.
Install steel lintels where indicated.
B.
Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.11
FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS
A.
General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
B.
Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on
sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 12
2.
3.
4.
5.
September 23, 2015
At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe,
turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and 1-1/2 inches into the inner wythe. Form 1/4-inch
hook in edge of flashing embedded in inner wythe.
At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind
veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge covered with
elastomeric membrane, lapping at least 4 inches.
At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each
end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2
inches to form end dams.
Install air barrier transition strips to seal embedded flashings in masonry to air barrier
membrane in accordance with Section 072700 – AIR BARRIERS.
C.
Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be
built into masonry.
D.
Install metal drip edge plate in accordance with architectural details and manufacturerʼs
requirements.
E.
Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above
embedded flashing and as follows:
1.
2.
Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.
Space weep holes 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity
drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
G.
Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated.
3.12
A.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1.
2.
Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as
indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,
tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of
reinforced masonry.
Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on
them during construction.
B.
Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C.
Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for
cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
3.13
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Inspectors: Engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare
reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 13
September 23, 2015
inspections. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and
grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
B.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports. Retesting of materials failing to
comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
C.
Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. Test
types as determined by the independent testing and inspection agency.
3.14
REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B.
Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
around penetrations and where indicated.
C.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.15
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking
tape.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes
20.
Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions.
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A.
Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B.
Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soilcontaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill
material as fill is placed.
1.
Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 14
2.
3.
C.
September 23, 2015
Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of
masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 31 - EARTHWORK.
Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.
Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off the Site.
END OF SECTION
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 15
September 23, 2015
SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Section, including but not limited to the following. Requirements for materials, hot-dip
galvanizing, and shop-applied primers are included with each item as applicable.
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.
1.3
Galvanized steel lintels with shop-applied primer at exterior locations.
Steel lintels with shop-applied zinc-rich primer at interior locations. Furnish for installation
under Section 042000 – UNIT MASONRY
Galvanized steel bar grating and frame at areaway.
Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING for field painting work of this section.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.4
Delegated Design: Design lintels and gratings, including comprehensive engineering analysis
by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other
structural data by a qualified professional engineer.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 1
September 23, 2015
B.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of metal fabrications that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,
design, and extent.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
D.
1.6
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings.
1.
2.
1.7
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without
field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that
actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
B.
Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are
specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project
site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A.
Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members
together to form a single unit where indicated.
B.
Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span
but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 2
2.2
September 23, 2015
METAL BAR GRATINGS AND FRAMES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company.
Fisher & Ludlow; Division of Harris Steel Limited.
IKG Industries; a division of Harsco Corporation.
Ohio Gratings, Inc.
B.
Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire
perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated,
as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports.
C.
Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of
welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to
receive hardware and similar items.
1.
2.
2.3
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings.
Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally welded
anchors. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches o.c. and provide
minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 8
inches long.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior
use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at
exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for
type, grade, and class required.
B.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated
anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
C.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure,
a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the
load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Anchors shall have an ICC-ES report
with approval for use in cracked concrete.
1.
2.4
Acceptable Manufacturers: Kwik-Bolt TZ by Hilti, Inc., TruBolt Wedge Anchor by ITW
Red Head, Power-Stud+ by Powers Fasteners, or Strong Bolt by Simpson.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from
zinc-rich primer.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 3
September 23, 2015
C.
Zinc-Rich Primer:
topcoat.
D.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
E.
Isolation Coating: ASTM D 1187, cold-applied asphalt emulsion, VOC compliant, compounded
for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of
asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
F.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
2.5
Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
C.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
F.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
I.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 4
2.6
September 23, 2015
STEEL PRIMERS AND FINISHES
A.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.7
Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Urethane Primer:
SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7, "Brush Off Blast Cleaning."
Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be field welded, embedded in concrete or masonry,
unless otherwise indicated. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of
2 inches.
Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and
Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
Comply with SSPC-PA 2, "Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with magnetic Gages.”
Zinc-Rich Primer: Urethane zinc rich primer compatible with topcoat Specified in Section
099000 - PAINTS AND COATINGS. Provide primer with a VOC content of 340 g/L (2.8 lb/gal.)
or less per OTC and HAPS COMPLIANT STANDARDS PER 2007 standards when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Provide Tnemec Series 394
Perimerprime at 3.0 mils DFT or approved equal by DuPont or Carboline.
HOT-DIP GALVANIZING
A.
Hot-Dip Galvanizing: For steel exposed to the elements, weather or corrosive environments and
other steel indicated to be galvanized, provide coating for iron and steel fabrications applied by
the hot-dip process.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Basis-of-Design: Duragalv by Duncan Galvanizing.
Comply with ASTM A 123 for fabricated products and ASTM A 153 for hardware.
Provide thickness of galvanizing specified in referenced standards.
Galvanizing bath shall contain special high grade zinc and other earthly materials.
Fill vent holes after galvanizing, if applicable, and grind smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges
and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 5
1.
2.
3.
4.
September 23, 2015
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for
use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and
other connectors.
E.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
F.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of steel that will come into contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of isolation coating.
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
B.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
Touch-Up and Repair for Galvanized Surfaces: For damaged and field-welded metal coated
surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas.
1.
2.
3.
For galvanized surfaces, apply organic zinc repair paint complying with requirements of
ASTM A 780, modified to 95 percent zinc in dry film. Galvanizing repair paint shall have
95 percent zinc by weight, ZiRP by Duncan Galvanizing. Thickness of applied
galvanizing repair paint shall be not less than coating thickness required by ASTM A 123
or A 153 as applicable. Touch-up of galvanized surfaces with silver paint, brite paint, or
aluminum paints is not acceptable.
For factory-applied finish coatings, field-touch-up shall be performed by factory approved
personnel. Touch-up shall be such that repair is not visible from a distance of 6 feet.
A touch-up repair kit or touchup instructions shall be provided to the Owner for each type
of factory-applied finish.
END OF SECTION
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 6
September 23, 2015
SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Wood stud framing.
Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
Plywood access door and trim.
Plywood backing panels.
Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY for wood nailers and blocking built into masonry.
Section 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK for interior woodwork not
specified in this Section.
Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for sheet metal backing.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated
material.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials, both before and after exposure to elevated
temperatures when tested according to ASTM D 5516 and ASTM D 5664.
For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 1
1.4
September 23, 2015
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is
representative of the material tested.
A.
Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Plywood Panels:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.
Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness
indicated.
Factory mark panels according to indicated standard.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1.
2.
B.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.
For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical
formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise
adversely affect finishes.
Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15
percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements
for untreated material.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 2
September 23, 2015
C.
Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
D.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
2.
2.3
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete in exterior walls.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: For all interior use materials, provide materials that are fire-retardant treated and
comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood).
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing,
Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
1.
2.
2.4
Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated
wood after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5664, for lumber and ASTM D 5516, for plywood.
Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.5
Blocking.
Cants.
Nailers.
Furring.
Grounds.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with 15
percent moisture content.
PANEL PRODUCTS
A.
Miscellaneous Concealed Plywood: Exposure 1 sheathing, span rating to suit framing in each
location, and thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch.
B.
Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged,
fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch thick.
2.6
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
1.
Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,
or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 3
September 23, 2015
B.
Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.
D.
Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E.
Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads
and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
F.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers.
G.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
2.7
A.
Adhesive, Including Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation
complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B.
Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring,
nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
construction.
C.
Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber
and plywood.
D.
Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and the
following:
1.
2.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC).
ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.
E.
Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.
F.
Use fasteners of appropriate type and length.
splitting wood.
Predrill members when necessary to avoid
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 4
3.2
September 23, 2015
WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A.
Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B.
Attach items to substrates to support applied loading.
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 5
Recess bolts and nuts flush with
September 23, 2015
SECTION 064020
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Interior standing and running trim, including door casings.
Custom sliding barn-style door and hardware.
Replacement of exterior sheathing.
Shop priming of architectural woodwork to receive opaque finish.
Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
Section 099000 – PAINTING AND COATING for site finishing.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
For each type of product specified, including casework hardware and
accessories, and finishing materials and processes.
1.
B.
1.4
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for
production of interior architectural woodwork with blueprint-matched wood veneers and
components.
064020 - 1
September 23, 2015
C.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural
Woodwork Standards," latest edition, including errata, for grades of interior architectural
woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
D.
Mockups:
Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
E.
1.5
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
Division 01.
A.
1.6
Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Project Conditions" Article.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.
B.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1.
2.
1.7
The HVAC systems as specified elsewhere may not provide for humidity controls. The
expected ranges of relative humidity are expected to be as high as 55% to a low of
uncontrolled during the heating system. Comply with AWS Section 2, Care and Storage.
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
064020 - 2
September 23, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural
Woodwork Standards" for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Wood Veneers and Lumber: Provide AWI Custom Grade materials and workmanship, unless
otherwise indicated. For species not listed in the AWS comply with the following:
1.
2.
C.
Provide AWI Lumber Grade 1 and AWI Grade A Veneer, book-matched, minimum 6 inch
face veneer width. Kiln dry to 6-8 percent moisture content. Components shall be free of
defects and sapwood. Match adjacent pieces for color and grain pattern.
Single-Source Requirement for Wood Veneers and Solids: Intent is to provide wood
which matches as closely as possible throughout the project. Provide wood veneers and
solids from the same distributor, and from the same flitches and solids sources to the
greatest extent possible.
Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Douglas Fir.
1.
2.
Architectʼs control samples for transparent finish, veneer grain and figure characteristics
are available for review at the office of the Architect.
Veneer Matching Requirements:
a.
b.
c.
Matching Between Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book match and architectural end
match.
Matching Within Individual Panel Faces: Balance and Center Match.
Method of Matching Panels: Blueprint-matched panels and components.
D.
Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood.
E.
Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF):
ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder
containing no added urea formaldehyde.
Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
containing no added urea formaldehyde.
a.
2.2
Resin impregnated paper backs are not permitted. Backs shall be of compatible
hardwood species and cut. Contact adhesive is not permitted.
A.
Hardware for Sliding Doors: Hafele or equal; stainless steel; style as selected by Architect.
B.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried
to less than 15 percent moisture content.
C.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face
064020 - 3
September 23, 2015
of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or
lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
2.3
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
B.
Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
C.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
indicated for the following:
D.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
E.
Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts
to remove splinters and burrs.
1.
2.4
Ease edges to radius
Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
Wood Species and Cut: As specified hereinabove.
1.
Provide split species on trim that faces areas with different wood species, matching each
face of woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces in areas finished.
C.
For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width.
D.
For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width or thickness.
E.
Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
F.
Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
assembly.
2.5
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.
064020 - 4
September 23, 2015
C.
Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
D.
Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
assembly.
2.6
INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
Wood Species and Cut: As specified hereinabove
C.
For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width.
D.
Fire-Rated Interior Frames and Jambs Where Indicated: Products fabricated from fire-retardant
particleboard or fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard with veneered, exposed surfaces and
listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
1.
2.7
Fire Rating: 20 minutes.
INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.
2.8
STAIRWORK AND RAILS
A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: As specified hereinabove.
C.
Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood, except that eastern white pine,
sugar pine, or western white pine may be used for risers, stringers, and moldings.
2.9
SHOP FINISHING
A.
General:
finishing.
1.
B.
Comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for factory
Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only
final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1.
Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain
surfaces.
Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require
064020 - 5
September 23, 2015
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative
panels.
C.
Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for opaque-finished
items specified to be field finished. Refer to Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING for
material and application requirements.
D.
Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system,
staining, and sheen with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Grade: Same as item to be finished.
AWS Finish System 5: Water white conversion varnish.
Staining: Match approved sample for color.
Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closedgrain wood before staining and finishing.
Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
Sheen: Satin, 30-50 gloss units.
Effect: Partially filled pore.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
B.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for
fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B.
Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for
fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
E.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply
with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used
to install woodwork.
F.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
064020 - 6
G.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use
pieces less than 60 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf
running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1.
2.
H.
3.3
September 23, 2015
Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and
finish same as wood base if finished.
Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch
in 96 inches.
Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes
with matching filler where exposed.
A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION
064020 - 7
September 23, 2015
SECTION 078410
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under
the designated Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated
constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.
Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for standard joint sealers.
Division 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION for fire-protection piping penetrations.
Division 22 - PLUMBING for piping penetrations.
Division 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING for duct and piping
penetrations.
Division 26 - ELECTRICAL for cable and conduit penetrations.
COORDINATION
A.
Jobsite conditions of each through-penetration firestop system must meet all details of the ULClassified System selected. If jobsite conditions do not match any UL-classified systems,
contact firestop manufacturer for alternative systems or Engineer Judgment Drawings.
B.
Coordinate work with other trades to assure that penetration-opening sizes are appropriate for
penetrant locations.
C.
Verify that the schedule is current at the time of construction, and that each referenced system
is suitable for the intended application.
1.4
A.
General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty
openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop
systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements
indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating
of construction penetrated.
078410 - 1
B.
Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1.
2.
C.
2.
3.
Horizontal assemblies include floors, floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of
roof/ceiling assemblies.
F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per
UL 1479.
1.
E.
Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls, fire-barrier walls, smoke-barrier walls and
fire partitions.
F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined
per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg
(2.49 Pa).
1.
D.
L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening
at 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
Exposed Penetration Firestopping:
1.
2.
Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and
450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these
conditions both during and after construction.
a.
b.
F.
1.5
September 23, 2015
For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide
moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems demonstrating no evidence
of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479.
For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and
exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of
supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.
For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not
requiring removal of insulation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of construction
condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item.
Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences
compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.
078410 - 2
1.
C.
3.
1.6
Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting
agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for
construction and penetrating items.
Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration
firestop system, along with the following information:
1.
2.
D.
September 23, 2015
Types of penetrating items.
Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where
applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.
Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Either a firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991,
"Approval of Firestop Contractors" or a firm experienced in installing through-penetration
firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose
work has resulted in construction of a minimum of five projects with a record of successful
performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to
install manufacturer's products per specified requirements.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration
and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply
with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article:
1.
2.
Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified
testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up
inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard
referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems
complying with the following requirements:
a.
b.
D.
1.7
Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference
to through-penetration firestop system designations listed in the UL “Fire
Resistance Directory.”
Division 01.
A.
Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened
containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and
manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and
078410 - 3
September 23, 2015
inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multicomponent materials.
B.
1.8
Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or
substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B.
Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural
means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.9
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration
firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
B.
Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate
through-penetration firestop systems.
C.
Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed
behind other construction until each installation has been examined building inspector, if
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop
systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Hilti, Inc.
BioFireshield; RectorSeal Corporation.
Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI).
3M; Fire Protection Products Division.
FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS
A.
Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one
another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating throughpenetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Materials: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing primary materials and fill
materials which are part of the tested assemblies indicated in the approved ThroughPenetration Firestop System Schedule submittal. Fill materials are those referred to in
directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void," or "cavity" materials.
078410 - 4
C.
2.3
September 23, 2015
Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed
to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only
components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by
qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated
MIXING
A.
For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if
required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time,
and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum
performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration
firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the
1.
2.
3.
Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.
Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove
loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would
otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to
remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without
disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.
3.3
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions
and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
078410 - 5
September 23, 2015
B.
Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes
and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
C.
Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
A.
Inspecting Agency: Engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to inspect throughpenetration firestops.
Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174
requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing
test reports.
B.
Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they
comply with requirements.
C.
Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new
materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
078410 - 6
September 23, 2015
SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Joint sealants and fillers.
Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and
gaskets.
Section 088000 - GLAZING for glazing sealants.
Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum
board partitions to reduce sound transmission.
Section 093000 – TILING for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation
joints in tile surfaces.
Section 095100 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of
acoustical ceilings.
A.
Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B.
Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and waterresistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with
joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
C.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 1
D.
1.5
September 23, 2015
Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a
qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for
installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C.
Division 01.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.7
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F
When joint substrates are wet.
Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
B.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1.
C.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint
sealants from the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by
structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 2
September 23, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Provide colors as selected by the Architect from
manufacturerʼs full range of standard and custom colors; maximum of five colors, three standard
colors and two custom colors.
2.2
JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Elastomeric sealants shall be nonstaining to porous
substrates. Provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C.
Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will
come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
D.
Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
E.
Extent of Use: Joints in exterior vertical and soffit surfaces.
Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
F.
Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
Tremco Inc.; Spectrem 1.
Pecora Corporation; 864.
Bondaflex Technologies; Sil 290
Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 550.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; POURTHANE.
Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200.
Tremco Inc.; THC-901.
Bondaflex Technologies; PUR 2 SL
Extent of Use: Joints in exterior horizontal surfaces.
Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant:
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 3
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
G.
Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.
GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.
Tremco Inc.; Tremsil 200.
Bondaflex Technologies; Sil 100 WF
Pecora 898NST.
Extent of Use: Sanitary joints at toilet rooms.
Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
2.3
September 23, 2015
Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
Sonneborn, BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.
Tremco Inc.; Tremflex 834.
May National Bondaflex Sil-A 700
Extent of Use: Non-moving joints at interior locations.
JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A.
Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants,
primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer
based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or
other type, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated,
and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance.
C.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide selfadhesive tape where applicable.
2.4
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 4
C.
September 23, 2015
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate
capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles
remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free
compressed air. Porous joint substrates include concrete, masonry and unglazed
surfaces of ceramic tile.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
Nonporous joint substrates include the following metal, glass, porcelain enamel and
glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas
of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 5
C.
September 23, 2015
Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
D.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
E.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads
of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
CLEANING
A.
3.5
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 6
September 23, 2015
SECTION 081110
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
2.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Exterior insulated hollow metal doors and frames.
Remodeling of existing metal doors for reuse.
Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY for building anchors into and grouting steel frames in
masonry construction.
Section 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE for door hardware for steel doors.
Section 088000 - GLAZING for glazed lites.
Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING for field painting steel doors and frames.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label
compliance, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes for each type of steel
door and frame specified.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Elevations of each door design.
Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.
Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
Details of each different wall opening condition.
Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
Details of accessories.
Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of
supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
Coordinate with door hardware schedule.
081110 - 1
September 23, 2015
D.
E.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive fire tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for each type of standard steel door and frame.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain standard steel doors and frames through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Rated Door, Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fireprotection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure
according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1.
D.
1.5
Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and
labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance
with NFPA 105.
Division 01.
A.
Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
B.
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C.
Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a
vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Do
not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1.
1.6
Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Field Measurements:
fabrication.
Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
081110 - 2
September 23, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Ceco Door Products; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.
CURRIES Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.
de LaFontaine
Mesker Door Inc.
Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 metallic coating.
D.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill
phosphatized.
1.
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
E.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for
attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.
G.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
H.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting
of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136
for combustion characteristics.
I.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 - GLAZING.
J.
Isolation Coating: ASTM D 1187, cold-applied asphalt emulsion, VOC compliant, compounded
for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of
asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
081110 - 3
2.3
September 23, 2015
STANDARD STEEL DOORS
A.
General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with
smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with ANSI A250.8.
1.
2.
Design: Flush panel.
Core Construction:
Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core that produces doors
complying with ANSI A250.8.
a.
b.
3.
4.
B.
Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings
indicated.
Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Exterior Doors:
Where indicated, provide doors
fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x
sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch-thick end closures or
channels of same material as face sheets.
Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames."
Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors
complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model
and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:
1.
Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless), 13/4 inches thick.
C.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from
same material as door face sheets.
D.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.
2.4
STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
A.
General: Comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B.
Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
1.
2.
C.
Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to comply
with exterior frame requirements.
1.
2.
D.
Fabricate frames with full profile welded joints.
Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch-thick steel sheet.
Fabricate frames with full profile welded joints.
Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates
from same material as frames.
081110 - 4
2.5
September 23, 2015
FRAME ANCHORS
A.
Jamb Anchors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick,
and as follows:
1.
2.
2.6
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches
wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch thick.
Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inchdiameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall,
with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish
floor surface.
HOLLOW METAL PANELS
A.
2.7
Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for
adjoining hollow metal work.
STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A.
Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material
as door face sheet in which they are installed.
B.
Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high
unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same
material as frames in which they are installed.
2.8
ACCESSORIES
A.
Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B.
Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch-wide steel.
C.
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.
2.9
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project
site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
081110 - 5
September 23, 2015
B.
Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
C.
Hollow Metal Doors:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.
Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by
NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch
beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.
Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Full Profile Welded Frames: Weld joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make
smooth, flush, and not visible.
Full Profile Welded Frames at Fire-Rated Doors and Exterior Doors: Weld joints
continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and not visible.
Interlocking (Knock-Down) Frames at 20-Minute-Rated Doors and Non-Rated Doors:
Interlocking with visible seams.
Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints, fabricated from same material as doorframe. Fasten members at
crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in
metal-stud partitions.
081110 - 6
c.
d.
9.
September 23, 2015
Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.
Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top
and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as
follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a.
b.
Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
E.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or
hot-rolled steel sheet.
F.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door
Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 087100 - DOOR
HARDWARE.
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.10
A.
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted
door hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division
26 - ELECTRICAL.
Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow
metal work.
Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings, so that each
glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors
and frames.
Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type
of installation indicated.
STEEL FINISHES
Prime Finish:
pretreating.
1.
2.
Apply manufacturer's standard epoxy primer immediately after cleaning and
Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite
prolonged exposure.
Refer to Section 099000 – PAINTING AND COATING for field-applied coating.
081110 - 7
September 23, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame
installation.
C.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B.
Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.3
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to
plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel
lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from
head to floor.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
b.
c.
d.
At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
081110 - 8
e.
f.
g.
2.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
frames and masonry with grout.
Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take
precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or
damaged by grout forces.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion
anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead
structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to
other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for
securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to
frame jamb members.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Field apply isolation coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and
secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a.
3.
4.
September 23, 2015
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch .
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
081110 - 9
3.
D.
Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.
Glazing: Comply with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
3.4
September 23, 2015
Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D.
Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
081110 - 10
September 23, 2015
SECTION 081400
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Solid-core doors with wood-veneer and medium-density overlay faces.
Factory finishing for wood doors for transparent finish.
Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
Remodeling existing wood doors for reuse.
Louvers and glass lites for flush wood doors.
Section 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE for hardware for wood doors.
Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING for field finishing of opaque wood doors.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers,
and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish specifications.
Indicate fire ratings for fire doors.
Samples for Verification:
1.
Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches for
each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of
three samples showing typical range of finish color, sheen, and grain to be expected in
the finished work.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081400 - 1
2.
1.4
September 23, 2015
Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
C.
Quality Standard:
In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A,
"Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
1.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
D.
Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,
based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
E.
Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control,
based on testing according to UL 1784.
F.
Division 01.
1.5
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Package doors individually in plastic bags.
C.
Mark each door on top rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in
materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a
3-inch span.
1.
2.
3.
Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
Warranty shall include hardware installation and replacement of glass and glazing.
Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial
Completion:
a.
Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081400 - 2
September 23, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division.
Graham Wood Doors.
Marshfield DoorSystems.
VT Industries Inc.
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A.
Doors for Transparent Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Doors for Opaque Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Grade: AWI Premium, with AWI Grade A faces.
Species and Cut: Clear White Maple, plain sawn/sliced, 4 inch min. veneers.
Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center balanced.
Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by
mullions.
Transom Match: Continuous match.
Stiles: Same species as faces.
Cross-Banding: 1/8 in. high density fiberboard, urea formaldehyde free.
Adhesives: Type I per WDMA T.M.-6.
Grade: Premium.
Faces for Interior Doors: Either medium-density overlay or high-density fiberboard.
Apply medium-density overlay directly to high-density hardboard crossbands.
Adhesives: Type I per WDMA T.M.-6.
SOLID-CORE DOORS
A.
Cores: Comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Interior Veneer-Faced Doors:
1.
C.
Particle Core: ANSI A 208.1, Grade 1-LD-2.
Structural Composite Lumber Core: Timberstrand LSL, WDMA I.S.10.
Provide doors with structural composite lumber cores instead of particleboard cores at
locations where exit devices are indicated or where light or louver cutouts exceed 40% of
the door area.
Construction: Five plies, hot-pressed, with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering.
Fire-Rated Doors:
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081400 - 3
1.
Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or
manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating
indicated.
a.
2.
3.
2.4
Fire Retardant Mineral Core, with no added urea formaldehyde cross-banding,.
Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screwholding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as needed to
eliminate through-bolting hardware.
Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge
construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer
stile matching face veneer.
a.
4.
September 23, 2015
Screw-Holding Capability: 550 lbf per WDMA T.M.-10.
Pairs: Provide fire-rated pairs with fire-retardant stiles matching face veneer that are
labeled and listed for kinds of applications indicated without formed-steel edges and
astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals.
LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES
A.
Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid-wood, chevron-style, louvers, unless
otherwise indicated. Species to match veneer.
B.
Fire Door Louvers (not required on 20 min. doors): Metal louvers with fusible link and closing
device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire rating of one and one-half hours and less.
1.
C.
Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors:
1.
2.
3.
D.
2.5
Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.0396 inch thick, hot-dip zinc coated and factory
primed for paint finish.
Wood Species: Same species as door faces.
Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape.
At 20-minute, fire-rated, wood-core doors, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips
approved for such use.
Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard woodveneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use
in doors of fire rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for
opening size and fire rating indicated.
GLAZING SYSTEMS
A.
2.6
Glazing: Provide factory installed glass products in accordance with requirements in Section
088000 - GLAZING.
FABRICATION
A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and
bevels, unless otherwise indicated:
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081400 - 4
1.
B.
2.
Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber meeting rails. Provide
factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal doorframes.
Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of
referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining. Drill pilot holes for screws for butt hinges and lock
fronts at the factory.
Metal Astragals: Factory prime and premachine astragals and formed-steel edges for
hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors to receive concealed vertical rod exit devices.
Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed
surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top
edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles.
1.
D.
Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply
with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,
DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1.
C.
September 23, 2015
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
Glass: Factory install glass products in prepared openings.
SHOP PRIMING
A.
2.8
Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces and edges of doors, including cutouts, with one
coat of wood primer specified in Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING.
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
General: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated" for factory
finishing.
B.
Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish.
prepare for field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish.
C.
Transparent Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Factory prime and
Grade: Premium.
Finish: Manufacturer's solvent-based catalyzed polyurethane finish with performance
comparable to AWS System 11. Water based polyurethane finish may be provided for
doors not requiring staining. Provide two finish coats.
Staining: Provide custom color as selected by Architect.
Sheen: Satin.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081400 - 5
September 23, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
Reject doors with defects.
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE.
B.
Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1.
2.
C.
3.3
Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
ADJUSTING
A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Protection: Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or deterioration
at time of final acceptance. Remove protections and reclean as necessary immediately before
final acceptance.
C.
Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors
may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081400 - 6
September 23, 2015
SECTION 083110
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for blocking out openings for access
doors and frames in concrete.
Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY for anchoring and grouting access door frames set in
masonry construction.
Section 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE for rim cylinder locks and master keying.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details,
fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames for each
type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish.
D.
Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule,
including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to
installation.
E.
Ceiling Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceilingmounted items including access doors and frames, lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, and special trim are shown and coordinated with each other.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain[each type of access door and frame through one source from a
single manufacturer.
083110 - 1
B.
Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following
test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1.
2.
C.
1.5
September 23, 2015
NFPA 252 for vertical access doors and frames.
ASTM E 119 for horizontal access doors and frames.
Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which
may vary slightly from sizes indicated.
COORDINATION
A.
Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to
concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule
specified in "Submittals" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STEEL MATERIALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1.
2.
ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B.
Steel Sheet:
Electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M with cold-rolled steel sheet
substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
C.
Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent
Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond.
Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPCSP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
a.
2.
D.
2.2
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in
steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive
joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.
STAINLESS-STEEL MATERIALS
A.
Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793, manufacturer's standard finish.
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 316. Remove tool and
die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
083110 - 2
1.
2.3
September 23, 2015
Finish: Directional Satin Finish, No. 4.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Acudor Products, Inc.
Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co.
J. L. Industries, Inc.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Nystrom, Inc.
Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet at typical areas and
from stainless-steel sheet at toilet and wet areas.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.
Door: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal, set flush with surrounding finish surfaces.
Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with drywall bead flange.
Hinges: Continuous piano.
Lock: Cylinder.
a.
C.
Recessed Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet at typical areas and
from stainless-steel sheet at toilet and wet areas.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.
Door: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal in the form of a pan recessed 5/8 inch for
gypsum board infill.
Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with drywall bead for gypsum board
surfaces.
Hinges: Concealed pivoting rod hinge.
Lock: Cylinder.
a.
D.
Lock Preparation: Prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in Section
087100, DOOR HARDWARE.
087100, DOOR HARDWARE.
Fire Rated, Uninsulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from
steel at typical areas and from stainless-steel sheet at toilets and wet areas.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Locations: Wall surfaces.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.
Door: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal, flush construction.
Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with 1-inch-wide, surface-mounted trim.
Hinges: Continuous piano.
Automatic Closer: Spring type.
Lock: Self-latching device with cylinder lock.
a.
087100, DOOR HARDWARE
083110 - 3
2.4
September 23, 2015
FABRICATION
A.
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish.
Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.
1.
E.
For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board and gypsum
base securely attached to perimeter of frames.
For trimless frames with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide zinc-coated
expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter of frames.
Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.
Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.
For recessed doors with plaster infill, provide self-furring expanded metal lath attached to
door panel.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
1.
2.
For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device.
plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
Furnish
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B.
Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
C.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
3.2
A.
Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
083110 - 4
B.
September 23, 2015
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION
083110 - 5
September 23, 2015
SECTION 085310
VINYL WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this
Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of
this Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
1.3
Operable vinyl window with factory-installed glass and glazing, screen and exterior
casing.
A.
Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and
minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.
B.
Window Certification: WDMA certified with label attached to each window.
Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:
1.
Minimum Performance Rating: DP50 for windows.
C.
Thermal Transmittance:
Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.
D.
Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole-window minimum SHGC
of 0.35.
1.4
NFRC 100 maximum whole-window minimum U-factor of 0.35
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating
instructions for each type of window indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other
Work, operational clearances, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners.
Joinery details.
Expansion provisions.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Flashing and drainage details.
Weather-stripping details.
Glazing details.
Window cleaning provisions.
Window System Operators: Show locations, mounting, and details for installing
operator components and controls.
For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible
for their preparation and used to determine the following:
a.
b.
1.5
September 23, 2015
Structural test pressures and design pressures from basic wind speeds
indicated.
Deflection limitations of glass framing systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to window manufacturer for installation of
units required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain windows through one source from a single manufacturer.
C.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and
GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements
in Division 01. Review methods and procedures related to windows including, but not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.6
Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by
other trades.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
Review required testing and inspecting procedures.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify window openings by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.
1.7
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without
delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating
windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that
actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Failure to meet performance requirements.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
September 23, 2015
Structural failures including excessive deflection.
Water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation.
Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
Insulating glass failure.
B.
Warranty Period: Twenty years from date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Warranty Period for Vinyl Finishes: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
D.
Warranty Period for Glass: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
Vinyl Windows and Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
CertainTeed Corporation.
Harvey Industries, Inc.
JELD-WEN, Inc.
Weather Shield Mfg., Inc.
VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS
A.
Frames and Sashes:
Impact-resistant,
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
complying
with
Insulating-Glass Units:
3/4 in. thick insulating glass units complying
ASTM E 2190, certified through IGCC as complying with requirements of IGCC.
with
1.
2.
B.
1.
C.
PVC
Finish: Integral color, as selected by the Architect
Gypsum Board Returns: Provide at interior face of frame.
Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
UV-stabilized
Tint: Clear.
Kind: Fully tempered where indicated on Drawings and required by code.
Lites: Two.
Filling: Fill space between glass lites with argon.
Low-E Coating: Manufacturerʼs standard
Glazing System:
weathertight seal.
Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces
D.
Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum,
stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material
compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and
securely lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.
1.
E.
September 23, 2015
Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range.
Hung Window Hardware:
1.
2.
3.
Counterbalancing Mechanism: Complying with AAMA 902, concealed, of size and
capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position.
Locks and Latches: Allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash
in direction indicated and operated from the inside only.[ Provide custodial locks.]
Tilt Hardware: Releasing tilt latch allows sash to pivot about horizontal axis to
facilitate cleaning exterior surfaces from the interior.
F.
Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and
doors unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Casing and Trim: Provide manufacturerʼs standard casing and trim with windows, factory
primed.
H.
Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors,
and other components.
1.
2.3
Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible.
For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.
INSECT SCREENS
A.
General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting,
removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Provide for
each operable exterior sash or ventilator.
B.
Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004.
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC
spline/anchor concealing edge of frame.
1.
2.
Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum
sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated.
Finish: Match window members.
C.
Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and
fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and
weather deterioration. Comply with ASTM D 3656.
D.
Wickets: Provide sliding wickets, framed and trimmed for a tight fit and durability during
handling.
2.4
September 23, 2015
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate windows, in sizes indicated, that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2
for performance class and performance grade indicated. Include a complete system for
assembling components and anchoring windows.
B.
Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and
ventilator.
C.
Weep Holes: Provide concealed weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating
water to exterior.
D.
Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete
with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection
tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and
building deflections, as indicated.
Provide mullions and cover plates capable of
withstanding design loads of window units.
E.
Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze windows in the factory where practical and possible for
applications indicated. Comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and
operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather
barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window
installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other
construction debris.
Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets
at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within
3 inches (76 mm) of opening.
Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag;
without sharp edges or offsets at joints.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing
windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.
B.
Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction.
September 23, 2015
C.
Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight
construction.
D.
Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic
action at points of contact with other materials.
E.
Provide additional anchorage to prevent bowing where shim spaces and gaps are sealed
with foam.
3.3
ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A.
Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at
contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.
Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other
substances.
C.
Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows.
Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
D.
Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during construction period.
E.
Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below
exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact
window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
BEMIS HALL - BASEMENT RENOVATIONS
September 23, 2015
SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1.
C.
Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.
Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.
Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
E.
Mechanical door hardware.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
D.
Swinging doors.
Sliding doors.
Other doors to the extent indicated.
ICC/IBC - International Building Code.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
UL/ULC and CSA C22.2 – Standards for Automatic Door Operators Used on Fire and
Smoke Barrier Doors and Systems of Doors.
State Building Codes, Local Amendments.
521 CMR – Massachusetts Architectural Board Regulations.
Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:
1.
ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 1
2.
1.3
September 23, 2015
UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and
finishes.
B.
Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication
and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door
Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand,
function, and finish of door hardware.
1.
Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and
Format for the Hardware Schedule."
2.
Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating
complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door
hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals
that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected
and subject to resubmission.
3.
Content: Include the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
4.
Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware
item.
Manufacturer of each item.
Fastenings and other pertinent information.
Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule.
Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
Mounting locations for door hardware.
Door and frame sizes and materials.
Warranty information for each product.
Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date,
particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of
other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data,
Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information
essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
C.
Proof of Certification: Provide copy of manufacturer(s) official certification or accreditation
document indicating proof of status as a qualified installer of Windstorm assemblies.
D.
Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate
keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format.
Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and
special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of
permanent cylinders/cores.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 2
E.
Informational Submittals:
1.
F.
1.4
September 23, 2015
Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on
evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance
manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as
required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of
documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this
Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard
and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
C.
Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors
with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and
electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the
manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity.
Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during
the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both
standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section
from a single source unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced
standards.
F.
Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section
"Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying
schedule document:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.
Plans for existing and future key system expansion.
Requirements for key control storage and software.
Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.
Address and requirements for delivery of keys.
Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements
in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s),
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 3
September 23, 2015
Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving,
handling, and installing door hardware.
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
1.5
Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to
instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of
their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware
for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation
manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required.
Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.
Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures
At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.
A.
Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware
delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or
accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
B.
Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C.
Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software
and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service.
Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other
work specified to be factory prepared for installing hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other
work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to
comply with indicated requirements.
B.
Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced
and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring,
signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified
in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions
of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 4
B.
September 23, 2015
Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace
components of door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
Faulty operation of the hardware.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
C.
Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
D.
Special Warranty Periods:
1.
Seven years for heavy duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches.
2.
Five years for exit hardware.
3.
Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies.
1.8
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A.
General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware
Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.
B.
Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other
distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at
the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
C.
Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door
hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are
abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
D.
Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in
writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01,
Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and
their designated consultants.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 5
2.2
September 23, 2015
HANGING DEVICES
A.
Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified
in the Door Hardware Sets.
1.
Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized
for door thickness and clearances required:
a.
b.
3.
b.
Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened
into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for
the all out-swinging lockable doors.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
2.3
Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated
bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.
Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated
bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.
Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on
Drawings:
a.
5.
Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified.
Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” heavy weight.
Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
a.
4.
Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.
Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.
Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.
For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge
for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.
Bommer Industries (BO).
Hager Companies (HA).
McKinney Products (MK).
CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A.
General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured
master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.
1.
a.
B.
Match Existing.
Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
2.
3.
Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system
instructions and requirements.
Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key
control number as directed by Owner.
Existing System: Key locks to Owner's existing system.
Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:
1.
2.4
Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other
manufacturers' cylinders.
Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.
1.
E.
Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application.
Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised
trim ring.
Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be
flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.
Keyway: Match Facility Standard.
Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the
following:
1.
D.
September 23, 2015
Change Keys per Cylinder: Three (3).
MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
A.
Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1
certified.
1.
Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible.
2.
a.
b.
c.
B.
Arrow Locks (AW) – QL Series.
Schlage (SC) - ND Series.
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) 4700LN Series.
Residential Tubular Locking Devices: Standard ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 2.
1.
Tubular locksets, deadbolts, and handlesets designed to fit ANSI standard door preps.
2.
Locks are to be non-handed and have adjustable backset.
3.
a.
b.
DOOR HARDWARE
Schlage (SC) - TL Series.
Yale Residential (YR) - YH Series.
087100 - 7
2.5
September 23, 2015
LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES
A.
Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Standards: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by
manufacturer.
Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for
aluminum framing.
Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for
rescue hardware applications.
Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.
Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5.
Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES
A.
General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following
criteria:
1.
At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed
and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as
required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the
Hardware Sets.
2.
Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with
NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the
proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s
catalog and template book for specific requirements.
3.
Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with key cylinder dogging device to hold
the pushbar and latch in a retracted position.
4.
Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging
of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light
extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.
5.
Flush End Caps: Provide flush end caps made of architectural metal in the same finish as
the devices as in the Hardware Sets. Plastic end caps will not be acceptable.
6.
Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's
heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 8
a.
b.
B.
Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and
designs to match that of the specified locksets.
Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or
Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.
7.
Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.
8.
Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.
Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified
panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets.
Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature.
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.7
September 23, 2015
Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series.
Stanley Precision (PR) - Apex 2000 Series.
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 7000 Series.
DOOR CLOSERS
A.
All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1.
General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with
the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size.
Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting
information on inside of cover.
2.
Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L.
listed for use of fire rated doors.
3.
Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test
witnessed and verified by UL.
4.
Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door
closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use.
Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically
handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.
5.
Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in
Hardware Sets.
a.
b.
DOOR HARDWARE
Where closers are indicated to have mechanical dead-stop, provide heavy
duty arms and brackets with an integral positive stop.
Where closers are indicated to have mechanical hold open, provide heavy
duty units with an additional built-in mechanical holder assembly designed
to hold open against normal wind and traffic conditions. Holder to be
manually selectable to on-off position.
087100 - 9
c.
d.
6.
B.
Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special
mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper mounting.
a.
b.
c.
Norton Door Controls (NO) - Unitrol 7500 Series.
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - Unitrol 4400 Series.
LCN Closers (LC) – 4040XP Series x Rixson 9 Series Overhead
Stop/Holder.
Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 certified
surface mounted, institutional grade door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes
1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening
force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body
construction, with adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide
non-handed units standard.
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.8
Where closers are indicated to have a cushion-type stop, provide heavy duty
arms and brackets with spring stop mechanism to cushion door when opened
to maximum degree.
Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where
possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. Provide drop plates
or other accessories as required for proper mounting.
Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Unitrol): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 certified surface
mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and
fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Unitrol
arms to have door stop mechanism to absorb dead stop shock on arm and top hinge. Hold-open
arms to have a spring loaded mechanism in addition to shock absorber assembly. Arms to be
provided with rigid steel main arm and secondary arm lengths proportional to the door width.
1.
C.
September 23, 2015
LCN Closers (LC) - 1460FC Series.
Norton Door Controls (NO) - 8500 Series.
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 3500 Series.
ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
A.
Door Protective Trim
1.
General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the
Hardware Sets.
2.
Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door
width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and
not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width
and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in
the Hardware Sets.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 10
3.
Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop),
fabricated from the following:
a.
Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick.
4.
Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the
Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.
5.
a.
b.
2.9
September 23, 2015
Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
Trimco (TC).
DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A.
General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware
Sets.
B.
Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall
bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated,
unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor
stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide
overhead type stops and holders.
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.10
Burns Manufacturing (BU).
Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
Trimco (TC).
ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
A.
General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified
below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and
provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior
applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.
B.
Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency, for sound ratings indicated.
2.11
A.
FABRICATION
Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 11
2.12
September 23, 2015
FINISHES
A.
Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes
complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes
indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
B.
Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,
hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than
specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
C.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types,
drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been
resolved in writing.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
B.
Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install each item of hardware to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according
to specifications.
1.
B.
Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and
adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking
devices; closing devices; and seals.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable
publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1.
2.
Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 12
3.
4.
September 23, 2015
Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1
"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware
is located.
C.
Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and
written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into
surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and
reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9
Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates
involved.
D.
Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying
with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
E.
Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed.
Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will
not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
3.4
A.
3.5
Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in
report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door
hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.6
Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed
hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the
latest possible time frame.
B.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
C.
Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and
maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of
owner occupancy.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 13
3.7
September 23, 2015
DEMONSTRATION
A.
3.8
Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A.
The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are
a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies,
conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with
corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set
should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application
and functionality.
B.
Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:
1. MK - McKinney
2. YA - Yale
3. HS - HES
4. NO - Norton
5. RO - Rockwood
6. PE - Pemko
7. 00 - Other
Hardware Schedule
Set: #1
Description: Exterior Egress
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinge (heavy weight)
Exit Device (rim, nightlatch)
Closer (w/ HD stop)
Kickplate
Threshold (ada, therm-barrier)
Head & Jamb Gasketing
Sweep
T4A3386 (qty, size, nrp per spec)
7100F 632F keyed to exist system
UNI4400
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
273x292AFGPK FHSL14
290AV
315CN
US32D
630
689
US32D
MK
YA
YA
RO
PE
PE
PE
TA2714 (qty, size, nrp per spec)
AU 4707LN keyed to exist system
404 Wall; 441CU Floor
608
US26D
626
US26D
MK
YA
RO
RO
Set: #2
Description: Storage and Office
3
1
1
3
Hinge
Cylindrical Lock (entry)
Door Stop
Silencer
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 14
September 23, 2015
Set: #3
Description: Bathroom
3
1
1
3
Hinge
Cylindrical Lock (privacy)
Kickplate
Silencer
AU 4702LN 497
K1050 10" 4BE CSK
608
US26D
626
US32D
MK
YA
RO
RO
YH11 Citadel
526
US26D
626
NP
MK
YA
RO
280C-SWTKIT/12
94L/94P
US27
US26D
PE
RO
Set: #4
Description: COA Program Space
3 Hinge
1 Passage Set
1 Door Stop
Set: #5
Description: Sliding Door
1 Sliding Hardware Set
1 Flush Pull (set)
END OF SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 15
September 23, 2015
SECTION 088000
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
Glass and glazing for the following products and applications:
a.
b.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Steel doors, frames and sidelights specified in Section 081110 - HOLLOW METAL
DOORS AND FRAMES.
Interior borrowed lites.
Section 081400 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS for factory glazing for wood doors.
Section 085310 – VINYL WINDOWS for factory glazed windows.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both,
as defined in referenced glazing publications.
B.
Glass Thicknesses:
ASTM C 1036.
1.4
Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B.
Samples: 12-inch- square Samples for each type of glass and glass assembly, glazing sealants.
C.
Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in
preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
D.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
E.
Qualification Data: For installers.
GLAZING
088000 - 1
1.5
September 23, 2015
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass
installations with a record of successful in-service performance..
B.
Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 120 and, for wired glass,
ANSI Z97.1.
1.
2.
1.6
Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently
marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another
certification agency] acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2
articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. in exposed surface area of one side, provide
glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. or less in
exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I
or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required
by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
A.
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to
prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct
exposure to sun, or other causes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GLASS PRODUCTS
A.
2.2
Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; Kind FT; 1/4
inch thick unless indicated otherwise.
GLAZING TAPES
A.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids
content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with
or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for
application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with
ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for project conditions.
B.
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with
AAMA 800 for the following types:
1.
2.
Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of
liquid sealant.
GLAZING
088000 - 2
2.3
September 23, 2015
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer
hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation
indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
2.4
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A.
Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and
face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B.
Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces
square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces.
C.
Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.2
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
Presence and functioning of weep system.
Minimum required face or edge clearances.
Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
GLAZING
088000 - 3
3.3
September 23, 2015
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B.
Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,
minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows:
1.
2.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in
glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
3.4
TAPE GLAZING
A.
Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B.
Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C.
Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
GLAZING
088000 - 4
September 23, 2015
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.
F.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
3.5
A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do
come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
END OF SECTION
GLAZING
088000 - 5
September 23, 2015
SECTION 092110
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Interior gypsum wallboard.
Remodeling of existing gypsum board and plaster assemblies.
Thermal insulation and acoustic insulation in gypsum wallboard assemblies.
Installation of access panels.
Marking and identification for fire- and smoke-partitions.
Section 061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY for wood framing.
Section 083110 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES for installation in gypsum board
assemblies.
A.
Structural Performance: Provide fire stop tracks capable of withstanding deflection within limits
and under conditions indicated.
1.
B.
Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction
tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure.
Marking and Identification for Fire- and Smoke-Partitions: Fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions,
smoke barriers, smoke partitions and other walls required to have protected openings or
penetrations shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs or stenciling. Such
identification shall:
1.
2.
3.
Be located in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling or attic spaces; and
Locate within 15 feet of end of each wall and repeat at intervals not exceeding 30 feet
measured horizontally along the wall or partition; and
Include lettering not less than 3 inches in height with a minimum 3/8 inch stroke in
contrasting color, incorporating the suggested wording: "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE
BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," or other wording.
092110 - 1
1.4
September 23, 2015
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Samples: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated.
C.
Shop Drawings: If materials and systems other than those specified and those indicated on the
Drawings are proposed for use, submit shop drawings signed and sealed by a structural
engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project certifying proposed systems meet code
requirements, project requirements and the following deflection criteria:
1.
1.5
For gypsum board assemblies without applied rigid finishes L/240; for gypsum board
assemblies with applied rigid finishes such as tile, stone, wood paneling L/360. Lateral
load 5 psf except at shafts. Lateral load at shafts shall be required based on analysis of
equipment and systems using shaft.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according
to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
1.6
STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat
to prevent sagging.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations:
Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy
surface contamination and discoloration.
092110 - 2
September 23, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
1.
2.
3.
B.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board at all Vertical Surfaces: ASTM C 1396.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Manufacturer: USG Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough, National Gypsum GoldBond XP
Gypsum Board, Georgia-Pacific ToughRock Mold-Guard Gyspum Board.
Fire-Rated Board: Required for fire-rated partitions.
Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
Fire-Resistant Type X: ASTM C 1396.
1.
2.
2.2
USG Corporation.
Georgia-Pacific (G-P) Gypsum LLC.
National Gypsum Company.
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
Long Edges: Tapered.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
Shapes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.3
Cornerbead.
Bullnose bead.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
Expansion (control) joint.
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
C.
Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting-type taping compound.
092110 - 3
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.4
September 23, 2015
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
type, sandable topping compound.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
C.
Thermal Insulation and Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without
membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers
manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1.
D.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
Acoustical Sealant:
Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
1.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
c.
2.5
Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
USG Corporation.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant.
Pecora Corp.; BA-98.
Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
IDENTIFICATION LABELS FOR FIRE- AND SMOKE-PARTITIONS
A.
Identification Labels: Vinyl adhesive signs, to comply with applicable local Code.
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Fire Wall Signs, Inc.
My Safety Sign.
Safety Supply Warehouse.
Text: "FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS"
092110 - 4
September 23, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames
and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and
that hangers will develop their full strength.
1.
B.
Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1.
2.
3.3
Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where
offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure
not more than 24 inches o.c.
After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary
for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive
materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fireresistive materials from damage.
A.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply
to framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
092110 - 5
September 23, 2015
B.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels
not less than one framing member.
C.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F.
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1.
2.
3.
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,
coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.
G.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H.
Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
3.5
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Single-Layer Application:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels to minimize end joints.
On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
Multilayer Application:
1.
2.
On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to
framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum,
from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistancerated assembly.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
092110 - 6
3.
4.
C.
3.6
September 23, 2015
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer
either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical
joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring
members.
Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum
board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels
until fastening adhesive has set.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved
by Architect for visual effect.
C.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.7
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for
tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
3.8
Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas not exposed to view.
Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
Level 4: Panel surfaces that will be exposed to view (typical panels).
INSTALLING IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE- AND SMOKE-PARTITIONS
A.
Marking and Identification for Fire- and Smoke-Partitions: Permanently install as required by
Code.
092110 - 7
3.9
September 23, 2015
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or exhibit mold growth. Repair of
damaged panels in place is not acceptable.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy
surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION
092110 - 8
September 23, 2015
SECTION 093000
TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.
1.3
Floor and base tile.
Thresholds installed as part of tile installations.
Elastomeric sealants for expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile
surfaces.
Surface preparation for tile and accessories.
Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for sealing of joints between dissimilar materials.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
B.
Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
1.4
A.
For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined
by the test protocol provided in ANSI A137.1, Section 9.6.
1.
1.5
Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile
surfaces.
C.
Samples for Verification:
TILING
093000 - 1
1.
2.
3.
September 23, 2015
Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for each
color and finish required, at least 12 inches square and mounted on rigid panel. Use
grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed work.
Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.
Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.
D.
E.
Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or
producer.
1.
Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties for each contiguous area.
B.
Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for
each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate
from one source or producer.
C.
Division 01.
1.7
A.
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels
intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile
packages.
B.
Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D.
Store liquid additives in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Tile: Large format slate-look” through body porcelain floor tile by DalTile or American Olean; as
selected by the Architect
TILING
093000 - 2
B.
September 23, 2015
ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for
Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in
Part 1 "Definitions" Article.
Large Format Tiles are defined as more than 12 inches in any nominal dimension.
C.
ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI
standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.
D.
Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample
submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same
range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
E.
Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard
with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Tile Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and
coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes selected from manufacturer's
standard shapes.
G.
Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or
combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications;
extruded aluminum exposed-edge material, with clear anodized satin finish.
1.
Available Manufacturer: Schluter Systems.
H.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
I.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
J.
Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
Custom Building Products.
Laticrete International, Inc.
MAPEI Corporation.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic
additive to which only water must be added at Project site.
For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging
mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.
TILING
093000 - 3
1.
September 23, 2015
Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition
to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
a.
b.
Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and narrower.
Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and wider.
K.
Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
L.
Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not
change color or appearance of grout.
2.2
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base
polymer and characteristics indicated. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 JOINT SEALANTS.
B.
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;
Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with
fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that
are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
D.
Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25;
Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.3
Custom Building Products; 100 Silicone Caulk.
Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786.
GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700.
Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.
Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White.
Bostik; Chem-Calk 550.
Tremco, Inc.; Vulkem 245.
Pecora Corporation; NR-200 Urexpan.
Tremco, Inc.; THC-900.
MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A.
Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B.
Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
TILING
093000 - 4
C.
September 23, 2015
Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.2
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing
compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of
tile installation standards for installations indicated.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before
installing tile.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
PREPARATION
A.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax,
oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B.
Provide concrete substrates for tile floors that comply with flatness tolerances specified in
referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.
1.
2.
C.
3.3
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound
according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product
specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.
Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals,
verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package
show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
A.
ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods
indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B.
TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA
installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
TILING
093000 - 5
September 23, 2015
C.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight
aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so
plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining
tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both
directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform
joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within
tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
F.
Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G.
Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar
beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1.
2.
H.
Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1.
2.
3.4
Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 - JOINT
SEALANTS.
For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and
latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.
For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including
those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.
1.
B.
3.5
For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation
standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.
Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets
carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1.
2.
Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation.
Use only cleaners
TILING
093000 - 6
3.
September 23, 2015
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners
are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect
metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean
water before and after cleaning.
Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer
that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it
from clogging drains.
B.
When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed
tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during
construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
C.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed. After seven days, cover areas subject to construction traffic with heavy cardboard.
D.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
3.6
TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A.
This schedule refers to Tile Installation Methods specified in the TCNA Manual. Refer to Finish
Schedule for Tile Product Types.
B.
Floor Tile and Base Installation Method FT-2: Interior floor installation on concrete; thin-set
mortar; TCA F113 and ANSI A108.5.
1.
2.
3.
Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar.
Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
Joint Width: 1/16 inch.
END OF SECTION
TILING
093000 - 7
September 23, 2015
SECTION 095100
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Acoustical ceiling tiles and panels.
Remodeling of existing ceiling systems.
Suspension systems, grid systems and ceiling hangers.
Acoustical sealant at edge moldings at acoustical ceilings.
Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for gypsum board ceilings and soffits.
Division 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION for fire-suppression components located in ceilings.
Division 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING for air handling and
distribution components located in ceilings.
Division 26 - ELECTRICAL for light fixture and alarm system components located in
ceilings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations
and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Ceiling suspension members.
Method of attaching hangers to building structure. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place
anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in
other Sections.
Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.
Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
095100 - 1
1.
2.
September 23, 2015
Acoustical Panel: Set of 6 inch square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.
Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 inch long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
D.
Asbestos Certification: Manufacturer's written certification that acoustical ceiling products
contain no asbestos (0.0000%). Product labels indicating that it is the user's responsibility to
test the products for asbestos are unacceptable and sufficient cause for rejection of the product
on site.
E.
Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations:
1.
2.
B.
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
Suspension Systems: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1.
Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a.
b.
2.
C.
1.5
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264
for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
1.
D.
Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Division 01.
A.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
095100 - 2
C.
1.6
September 23, 2015
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Acoustic Tile: General office use and as indicated.
1.
Manufacturer and Model Number:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Panel Size: 24 inches by 24 inches by 3/4 inch.
Panel Mounting: Revealed edge.
Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.70.
Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 35.
Color: White.
Grid Material: Painted steel.
Grid Face Width: 9/16 inch.
Wood Fiber Tile:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
USG, Mars ClimaPlus No. 86985.
Certainteed Ceilings, Symphony M. 1222F-OVT-1.
Armstrong, Ultima No. 1912.
Manufacturer: Tectum.
Panel Size: 24 inches wide by 96 inches long by 1 inch thick.
Panel Mounting: Concealed.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manufacturer: USG, Armstrong, CertainTeed Ceilings, or Chicago Metallic.
Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
Face Design: Flat, flush.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
095100 - 3
5.
6.
7.
B.
2.
Anchors in Concrete: Anchors with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated
and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by
ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as
applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency; zinc-plated for Class
SC1 service.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory
devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
2.3
Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet.
Color: White, prefinished.
Grid Face Width: As specified with ACT type.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.
1.
C.
September 23, 2015
Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
0.106 diameter wire.
METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A.
Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel
edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material,
finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Suspension Trim: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms
reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at
exposed suspension member.
For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required
to fit penetration exactly.
For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and manufacturer's
standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Axiom.
CertainTeed Ceilings; Approved equal.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Compasso.
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), recommended for
sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
095100 - 4
September 23, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 per manufacturer's
written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards and publications.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will
not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or
power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Space hangers not more than 48 o.c. along each member supported directly from
hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends
of each member.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1.
Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
095100 - 5
2.
3.
September 23, 2015
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not
more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of
1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
D.
Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
E.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat, precise fit.
1.
2.
3.4
Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed
panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel
manufacturer.
Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having
jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel
manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
095100 - 6
September 23, 2015
SECTION 096510
RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Resilient floor covering.
Resilient wall base and accessories.
Substrate preparation for resilient flooring and accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations of
seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
1.
C.
Show details of special patterns.
Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient flooring required.
1.
2.
Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not
less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color and pattern required.
For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches
long, of each color required.
D.
Seam Samples for Sheet Flooring: For seamless-installation technique indicated and for each
floor covering product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center
of 6-by-9-inch. Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.
E.
Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure
behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
096510 - 1
1.5
September 23, 2015
A.
1.6
Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store tiles on flat surfaces.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1.
2.
3.
48 hours before installation.
During installation.
48 hours after installation.
B.
After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
range
recommended
by
C.
Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
D.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
E.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RESILIENT FLOOR COVERING
A.
2.2
Type: Refer to the Finish Scheduleon the Drawings.
RESILIENT WALL BASE
A.
Wall Base: ASTM F 1861.
1.
2.
3.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Johnsonite, a division of Tarkett.
Nora Systems, Inc.
B.
Style and Colors: As indicated on the Finish Legend.
C.
Type (Material Requirement): TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or TP (rubber, thermoplastic).
D.
Shape: Straight (toeless) at carpet and coved at resilient flooring.
E.
Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
F.
Height: 4 inches.
G.
Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.
096510 - 2
H.
Outside Corners: Premolded.
I.
Inside Corners: Premolded.
J.
Surface: Smooth.
2.3
September 23, 2015
RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A.
Types Include the Following as Applicable: Cap for cove carpet, cap for cove resilient sheet
floor covering, carpet edge for glue-down applications, nosing for carpet, nosing for resilient
floor covering, reducer strip for resilient floor covering, joiner for tile and carpet.
1.
2.
3.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Johnsonite, a division of Tarkett.
Nora Systems, Inc.
B.
Material: Rubber.
C.
Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
2.4
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or
blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
C.
Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
D.
Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
2.
3.2
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
096510 - 3
B.
September 23, 2015
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within a range on pH scale not
less than 5 or more than 9 pH, or as otherwise required in writing by manufacturer of
flooring.
Moisture Vapor Emission Testing:
a.
4.
Relative Humidity Testing:
a.
5.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of
water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours, or as otherwise required in writing by manufacturer
of flooring.
Perform relative humidity test, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after
substrates have a maximum relative humidity level of 75 percent, or as otherwise
required in writing by manufacturer of flooring.
Perform tests indicated above and as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
C.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
D.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
E.
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1.
F.
3.3
Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are
to be installed.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
SHEET INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings.
B.
Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
C.
Lay out floor coverings as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.
Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least
6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates.
Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.
096510 - 4
4.
September 23, 2015
Avoid cross seams.
D.
Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures,
and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent
marking device.
G.
Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in
installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of floor
coverings installed on covers and adjoining floor covering. Tightly adhere floor covering edges
to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
H.
Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4
TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1.
Lay tiles in pattern indicated.
B.
Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
C.
Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, doorframes, thresholds, and
nosings.
D.
Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
E.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
F.
Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas.
Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed on covers. Tightly
adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
G.
Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
096510 - 5
3.5
September 23, 2015
RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
B.
Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
C.
Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
D.
Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E.
On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
F.
Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces.
3.6
RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
3.7
Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would
otherwise be exposed.
A.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1.
2.
3.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a.
B.
Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.
Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive,
and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer.
a.
2.
3.
Coordinate selection of floor polish with the Ownerʼs maintenance service.
Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper
until Substantial Completion.
Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or
plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll
objects over panels without moving panels.
END OF SECTION
096510 - 6
September 23, 2015
SECTION 099000
PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the following
work only:
1.
B.
Work Not Included in Contract:
1.
C.
All other work of this section.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Finishing of clear finished Douglas Fir doors (2) and Douglas Fir trim at wall between
Corridor and CoA Program Space.
Section 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS for shop priming ferrous metal.
Section 064020 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK for shop priming interior
architectural woodwork.
Section 081110 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES for factory priming steel
doors and frames.
Section 081400 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS for factory priming.
Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for surface preparation of gypsum
board.
DEFINITIONS AND EXTENT
A.
General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at
an 85-degree meter.
Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at
a 60-degree meter.
This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior
items and surfaces.
099000 - 1
1.
C.
Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material
is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned,
paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish
is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.
1.
D.
September 23, 2015
Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including
color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and
electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.
Do NOT paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,
and labels.
1.
Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible
spaces:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Foundation spaces.
Furred areas.
Ceiling plenums.
Utility tunnels.
Pipe spaces.
Duct shafts.
Elevator shafts.
Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
Architectural woodwork.
Acoustical wall panels.
Toilet enclosures.
Metal lockers.
Kitchen appliances.
Elevator entrance doors and frames.
Elevator equipment.
Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
Light fixtures.
Anodized aluminum.
Stainless steel.
Chromium plate.
Copper and copper alloys.
Bronze and brass.
Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Valve and damper operators.
Linkages.
Sensing devices.
Motor and fan shafts.
099000 - 2
5.
1.4
September 23, 2015
Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
1.
2.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.5
Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and
cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis
and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and
primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until
required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each
Sample for location and application.
Submit two eight inch by 12 inch Samples for each type of finish coating for Architect's
review of color and texture only.
Qualification Data: For Applicator.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
C.
Mockups: Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate
required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample
Submittals.
1.6
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Product name or title of material.
Product description (generic classification or binder type).
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
Color name and number.
VOC content.
099000 - 3
B.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
1.
1.7
September 23, 2015
Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 and 90 deg F.
B.
Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air are between 45 and 95 deg F.
C.
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.
1.8
Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Paint: Furnish four unopened gallons of each type of paint and coating work, in color and
gloss as used for the Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Available Products:
incorporated into the Work are listed in the Finish Schedule at the end of this Section.
PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types
specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not
be acceptable.
1.
Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material
data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
099000 - 4
C.
September 23, 2015
Colors: Refer to Finish Schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for paint application.
1.
2.
B.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1.
3.2
Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical
or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting.
1.
B.
Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances
that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1.
C.
After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions and technical bulletins for each particular substrate condition and as
specified.
1.
2.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and
mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence,
chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze.
If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of
surface preparation.
a.
b.
Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate
tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and
burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture
content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
099000 - 5
c.
3.
b.
c.
d.
e.
b.
c.
D.
Exterior Exposed Steel: Clean steel surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP
6/NACE No. 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Abrasive blast cleaned surfaces shall
exhibit a uniform, angular profile of 1.5-3.0 mils. Prime cleaned surfaces within 8
hours and prior to surface rusting.
Interior Exposed Steel, in Humid Environments:
Clean steel surfaces in
accordance with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Abrasive
blast cleaned surfaces shall exhibit a uniform, angular profile of 1.5-3.0 mils. Prime
cleaned surfaces within 8 hours and prior to surface rusting.
Interior Exposed Steel, in Dry Environments: Clean steel surfaces in accordance
with SSPC-SP2 or SP3 Hand or Power Tool Cleaning.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP16 Brush
off Blast Cleaning of Galvanized Steel and NonFerrous Metals, to achieve a minimum 1
mil anchor profile.
Material Preparation:
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white
shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming,
fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand
smooth when dried.
Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges,
ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters,
cases, and paneling.
If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on back side.
Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.
a.
5.
Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or
other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize
with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.
Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a.
4.
September 23, 2015
Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple
coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but
provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
099000 - 6
3.3
September 23, 2015
APPLICATION
A.
General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended
by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional
coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to
ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film
thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky
under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not
cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and
provide desired protection.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
Paint backsides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
Finish exterior doors and doors in wet areas on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same
as exterior faces.
Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate
size for surface or item being painted.
Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
Minimum Coating Thickness:
Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film
thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
099000 - 7
September 23, 2015
E.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
F.
Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Uninsulated metal piping.
Uninsulated plastic piping.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets.
Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket
material.
Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
Switchgear.
Panelboards.
Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
H.
Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete
coverage with pores filled.
I.
Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other
defects due to insufficient sealing.
J.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
K.
Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of
even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks,
orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1.
L.
3.4
Provide satin finish for final coats.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or repaint work not complying with requirements.
A.
The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as
the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
1.
2.
The Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material
being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and
certified in the presence of Contractor.
Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required
by the Architect.
099000 - 8
3.
3.5
September 23, 2015
The Architect may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being
used does not comply with specified requirements.
Contractor shall remove
noncomplying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously
coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove
noncomplying paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint,
the two coatings are incompatible.
CLEANING
A.
Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from Project site.
1.
3.6
After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished
surfaces.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
1.
3.7
After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
Schedule: Provide products and number of coats specified. Use of manufacturer's proprietary
product names to designate colors, materials, generic class, standard of quality and
performance criteria and is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to
the exclusion of equivalent performing products of other manufacturers.
B.
Exterior Paint Schedule:
1.
Exterior Previously Painted Concrete, Previous Painted Masonry, and Plaster Painted
Finish:
a.
One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
Tnemec 151 Elast-Grip at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT.
Liquid Plastics Water Borne Penetrating Primer at 3.0 mils DFT.
Dupont Corlar 2.1 PRP at 1.0 to 2.0 mils DFT.
RD Coatings Multiprim at 1.5 to 2.0 mils DFT.
And Two Coats:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Tnemec 156 Enviro-Crete at 8 to 10 mils DFT.
Liquid Plastics Decadex at 10.0 to 12.0 mils DFT.
Dupont Tufcryl at 8.0 to 10.0 mils DFT.
RD Coatings Elasto-Flex at 6.0 to 8.0 mils DFT.
099000 - 9
2.
Exterior Galvanized Metal (not shop-finished under Section 055000 - METAL
FABRICATIONS), Alliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane System:
a.
b.
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP16 Brush-off Blast of Galvanized Steel.
One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
c.
Tnemec 73 Endura-Shield at 3.0 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amercoat 450H Polyurethane at 3.0 mils DFT.
Dupont Imron 2.8 Urethane at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
International Interthane 990 HS at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
Exterior Existing Prepainted Painted Steel, for Overcoat Painted Finish: Includes existing
lintels.
a.
b.
Surface Preparation: Water Blast 5000 psi and SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Clean.
One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
c.
d.
Tnemec 394 Omnithane at 3.0 to 3.5 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amerlock 400 Hi-Build Epoxy at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
RD Coatings Elasto Metal at 3.0 mils DFT.
International Interplus 356 at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.
And One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Tnemec 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amerlock 400 at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
RD Coatings Elasto Metal at 7.0 mils DFT.
International Intergard 475 HS at 5.0 to 10.0 mils DFT.
And One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
C.
Tnemec 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline at 3.0 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amerlock 400 Hi-Build Epoxy at 4.0-5.0 mils DFT.
Dupont 25P High Solids at 4.0 mils DFT.
International Intergard 475 HS at 5.0 to 10.0 mils DFT.
And One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
3.
September 23, 2015
Tnemec 73 Endura-Shield at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amercoat 450H at 3.0 mils DFT.
RD Coatings MurCryl at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
International Interthane 990 HS at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
Interior Paint Schedule:
1.
Interior Gypsum Wallboard and Plaster, Latex Paint Finish:
a.
One Coat, Primer:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Primer 372.
Duron Genesis Latex Primer.
S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Wall Primer.
PPG Pure Performance Latex Primer.
California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Primer 646.
099000 - 10
b.
September 23, 2015
And Two Coats, Flat Finish: At ceilings, and elsewhere as indicated.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Flat 373.
Duron Genesis Latex Flat.
S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Flat.
PPG Pure Performance Latex Eggshell.
California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Flat 633.
or
c.
And Two Coats, Eggshell Finish: At walls, and elsewhere as indicated.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Eggshell 374.
Duron Genesis Latex Eggshell.
S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Eggshell.
PPG Pure Performance Latex Eggshell.
California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Eggshell 631.
or
d.
And Two Coats, Semi-Gloss Finish: At toilet rooms, other wet areas, and
elsewhere as indicated.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
2.
Interior Architectural Woodwork, Finish Carpentry, and Wood Doors (softwoods, paint
grade hardwoods, MDF, MDO, and hardwood veneers), Latex Paint Finish:
a.
One Coat, Primer:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
b.
Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Primer 372.
Duron Genesis Latex Primer.
S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Primer.
PPG Pure Performance Latex Primer.
California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Primer 646.
And Two Coats, Semi-Gloss:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
3.
Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 376.
Duron Genesis Latex Semi-Gloss.
S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Semi-Gloss.
PPG Pure Performance Latex Semi-Gloss.
California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Semi-Gloss 663.
S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss.
California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Semi Gloss 663.
Interior Architectural Woodwork, Finish Carpentry and Millwork (hardwoods and
hardwood veneers, except paint grade and factory-finished items), Transparent
Polyurethane Finish:
a.
b.
c.
Sand: 120 grit sandpaper.
Sand: 220 grit sandpaper.
One Coat, Stain:
099000 - 11
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
d.
4.
Sand Between Urethane Coats: 220 grit sandpaper.
One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
b.
Interior Metals (Not specified to receive other coating systems/not shop finished), Latex
Painted Finish:
a.
b.
One Coat: Approved primer, in shop under other Sections (where specified). If
not shop primed, provide primer recommended by finish coating manufacturer.
And Two Coats:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Concrete Floor, Clear Exposed Sealer:
a.
One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
7.
PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Latex Block Filler 6-15 or 6-16.
S-W Loxon Block Surfacer.
California Paint Pro Block Filler 515-00.
And Two Coats:
1)
2)
3)
6.
Bona Kemi USA, Bona Tech Mega Waterbase Polyurethane.
Target Coatings, Oxford Hybrid Satin Varnish.
American Formulating & Manufacturing, Polyureseal BP.
S-W Minwax Water Based Polyurethane.
GP Woodpride WB Satin Polyurethane 1802.
Interior Concrete Masonry Units in Dry Areas, Latex Paint Finish:
a.
5.
Carver Tripp Waterbase Stain.
Knute’s Restoration EF Waterbase Stain.
American Formulating & Manufacturing, SafeCoat Durostain.
S-W Minwax Water Based Stain.
GP Woodpride Stain 1700V.
And Two Coats, Satin Finish:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
e.
September 23, 2015
Curecrete Chemical; Ashford Formula.
Chem Probe; CT Denisifyer.
WR Meadows; Liqui-Hard.
L&M; Sealhard.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint all exposed items throughout the project except
factory finished items with factory-applied baked enamel finishes which occur in
099000 - 12
September 23, 2015
mechanical rooms or areas, and excepting chrome or nickel plating, stainless steel, and
aluminum other than mill finished. Paint all exposed ductwork and inner portion of all
ductwork. Same as specified for other interior metals, hereinabove.
END OF SECTION
099000 - 13
September 23, 2015
SECTION 101400
SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
2.
B.
1.
1.3
Code-required interior panel signage, including but not limited to, accessibility signage,
toilet room signage and mechanical and electrical room signage.
For bidding purposes, assume 8 signs 8” by 10” and 12 signs 6” by 8”. Locations as
determined by Architect.
Division 26 - ELECTRICAL for illuminated exit signs.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and
other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing,
reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
1.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of sign, include the following Samples to verify color
selected:
1.
2.
D.
Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering,
artwork, and braille layout.
Panel Signs: Full-size Samples of each type of sign required.
Approved samples will not be returned for installation into Project.
Maintenance Data: For signage cleaning and maintenance requirements to include in
maintenance manuals.
SIGNAGE
101400 - 1
1.4
September 23, 2015
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Massachusetts Architectural Access Board,
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on which
they are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
COORDINATION
A.
For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of anchorage
devices about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices and similar items to be
used for attaching signs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PANEL SIGNS
A.
General: Provide signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses,
finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction as indicated. Produce
smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within tolerance
of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally. Provide the following:
1.
Code-Required Signs for Certificate of Occupancy:
a.
2.
Interior Signs Based on Ownerʼs Requirements:
a.
B.
Type: Photopolymer on acrylic or printed acrylic / aluminum as applicable. Size
and color as selected by Architect.
Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy complying with
ADA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2
braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut
marks.
1.
C.
Type: Photopolymer on acrylic or printed acrylic / aluminum as applicable. Size
and color as selected by Architect.
Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch
Symbols of Accessibility: Provide 6-inch- high symbol fabricated from opaque nonreflective
vinyl film, 0.0035-inch nominal thickness, with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing suitable for
both exterior and interior applications.
SIGNAGE
101400 - 2
2.2
September 23, 2015
ACCESSORIES
A.
Mounting Methods: Use double-sided vinyl tape fabricated from materials that are not corrosive
to sign material and mounting surface.
B.
Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for
exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set
into concrete or masonry work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Verify that items provided under other sections of Work are sized and located to accommodate
signs.
C.
Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to
comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter.
D.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types
described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
B.
Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated below:
1.
3.3
Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion
and other defects in appearance.
Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable.
Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent
walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding
objects or standing within swing of door.
Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape to mount signs to smooth, nonporous
surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.
A.
After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Protect signs from damage until acceptance by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
SIGNAGE
101400 - 3
September 23, 2015
SECTION 102800
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
B.
1.
1.3
Toilet accessories.
Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY for blocking.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.
1.
2.
C.
1.4
Construction details and dimensions.
Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work
and substrate preparation.
Material and finish descriptions.
Features that will be included for Project.
Manufacturer's warranty.
Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.
Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
Maintenance Data: For toilet accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products
of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.
TOILET ACCESSORIES
102800 - 1
1.5
September 23, 2015
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,
cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B.
Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
American Specialties, Inc.
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
Bradley Corporation.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Mirror: 24 by 36 inch tempered plate glass mirror, and stainless steel frame with No. 4 finish.
B.
Toilet Paper Holder: Double roll, stainless steel with No. 4 finish.
C.
Grab Bars: Stainless steel with No. 4 finish, concealed mounting.
2.3
MATERIALS
A.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.
C.
Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
D.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamperand-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors
and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage
and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B.
Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to the Owner.
TOILET ACCESSORIES
102800 - 2
September 23, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B.
Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to
method in ASTM F 446.
3.2
A.
Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B.
Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C.
Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION
TOILET ACCESSORIES
102800 - 3
September 23, 2015
SECTION 104400
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Portable fire extinguishers.
Fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.
Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING for field painting fire-protection cabinets.
Division 21 - FIRE PROTECTION for fire hose valves and standpipes.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each item.
1.
2.
B.
1.4
Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting
methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware,
cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.
Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance
manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source
from a single manufacturer.
B.
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
C.
Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
104400 - 1
D.
1.5
September 23, 2015
Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet
and mounting bracket indicated.
B.
Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 5-lb nominal
capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.
2.2
FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET
A.
1.
2.
3.
JL Industries, Inc.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
B.
Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
C.
Cabinet Material: Enameled-steel sheet.
D.
Recessed Cabinet:
indicated.
1.
Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim
Trimless with Plaster Stop: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with exterior
finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim attached to cabinet.
Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, attached to box to act as plaster stop.
If wall condition does not allow for trimless with plaster stop, provide flat 5/16 inch trim of
same material as the cabinet box.
E.
Door Material: Steel sheet with baked enamel finish, color as selected.
F.
Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.
G.
Door Glazing: Tempered break glass.
H.
Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
I.
Accessories:
104400 - 2
1.
2.
3.
2.3
September 23, 2015
Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to
fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and
mounting clip, secured to cabinet, or provide locking mechanism that allows for
emergency access to the cabinet without the breaking of glass, simply by pulling sharply
on the cabinetʼs handle.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
MOUNTING BRACKETS
A.
Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall
or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated
or baked-enamel finish.
B.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1.
2.
Weld joints and grind smooth.
Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch-thick, coldrolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick, fire-barrier material.
a.
B.
Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials
indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1.
2.
C.
2.5
Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2
inch thick.
Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.
D.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
104400 - 3
September 23, 2015
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets
will be installed.
B.
Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Contractor shall be responsible for
fire extinguisher tagging by a certified service technician located within 75 miles of the project.
1.
C.
3.2
Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Prepare recesses for recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet
and trim style.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated on the
Drawings and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
1.
2.
3.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is
not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets.
Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.
Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.
C.
Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
D.
Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF FIRE-RATED CABINETS
A.
Install cabinet with not more than 1/16-inch tolerance between pipe OD and knockout OD.
Center pipe within knockout.
B.
Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in Section 078410 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING.
104400 - 4
3.5
September 23, 2015
A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection specialties
are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking
devices operate properly.
C.
On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fireprotection cabinet manufacturer.
E.
Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
104400 - 5
September 23, 2015
SECTION 107446
WINDOW WELLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
B.
RELATED WORK: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under
the designated Sections:
1.
1.3
Segmented retaining wall (SRW) window well system with granite cap.
Section 055000 – METAL FABRICATIONS: Metal bar gratings and frames for installation
at top of window well.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of window well required.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include sections and details showing general arrangement, jointing, fittings
and accessories, and attachment systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WINDOW WELLS
A.
Available Products:
incorporated into the Work are the following or approved equal:
1.
Segmented Retaining Wall Units (SRW): By VERSA-LOK or equal.
a.
2.
SRW units shall be interlocked with connecting pins that provide ¾-inch setback
from unit below (yielding a 7-degree cant from vertical).
Granite cap stones to match adjacent window wells.
WINDOW WELLS
107446 - 1
September 23, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil
and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. Place and
compact drainage material at excavation bottom.
B.
Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions.
3.3
WINDOW WELL INSTALLATION
A.
General:
Install window wells where shown and according to Shop Drawings and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Stack modules as required to reach finish grade. Lock modules together.
C.
Anchor brackets and bases securely to foundation wall with fasteners as indicated on Shop
Drawings. Seal joints between foundation wall and window well.
D.
Backfill area surrounding window well per manufacturer’s instructions.
END OF SECTION
WINDOW WELLS
107446 - 2
September 23, 2015
SECTION 122110
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.
B.
1.
1.3
Miniblinds with aluminum louver slats at each of six new interior windows, each of two
new interior glazed doors, and each of two new exterior windows.
Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY for wood blocking and grounds for mounting
horizontal louver blinds and accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions,
construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and
operating instructions.
A.
1.5
Deliver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, and location of
installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment
schedule.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and
dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and
humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its
intended use.
B.
Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction,
verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation
hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
122110 - 1
September 23, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Hunter Douglas Window Fashions.
Levolor Contract; a Newell Company; Levolor.
Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; Graber.
Verosol USA, Inc.
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM LOUVER SLATS
A.
Louver Slats: Aluminum, alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish
indicated; with crowned profile and radiused corners.
1.
2.
3.
Nominal Slat Width: 1 inch for miniblinds.
Nominal Slat Thickness: Not less than 0.008 inch.
Slat Finish: Two colors as indicated, one per side of slat.
B.
Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing
operating mechanisms on three sides and ends
C.
Tilt Control: Consisting of enclosed worm gear mechanism[, slip clutch or detachable wand
preventing overrotation, and linkage rod, for the following operation:
1.
2.
3.
Tilt Operation: Manual with clear plastic wand
Length of Tilt Control: Length required to make operation convenient from floor level.
Tilt: Full.
D.
Lift Operation: Manual, cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or
descending travel.
E.
Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term louver sag; braided string.
F.
Mounting: As indicated on Drawings, mounting permitting easy removal and replacement
without damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for
blind placement and alignment indicated.
1.
Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing
recommended by manufacturer for weight and size of blind.
G.
Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard, as indicated.
H.
Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: As selected by the Architect.
2.3
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS FABRICATION
A.
Product Standard and Description: Comply with AWCMA Document 1029, unless otherwise
indicated, for each horizontal louver blind designed to be self-leveling and consisting of louver
slats, rails, ladders, tapes, lifting and tilting mechanisms, cord, cord lock, tilt control, and
installation hardware.
122110 - 2
B.
Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.
1.
C.
September 23, 2015
Lifting and Tilting Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts.
Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,
measured at 74 deg F:
1.
Blind Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch per side or 1/2
inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which
each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than headto-sill dimension of opening in which each blind is installed.
D.
Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting
headrail and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind mounting method
indicated.
E.
Installation Fasteners: Not fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal
noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to
supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use.
F.
Color-Coated Finish: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked
finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including
pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
G.
Component Color: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and exposed-to-view metal and plastic
matching or coordinating with slat color, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting
performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
Install blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's
written instructions, and located so exterior louver edges in any position are not closer than 1
inch to interior face of glass. Install intermediate support as required to prevent deflection in
headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's
operation hardware, if any.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
A.
Clean blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
122110 - 3
September 23, 2015
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of
C.
Replace damaged blinds that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before
time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
122110 - 4
September 23, 2015
SECTION 22.00.01
PLUMBING
(Filed Sub-Bid)
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1
1.2
A.
Include the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1, General Requirements, as
part of this Section.
B.
Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements that affect work under
this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C.
Coordinate work of this Section with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by, this
Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the
contract.
FILED SUB-BID
A.
Bidding procedures shall be in accordance with the latest edition of Massachusetts General
Laws, Chapter 30; Section 39M, and Chapter 149, Section 4; as modified by Chapter 484
(1984) and Chapter 30B, Uniform Procurement Act (1990). Time and place for submission
of sub-bids is given in Advertisement for Bids.
B.
Sub-Bids for work under this section shall be for complete work and shall be filed in a
sealed envelope with Awarding Authority, at time and place specified in Advertisement for
Bids. Following shall appear on face of envelope:
NAME OF AWARDING AUTHORITY
PROJECT NAME
[NAME OF SUB-BIDDER]
SECTION 220001- PLUMBING
1.3
C.
Every sub-bid submitted for work under this section shall be on forms furnished by
Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of General Laws, and
specified in Advertisement for Bids.
D.
Sub-bids filed with Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by bid deposits in the form
of a bid bond, cash, certified check, or a treasurer's or cashier's check, issued by a
responsible bank or trust company, payable to the Awarding Authority in compliance with
Chapter 149, Section 44B. Amount of bid deposit shall be 5 percent of value of bid.
E.
Work to be done under this section is shown on the following drawings. : P-001, P101, P201.
Remaining contract drawings are included for reference and coordination.
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Included in this Section is the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and accessories
required to provide a complete installation of the work described herein and on the
Drawings. Build the work of other trades into the work of this Section as required.
B.
Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees and back charges, and obtain
necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction, as required to perform work in
PLUMBING
220001- 1
September 23, 2015
accordance with all legal requirements and with Specifications, Drawings, Addenda, all of
which are part of Contract Documents.
C.
1.4
1.
Selective demolition of plumbing,
2.
Pipe Materials
3.
Plumbing Fixtures
4.
Pipe Protection
5.
Electric Water Heater
6.
Thermostatic Tempering Valve
7.
Hangers, Anchors and Inserts
8.
Pipe Hangers and Supports
9.
Pipe Insulation
10.
Valves
11.
Sleeves
12.
Jointing Compounds
13.
Identification
14.
Access panels
15.
Packaged Sewage Ejector
16.
Provide Close-Out procedures per Division 1.
RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A.
1.5
Mechanical, Section 230001
2.
Electrical, Section 260001
ITEMS SUPPLIED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION BY THIS
SECTION
none.
ITEMS SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SECTION FOR INSTALLATION BY OTHER
SECTIONS
A.
1.7
The following work is not included in this Section and will be performed under other
Sections:
1.
A.
1.6
The work under this Section consists of:
Access panels shall be installed by the GC
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
PLUMBING
Perform work in strict accordance with rules, regulations, standards, codes, ordinances, and
laws of local, state, and Federal governments, and other authorities having lawful
jurisdiction, and be responsible for compliance therewith. Such authorities include but are
not limited to the following:
Local and state building, plumbing, Mechanical, electrical, fire and health department
codes.
220001- 2
1.8
September 23, 2015
2.
248 CMR Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code
3.
International Energy Conservation Code (IECC 2009)
4.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
5.
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
6.
Factory Mutual Association (FM)
7.
Material and equipment shall be Underwriter's Laboratory (UL), ASME and AGA
approved, as applicable, for intended service.
B.
When two or more codes, regulations, etc. conflict with each other or with Contract
Documents, the more severe requirement shall govern conduct of work. The Engineer may
relax this requirement at his sole discretion when such relaxation does not violate ruling of
any authority having jurisdiction. Approval for such relaxation must be obtained in
writing.
C.
Most recent editions of applicable specifications and publications of the following
organizations form part of Contract Documents.
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
2.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
3.
National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
4.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
5.
National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division-1
Specification Sections.
B.
Material and equipment requiring Shop Drawings or Product Data submittal shall include
but shall not be limited to:
1.
Pipe Materials
2.
Plumbing Fixtures
3.
Pipe Protection
4.
Electric Water Heater
5.
Thermostatic Tempering Valve
6.
Hangers, Anchors and Inserts
7.
8.
Pipe Insulation
9.
Valves
10.
Sleeves
11.
Jointing Compounds
12.
Identification
13.
Access panels
14.
PLUMBING
Packaged Sewage Ejector
220001- 3
1.9
September 23, 2015
C.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, service manuals, and parts lists under
applicable provisions.
D.
Submit a line item schedule of values for review prior to equipment submittals for use in
the requisition process.
E.
Submit a schedule for the work in coordination with the G.C.'s schedule.
F.
Submit Massachusetts product approval for all plumbing and gas related products.
G.
Submit proof of potable water system sterilization.
H.
At substantial completion, prepare a set of as-built drawings per Division 1.
GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A.
The provisions under Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 are included.
B.
Guarantee work of this Section in writing for one year from date of Substantial Completion.
1.
Defects in materials, equipment, workmanship or installation that develop within this
period shall be repaired and replaced promptly to Engineer's satisfaction at no cost to
Owner.
2.
Written guarantee shall stipulate that damage caused in making necessary repairs and
replacements shall be corrected at no cost to Owner.
3.
The plumbing system shall be considered substantially complete only after all fixtures are
installed, functional and cleaned, and all potable piping has been sanitized.
C.
1.
1.10
Guarantee shall include provision of 24-hour service for complete system during guarantee
period at no cost to Owner.
Choice of service organization shall be subject to Owner's approval.
D.
Submit guarantee to Engineer through Contractor before final payment.
E.
Transfer individual equipment and material guarantees, which are still in force to Owner at
end of guarantee period.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Work to be performed under this Section is shown on the accompanying drawings.
B.
Listing of drawings does not limit responsibility of determining full extent of work required
by Contract Documents.
1.
Refer to Architectural, Plumbing, Electrical, Structural and other drawings on file, as well
as other specification sections, which indicate type of construction in which the work
must be installed.
2.
Locations shown on Drawings shall be checked against general and detailed drawings of
the construction proper.
C.
1.
D.
PLUMBING
Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangements of systems and work
included in Contract.
Drawings are not intended to specify or to show every offset, fitting, or component;
however, Contract Documents require components and materials, whether or not
indicated or specified, as necessary to make installations fully complete and operational.
Questions regarding drawings or specifications shall be addressed to the Engineer in
writing prior to Award of Contract.
220001- 4
1.
1.11
September 23, 2015
Otherwise, the Engineer's interpretation of meaning and intent of drawings and
specifications shall be final.
DISCREPANCIES IN DOCUMENTS
A.
1.
B.
1.
C.
Where Drawings or Specifications indicate discrepancies or ambiguities, advise the
Engineer in writing before Award of Contract.
Otherwise, the Engineer's interpretation of documents shall be final; no additional
compensation shall be permitted due to discrepancies or ambiguities thus resolved.
Where drawings or specifications do not coincide with recommendations of manufacturer
of material or piece of equipment, alert the Engineer in writing before installation of item in
question.
Otherwise, make changes in installation, as the Engineer requires without additional cost
to owner.
When specifications and drawings are in conflict with each other, or with Contract
Documents, the more severe (costly) requirement shall be provided as part of the base bid
work.
1.
The Engineer may relax this requirement at his sole discretion when such relaxation does
not violate ruling of any authority having jurisdiction.
2.
Approval for such relaxation must be obtained in writing.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE MATERIALS
A.
1.
Service: Above-ground hot and cold water.
Pipe Material: Type L copper tubing, hard temper.
a. Pipe shall comply with ASTM B-88
2.
Fitting Material: Wrought copper conforming to ANSI-ASME B16-22.
3.
Joints: Solder, “lead free” (less than 0.2% lead). NSF cert. ASTM B-32
B.
1.
Service: Above-ground Sanitary and Vent.
2” and larger
a. Pipe Material: Service weight cast iron no-hub soil pipe conforming to CISPI 301
and ASTM A-888.
b. Fitting Material: Cast iron drainage fittings conforming to CISPI 301 and ASTM
A-888.
c. Joints:
2.
1)
Heavy-duty shielded coupling with gasket conforming to ASTM C-1540.
2)
Standard shielded coupling with gasket conforming to CISPI 310 and ASTM
C1277.
Smaller than 2”
a. Pipe Material: Type DWV copper conforming to ASTM B306-99.
PLUMBING
b. Fitting Material: wrought copper drainage fittings conforming to ANSI B16-29.
220001- 5
September 23, 2015
c. Joints: threaded or soldered.
C.
2.2
Service: Below-ground Sanitary and Vent.
1.
Pipe Material: Service weight cast iron no-hub soil pipe, asphalt or coal tar pitch coated.
ASTM A-74
2.
Fitting Material: Cast iron drainage fittings conforming to CISPI 301 and ASTM A-888.
3.
Joints: Heavy-duty gasket conforming to CISPI 310 and ASTM C1277.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
A.
Work includes, but is not limited to, the following fixtures, See schedule on associated
drawings.
1.
Water Closets.
2.
Lavatories, faucets, and drains.
3.
Mop Sink
B.
REFERENCES
1.
ANSI A112.6.1 - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.
2.
ANSI A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
C.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
Fixtures: By the same manufacturer for each product specified throughout.
2.
Trim: By the same manufacturer for each product specified throughout.
D.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1.
Gerber
2.
Kohler;
3.
Manufacturers as listed in the plumbing fixture schedule or approved equal.
E.
INSPECTION
1.
Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation.
2.
Verify that adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this Section.
F.
INSTALLATION
1.
Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
2.
Provide chrome plated rigid or stainless steel flexible supplies to lavatories and toilet
fixtures with key stops, reducers, and escutcheons.
3.
Provide integral stops at shower valves.
4.
Provide drain, strainer and lever actuated drain plug at showers and lavatories.
5.
Install components level and plumb.
6.
Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts.
7.
Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07900, color
to match fixture.
8.
Mount fixtures according to dimensions shown on Architectural drawings
PLUMBING
220001- 6
G.
September 23, 2015
1.
Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or
overflow.
2.
At completion, clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
H.
FIXTURE SCHEDULE
1.
See schedule printed on drawings.
2.
The products listed in the schedule establish the minimum quality and performance
standard for each fixture, and the materials used in their manufacture.
I.
FIXTURE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
1.
Certain fixtures require the use of a concealed, matching fixture hanger.
a. Provide hangers as manufactured by Zurn, Smith, Watts, or approved equivalent
for wall mount lavatories.
b. Provide toilet flanges for securing toilets to the floor.
2.
Pay close attention to dimensional requirements with respect to wall thicknesses and to
wall construction type. Coordinate with the GC prior to start of wall construction.
a. Select the proper hanger based on fixture type, installation conditions and
requirements.
3.
2.3
2.4
Pay close attention to the requirements shown on Architectural drawings for individual
fixture mounting height and location.
ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
A.
Provide electric water heaters meeting the performance and capacity as identified in the
equipment schedules on the drawings.
B.
The water heater shall have an Energy Factor of 0.95 EF for storage volumes less than 55
gallons and meet April 16th, 2015 NAECA energy efficiency requirements.
C.
Tank shall be glass lined steel construction with 2" thick, non-CFC foam insulation (R-24)
with enameled steel outer jacket.
D.
Provide ASME temperature and pressure safety relief valve and discharge piping to a safe
location.
E.
Tank shall include magnesium anode with stainless steel core to protect against corrosion.
F.
Tank shall include tamper resistant, brass drain valve.
G.
Unit shall include electric heating element(s) and aquatstats meeting the wattage and
electrical characteristics shown in the schedule on the drawings.
H.
Water heater shall be AO Smith Conservationist, Ruud, or General Electric.
POINT OF USE THERMOSTATIC TEMPERING VALVE
A.
Provide point of use thermostatic tempering valve at each lavatory fixture. (For bathrooms
with more than one lavatory one tempering valve may be used to serve multiple fixtures.)
B.
The valve shall be ASSE 1070 certified for Point of Use Applications.
C.
Valve body shall be of bronze and stainless steel construction with Teflon coated wear
surfaces.
PLUMBING
220001- 7
2.5
2.6
September 23, 2015
D.
Valve shall reduce mixed flow rate in the event of cold supply line failure.
E.
Valve shall have integral check valves on the inlet, or check valves shall be field installed.
F.
Calibrate valve to deliver 90°F water.
G.
Tempering valve shall be AM-1 series as manufactured by Honeywell or equivalent by
Watts or Conbraco.
PIPE PROTECTION
A.
ADA-conforming, wheelchair accessible lavatories and sinks shall be provided with under
sink protective pipe covers that are intended to minimize risk of scalding from hot surfaces
or abrasions from sharp surfaces.
B.
All exposed plumbing, including P-trap and angle valve assemblies, shall be fitted with
molded vinyl covers. Cover shall be constructed of 1/8” thick, anti-microbial vinyl and
include UV resistant coating.
C.
Covers shall be secured with non-abrasive, reusable fasteners to allow convenient
servicing.
D.
Cover to be selected by architect from manufactures standard color chart. Include color
selection chart with submittal.
E.
Pipe covers shall be Lav-Guard2 as manufactured by Truebro, Inc, or approved equal as
manufactured by Plumberex or McGuire.
HANGERS, ANCHORS, AND INSERTS
A.
Provide hangers to support all piping from building structure to maintain required grade
and pitch of pipe lines, prevent vibration, secure piping in place, and provide for expansion
and contraction. Hangers shall be secured to inserts wherever practical.
B.
Hangers shall be adjustable clevis hanger type.
1.
C.
1.
D.
1.
E.
1.
F.
2.7
Hanger rods shall have machine threads.
Vertical brackets shall be used where horizontal piping is racked along walls. Trapeze
hangers may be used where conditions permit.
Hangers for insulated piping shall be outside insulation with 12 inch long galvanized
insulation shields.
Hanger rods shall be connected to beam clamp, UL approved concrete inserts, or Phillips or
approved equal expansion shields as required to attach to the building construction.
No ram-set or shot shields will be allowed.
Hanger spacing shall conform to requirements of state and local plumbing codes.
In no case shall horizontal piping be supported at intervals greater than 10 ft.- 0 in.
Piping below basement or lowest level slab (that is, buried piping) need not be supported
from structure if slab is not designed as structural slab.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Uninsulated pipes 2 inch and smaller:
1.
Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger.
2.
Adjustable steel swivel J-hanger.
PLUMBING
220001- 8
3.
Malleable iron ring hanger or hinged ring hanger.
4.
Malleable iron split-ring hanger with eye socket.
5.
Adjustable steel clevis hanger. (MSS Type 1)
B.
Adjustable steel clevis hanger.
2.
Pipe roll with sockets.
3.
Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll.
1.
September 23, 2015
Uninsulated pipes 2-1/2 inch and larger:
1.
C.
Insulated pipe- Hot water piping:
2 inch and smaller pipes:
a. Adjustable steel clevis with galvanized sheet metal shield.
2.
2-1/2 inch and larger pipes:
a. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering protection saddle.
b. Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection saddle.
3.
D.
1.
Hangers must be sized for outside diameter of pipe insulation.
Insulated pipe- Cold water piping:
2.
6 inch and larger pipes:
a. Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection saddle.
b. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering protection saddle.
3.
E.
1.
F.
Pipe Clamps
When flexibility in the hanger assembly is required due to horizontal movement, use pipe
clamps with weldless eye nuts. For insulated lines use double bolted pipe clamps.
Multiple or Trapeze Hanger
1.
Trapeze hangers shall be constructed from 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A1011 SS Grade
33 structural steel channel, 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch minimum or stronger as required.
2.
Mount pipes to trapeze with 2 piece pipe straps sized for outside diameter of pipe.
G.
For pipes subjected to axial movement:
1.
Strut mounted roller support. Use pipe protection shield or saddles on insulated lines.
2.
Strut mounted pipe guide.
H.
1.
Wall Supports
Pipes 4 inch and smaller:
a. Carbon steel hook.
b. Carbon steel J-hanger.
2.
PLUMBING
Pipes larger than 4 inch:
220001- 9
September 23, 2015
a. Welded strut bracket and pipe straps.
b. Welded steel brackets, with roller chair or adjustable steel yoke pipe roll.
pipe protection shield or saddles on insulated lines.
I.
Use
Floor Supports
1.
Hot piping under 6 inch and all cold piping:
a. Carbon steel adjustable pipe saddle and nipple attached to steel base stand sized
for pipe elevation. Pipe saddle shall be screwed or welded to appropriate base
stand.
J.
Vertical Supports
1.
K.
Steel riser clamp sized to fit outside diameter of pipe.
Copper Tubing Supports
1.
Hangers shall be sized to fit copper tubing outside diameters.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
For supporting vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps,.
7.
For supporting copper tube to strut use epoxy painted pipe straps sized for copper tubing
or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps.
L.
1.
M.
1.
N.
1.
Insulation Shields:
18 gage galvanized steel shield over insulation to cover the lower 180 degree of pipe,
minimum 12 inches long centered on pipe support.
Pipe Protection Saddles
Pipe protection saddles shall be formed from carbon steel, 1/8 inch minimum thickness,
sized for insulation thickness. Saddles for pipe sizes greater than 12 inch shall have a
center support rib.
Hanger Finishes
Indoor Finishes
a. Hangers and clamps for support of bare copper piping shall be coated with copper
colored epoxy paint. Additional PVC coating of the epoxy painted hanger shall
be used where necessary.
b. Hangers for other than bare copper pipe shall be zinc plated in accordance with
ASTM B633.
c. Strut channels shall be pre-galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 SS Grade
33 G90 or have an electro-deposited green epoxy finish.
2.
Outdoor and Corrosive Area Finishes
a. Hangers and strut located outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in
accordance with ASTM A123. All hanger hardware shall be hot dip galvanized or
stainless steel. Zinc plated hardware is not acceptable for outdoor use.
PLUMBING
220001- 10
2.8
2.9
September 23, 2015
CLEANOUT
A.
Cleanouts shall be provided in soil and waste piping at change in directions, at the foot of
stacks where required by inspecting authorities and at other points so that lines will be
readily accessible for cleaning or rodding out. Cleanouts shall suit construction in which
they are to be installed.
B.
Maximum horizontal distance between cleanouts in piping 4 inches in diameter and smaller
shall be not more than 50 feet apart.
C.
Cleanouts shall be same size as pipe installed, up to 4 inches in diameter. For piping larger
than 4 inches in diameter, cleanouts shall be not less than 4 inches in diameter.
D.
Bodies of cleanout ferrules in bell and spigot piping shall be standard pipe sizes
conforming in thickness to that required for pipe and fittings, and shall extend not less than
3/4 inch above hub of pipe.
1.
Cleanout plug shall be of cast brass and shall be provided with raised nut 3/4 inch high.
2.
Cleanouts in copper waste piping shall be soldered brass cleanout fittings with extra
heavy brass screw plugs of same size at line.
3.
Cleanouts in threaded waste piping shall be cast iron, drainage T pattern, 90 degree
branch fitting with extra heavy brass screw plugs of same size as pipe.
E.
Cleanouts shall be installed so that cleanout opens in direction of flow of drainage line
served or at right angles thereto.
F.
Cleanout plug shall be kept free of dirt and construction materials and shall not be covered
with cement, plaster, or other permanent finishing materials.
G.
Floor cleanouts in finished areas shall be cast iron body and frame with round adjustable
scoriated secured nickel bronze top, J. R. Smith No. 4020 or approved equal.
H.
Floor cleanouts in unfinished areas shall be cast iron body and frame with round adjustable
scoriated secured cast iron top, J. R. Smith No. 4220 or approved equal
INSULATION
A.
All pipes shall be insulated in accordance with MA stretch Code requirements and as
follows.
B.
Fiberglass Insulation shall be: Fibrous glass insulation with factory-applied fire retardant
vapor barrier jacket with K factor of 0.27 at 75 degrees F mean temperature; by OwensCorning, Certain-Teed, Manville or approved equal, unless otherwise specified.
C.
Insulation, jackets and adhesives shall be flame retardant. Fire and smoke Hazard ratings
to be as tested under procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723, not exceeding:
Flame Spread
25
Smoke Developed
50
MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULE
APPLICATION
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE
< 1”
1” to 1-½”
1-½” to <4”
4” to 8”
Domestic Cold Water
½"
½"
½"
½"
Domestic Hot Water Supply
1”
1”
1”
1"
PLUMBING
220001- 11
Fittings shall be insulated by using pre-formed insulation fittings.
E.
All insulation to include continuous vapor barrier.
F.
Insulation and vapor barrier on piping which passes through walls or partitions shall pass
continuously through sleeve, except that piping between floors and through fire walls or
smoke partitions shall have space allowed for application of approved packing between
sleeves and piping, to provide firestop as required by NFPA. Seal ends to provide
continuous vapor barrier where insulation is interrupted.
G.
Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
H.
Install materials only after piping has been tested and approved.
I.
Use glues and tapes that are from the same manufacturer as the insulation itself. Install per
manufacturers recommendations. Provide separate submittal for these products.
J.
In exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. Seal to be
continuous.
K.
Insulate all fittings, valves, and unions.
L.
Pipe hangers shall be external to all pipe insulation.
M.
Insulation by a firm regularly specializing in this work and employing workers particularly
skilled therein shall install insulation.
No covering applied by plumber's helpers will be acceptable.
POTABLE WATER VALVES
A.
Isolation valves (2” and smaller)
1.
Provide bronze two-piece, ¼ turn, full port ball valve with chrome-plated brass ball,
blowout proof stem and lever handle.
2.
Valve shall have PTFE seats and stem packing seal.
3.
Rated for 600 PSIG WOG service.
4.
Provide extended valve stems where insulation thickness is greater than 1” or where
handle movement is impeded by insulation.
5.
As manufactured by Apollo, Watts, Jenkins or approved equal.
B.
2.11
September 23, 2015
D.
1.
2.10
Fixture stop valves
1.
Provide ¼ turn, chrome plated brass ball valve fixture stop valves.
2.
Valve shall have brass ball and PTFE seats.
3.
Provide angle or straight pattern to best match rough plumbing
4.
Valve shall be as manufactured by Brass Craft, Chicago, McGuire or approved equal.
JOINTING COMPOUNDS
A.
Provide pipe dope, Teflon tape, wax rings, neoprene gaskets and other jointing compounds
as required by best standard practice and only on service as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Work shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations with regard to use of putties,
jointing compounds or both in installing plumbing fixtures and trim.
PLUMBING
220001- 12
2.12
September 23, 2015
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Provide identification of all new plumbing systems. Colors per ANSI/ASME A13.1 unless
otherwise specified.
B.
Equipment: Numerically label multiple pieces of equipment (i.e., pumps, etc.) with plastic
nameplates or stencil painting
C.
Valves: Identify major valves in main and branch piping and risers with embossed brass
tags. Provide matching valve chart.
D.
Piping: Identify piping with plastic tape markers.
1.
Identify service, and flow direction.
2.
Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
3.
Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops,
adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure and at
each obstruction.
E.
2.13
Provide valve chart and schedule for inclusion in three-ring project manual.
DUPLEX SEWAGE EJECTOR
A.
Provide complete sewage ejector system connected to waste systems intended to lift waste
up and to drain into a gravity drain systems.
1.
Include all piping connections for waste and vent. Match piping type with the rest of the
connecting system piping.
2.
Provide approved connections.
3.
Provide isolation and check valves for each discharge line.
B.
Coordinate requirements with all trades
1.
Electrical to provide line voltage power.
2.
GC to provide opening in the floor and concrete work to stabilize and secure the basin
and provide for finished floor requirements.
C.
Provide duplex pump system & control.
1.
Provide two sewage ejector pumps per equipment schedule each with its own float
switch.
2.
Provide electric alternator that will automatically alternate the pump operation and sense
pump failure providing alarm for any one pump failure and/or high level. Provide
controller equivalent to Zoeller 10-0469; use NEMA-1 control enclosure for indoor
application and for outdoor applications provide NEMA-4x control enclosure. Provide
variable level control switch equal to Zoeller 10-0225 used as control activator; provide 3
float system.
D.
Provide collection basin.
1.
Basin shall be manufactured of fiberglass with cast iron piping connections.
2.
Basin cover shall steel, removable and equipped with air tight gasketing and piping
connections.
E.
PLUMBING
Provide high level alarm system.
220001- 13
September 23, 2015
1.
Provide high level alarm with remote audio/visual enunciator. Locate enunciator per
Owners direction with maximum wire run length at 100 feet.
2.
Plumbing contractor to provide low voltage alarm and transformer if required
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1
SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Coordination: Cooperate and coordinate with other trades in executing work of this section
as described hereunder.
1.
Perform work so that progress of entire project including work of other trades whether
involved in work of this or other Sections shall not be interfered with or delayed.
2.
Provide information as requested on items furnished under this Section, which shall be
installed under other Sections.
3.
Obtain detailed information from manufacturers of equipment to be provided under this
Section as to proper methods of installation.
4.
Obtain final roughing dimensions or other information as needed for complete
installation of all items furnished under other Sections or by Owner.
5.
Keep fully informed as to shape, size and position of openings required for material or
equipment to be provided under this and other Sections.
a. Give full information so that openings required by work of this Section may be
coordinated with other work and other openings may be provided for in advance.
b. In case of failure to provide necessary and sufficient information in proper time,
trade involved will be required to do cutting and patching or have same done, at
own expense and to full satisfaction of Engineer.
6.
Notify Engineer of location and extent of existing piping and equipment, which interferes
with new construction.
a. In coordination with and with approval of Engineer, relocate such piping and
equipment to permit new work to be provided as required by Contract Documents.
b. With approval of Engineer, remove non-functioning or abandoned piping and
equipment.
c. If requested by Engineer, remove non-functioning or abandoned piping and
equipment, which does not interfere with new work.
d. Dispose of or store items as requested by Engineer.
B.
Maintenance of equipment and systems: Provide maintenance for Plumbing equipment and
systems until final acceptance by the Engineer and the Owner, and take such measures as
necessary to ensure adequate protection of equipment and material during delivery, storage,
installation and shutdown conditions.
1.
This responsibility shall include provisions required to meet conditions incidental to
delays pending final test of systems and equipment under seasonal conditions.
2.
Use of Premises: Use of premises shall be restricted as directed by the Engineer and the
Owner and as required below.
3.
As required, during progress of work, remove and properly dispose of resultant dirt and
debris, and keep premises reasonably clean.
220001- 14
PLUMBING
September 23, 2015
a. Upon completion of work, remove equipment and unused material provided for
work, and put building and premises in neat and clean condition, and do cleaning
and washing required to provide acceptable appearance and operation of
equipment, to satisfaction of Engineer, and as specified in General Conditions.
4.
Conduct work so as not to interfere with functioning of existing sewers and water mains.
a. Extreme care shall be observed to prevent debris from entering piping. Confer
with Engineer as to disruption of water service or other utilities due to testing or
connection of new work to existing.
C.
1.
Do not change representative without prior notification to Engineer.
D.
Inspections by Engineer: Undertaking of periodic inspections by Engineer, Engineer, or
designated agent shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, nor make
either responsible for providing safe place for performance of work of various trades or
suppliers, or for visitors or occupants, or make either responsible for omission of safety
devices called for by codes, ordinances, or specifications of manufacturer of equipment
supplied.
E.
Surveys and Measurements
1.
Base measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on reference points established by
Contractor and be responsible for correct laying out of work.
2.
In event of discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify
Engineer in writing and do not proceed with work until written instructions have been
issued by Engineer.
F.
3.2
Superintendence: Keep superintendent or foreman on site during progress of work.
Instructions given to such representative by Engineer shall be binding of Contractor.
Firestopping and proofing:
1.
Coordinate the work of this section with fire stopping provided by others for all new
penetrations at fire rated partitions.
2.
Fire stopping for all new penetrations at fire-rated partitions made by this contractor shall
be provided by the GC.
3.
Provide a marked plan set for reference by the GC indicating all penetrations that require
fire stopping.
4.
Patching and repairing of spray fireproofing due to cutting or damaging to fireproofing
during course of work specified under this Section shall be performed by installer of
fireproofing and paid for by trade responsible for damage and shall not constitute grounds
for an extra to Owner.
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A.
Work shall be executed in workmanlike manner and shall present neat and mechanical
appearance when completed.
1.
Piping shall run concealed except in unfinished basement, mechanical rooms and areas
where no finished ceiling exists.
2.
Material and equipment shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommended best
practice such that completed installation shall operate safely and without leakage, undue
wear, noise, vibration, corrosion, or water hammer.
PLUMBING
220001- 15
3.
September 23, 2015
Use of dielectric couplings between dissimilar materials is mandatory. Work shall be
properly and effectively protected, and pipe openings shall be temporarily closed to
prevent obstruction and damage prior to completion.
B.
Fully insure workmen and work as required by law and General Conditions.
C.
Except as otherwise noted, material or equipment mentioned in these Specifications or on
Drawings shall be furnished new.
1.
Provide supplies, appliances and connections necessary for complete and operational
installation.
2.
Equipment shall be provided with components required or recommended by OSHA and
applicable NFPA documents, and shall be UL approved where applicable.
3.
Protection facilities including expanded metal cloth guards over belt drives and couplings
shall be provided in conformance with OSHA standards and all other applicable
regulations.
D.
Notwithstanding any reference in Specifications or on Drawings to material or piece of
equipment by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall be interpreted as
establishing type, function, and standard of quality desired and shall not be construed as
limiting competition.
E.
Finish of materials, components and equipment shall not be less than industry good
practice.
1.
F.
3.3
When material or equipment is visible or subject to corrosive or atmospheric conditions,
finish shall be as approved by Engineer.
Owner shall not be responsible for material and equipment prior to testing and acceptance.
BULLETINS, MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Obtain at time of purchase of equipment, three copies of operation, replacement and
maintenance manuals for all items.
1.
Assemble literature in coordinated manuals.
2.
In addition to literature listed above manual shall contain the following:
a. Names and addresses of manufacturers and local representatives who stock or
furnish repair parts for items or equipment.
b. Valve charts
c. Copies of all extended warranties filled out for the owner.
d. Testing reports.
B.
1.
C.
Furnish three copies of manuals to Engineer for approval and distribution to Owner.
Deliver manuals no less than 30 days prior to acceptance of equipment to permit Owner's
personnel to become familiar with equipment and operation prior to acceptance.
Operating instructions: Upon completion of installation or when Owner accepts portions of
building and equipment for operational use, instruct Owner's operating personnel in any or
all parts of various systems.
1.
Make adjustments under actual operating condition.
2.
Provide a minimum of three separate training sessions.
PLUMBING
220001- 16
3.4
3.5
September 23, 2015
CONTINUITY OF SERVICES
A.
Do not interrupt water, gas, phone, or electrical services without Owner's approval.
B.
Schedule interruptions in advance, according to Owner's instructions. Submit, in writing,
with request for interruption, methods proposed to minimize the length of interruption.
C.
Interruptions shall be scheduled at such times of the day and work so that they have
minimal impact on Owner's operations.
A.
Hangers shall be arranged to maintain the required grading and pitch of piping, to prevent
vibrations, and to provide free, guided, expansion and contraction between anchors.
B.
Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
C.
Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
D.
Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers. Trapeze hangers shall be spaced according to the smallest pipe size, or
install intermediate supports according to schedule in this section.
E.
Install hangers to provide minimum ½ inch space between finished covering and adjacent
work.
F.
Piping shall be supported at no greater than the following intervals::
PIPE MATERIAL/SIZE
Copper (1-1/4” or less)
Copper (1-1/2” or greater)
Cast Iron
3.6
HORIZONTAL SPACING VERTICAL SPACING
6'-0"
At each story (10’-0”
max)
10'-0"
At each story (10’-0”
max)
5'-0"
At base and each floor
(15’-0” max)
G.
Provide means of preventing dissimilar metal contact such as plastic coated hangers, copper
colored epoxy paint, or non adhesive isolation. Galvanized felt isolators sized for copper
tubing may also be used.
H.
Do not support piping from other pipes, ductwork or other equipment that is not building
structure
I.
ACCESS AND ACCESS PANELS
A.
1.
B.
1.
PLUMBING
Perform work required so as to provide proper access to material or equipment, which may
need inspection, replacement, repair or service.
If proper access cannot be provided, confer with Engineer as to best method of approach
to minimize effect of reduced access, which may result.
Supply access panels for installation under other Sections where shut-off valves, control
valves, check valves, or any items requiring access which are installed under this Section
and concealed in floor, wall, furred space or above the ceiling.
Access panels shall have same fire rating classification as surface penetrated.
220001- 17
3.7
Lay out chases, openings and partitions before installation to permit coordinated
installation. Coordinate with other trades.
1.
Sleeves and inserts shall be set in forms before concrete is poured.
2.
Sleeves set in floors or fire walls but not used in final installation shall be filled with
concrete or grout flush with floor or wall to ensure proper fire stop.
3.
Necessary sleeves in floors or fire walls not provided because of omission or change may
be core drilled except where watertight sleeves are required.
B.
Provide sleeves for piping between floors and through fire walls or smoke partitions.
Provide approved packing between sleeves and piping to provide fire stop.
1.
Piping passing through slab on grade shall not require sleeves.
2.
Sleeves shall be 12 gauge or heavier steel, first pipe size or larger than outside diameter
of pipe to be sleeved.
C.
Sleeves through outside walls shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe with 150 pound black
steel slip-on welding flanges, welded at center of sleeve, painted with one coat of
bitumastic paint inside and outside.
1.
Space between sleeve and pipe shall be packed with oakum to within two inches of each
wall face.
2.
Remaining space shall be packed and made watertight with waterproof mastic.
D.
Watertight sleeves through floors shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe, set no less than one
inch above finished floor surfaces.
E.
Inserts shall be iron or steel of type to receive machine bolt head or nut after installation.
1.
F.
1.
Inserts shall permit adjustment of bolt in one horizontal direction and shall develop
strength of bolt when installed in properly cured concrete.
Sleeves under footings.
Sleeves shall be a minimum of 6’-0” long. Sleeves shall extend 2’-0” beyond barring
area of footing.
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
1.
3.9
September 23, 2015
SLEEVES, PLATES, AND INSERTS
A.
3.8
Escutcheons shall be installed around exposed pipe passing through finished floor, wall,
ceiling, or cabinet.
Escutcheons shall be heavy cast brass, chromium-plated, unless otherwise noted,
adjustable, and shall be of sufficient outside diameter to cover sleeve opening and shall
fit snugly around pipe.
JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS
A.
Joints and connections shall be permanent and shall be gas- and water-tight. Jointing shall
be types specified for service indicated.
1.
Joints and connections shall meet requirements of manufacturers best recommended
practice.
2.
Provide isolation valves for all fixtures and appliances whether shown on drawings or not
3.
All transitions between different piping materials shall be made using approved adapters.
PLUMBING
220001- 18
4.
3.10
1.
B.
Adapters for transitions between two types of piping materials shall be manufactured for
purpose intended.
Water supply piping shall be run as indicated on Drawings, including mains and supplies to
indicated equipment.
Piping shall be pitched at least 1 inch in 40 feet so that it can be drained completely at
low points with drain valves which shall be provided wherever necessary.
Shut-off and control valves on main distribution and branch lines shall be located for easy
access and operation.
INTERIOR SANITARY WASTE, AND VENT PIPING
A.
1.
3.12
September 23, 2015
INTERIOR WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
A.
3.11
Waste, drainage and vent lines shown in building shall be installed as indicated on
Drawings; vents shall extend through roof and be increased to 3 inches minimum size.
Piping shall be assembled and installed without undue strains and stresses, and provision
shall be made for expansion, contraction, and structural settlement.
B.
Interior horizontal sanitary waste and storm drainage piping shall be installed in practical
alignment at uniform grade of 1/8 inch per foot minimum but 1/4 inch per foot where
possible, and as shown on Drawings.
C.
Protect piping against breakage when passing under or through wall by means of pipe
sleeves.
TESTING, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING
A.
1.
Scope
Provide testing, balancing, and adjusting of plumbing systems as shown on Drawings, as
specified herein and as required by authorities having jurisdiction, including Owner and
Engineer.
a. Perform tests recommended by manufacturers of materials and equipment; this
requirement may be waived by Engineer.
2.
Testing, balancing and adjusting shall in no way relieve guarantee requirements.
3.
Test shall be conducted as part of Work of this Section and shall include labor by
qualified personnel, equipment, apparatus and services required to perform tests.
4.
Provide letter to engineer stating what system has been tested, a brief description of
testing procedure and results of tests.
B.
Prior to date of acceptance, furnish Engineer with certificates of testing and inspection for
Plumbing systems indicating approval of authorities having jurisdiction and conformance
with requirements of Contract Documents.
C.
General
1.
Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms, and test equipment for review prior to
testing.
2.
Notify Engineer and authorities involved at least 48 hours prior to testing and inspection.
3.
Do not paint, cover or conceal work prior to testing, inspecting and obtaining approval;
this includes backfilling and application of insulation.
PLUMBING
220001- 19
4.
D.
September 23, 2015
Costs of repairs and restoration of work of other trades and existing building surfaces or
material damaged during cleaning or testing shall be borne by trade performing such
cleaning or testing.
No tests shall be started until systems have been cleaned as described under paragraph
"CLEANING".
1.
Provide temporary piping and connections for testing, flushing, or draining systems to be
tested.
2.
Leaks, damage or defects discovered or resulting from tests shall be repaired or replaced
to like-new condition.
a. Leaking pipe joints, fittings, fixtures, etc. shall be removed and replaced with
acceptable materials.
3.
Piping must be absolutely tight before it will be accepted and joints shall be made tight
without caulking.
a. Tests shall be continued until systems operate without adjustments and repair to
equipment or piping.
4.
Provide testing instruments, force pumps, gauges, equipment and labor necessary to
properly conduct tests.
a. Instruments used for testing and balancing shall have been calibrated within six
months prior to balancing.
b. Instrument calibration shall be certified.
E.
Waste & Vent Piping
1.
Final test shall be made after vertical and horizontal pipes and roughing-in have been run
and before sewer or fixture connection is made.
2.
After soils, wastes, and storm lines, etc. have been installed, outlets shall be temporarily
plugged.
3.
Fill pipes with water to top of vertical lines and allow to remain so filled for twenty-four
hours.
4.
Retesting after leaks are repaired shall be at no additional cost.
F.
Pressurized Piping Systems
1.
Leak tests shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI B31.9 "Building Service Piping"
and as specified herein.
2.
Before piping of various systems has been covered or furred-in, piping systems shall be
tested for 24 hours under hydrostatic pressure 1½ times system working pressures but not
greater than 300 psig.
3.
Tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer and pronounced satisfactory before pressure is
removed or any water drained off.
4.
Equipment shall be valved off or removed during test if equipment pressure rating is less
than test pressure.
5.
Retesting after leaks are repaired shall be done at no additional cost.
G.
1.
PLUMBING
DHW system balancing
Adjust thermostatic tempering valves at public lavatories.
220001- 20
3.13
2.
Adjust aquastat at water heater.
3.
Provide testing as required by local authority having jurisdiction.
September 23, 2015
CLEANING
A.
Upon completion of work but prior to final system testing, all parts of installation shall be
thoroughly cleaned.
1.
Fixtures, equipment, pipe, valves, and fittings shall be completely cleaned of grease,
metal cuttings, dirt, etc.
2.
Protective covers shall be removed and fixtures (including lavatories, water closets, etc.)
shall be cleaned and ready for use.
B.
3.14
Stoppage, discoloration or damage to parts of building, finish or furnishings due to failure
to properly clean piping system shall be repaired by trade responsible at no cost to Owner.
PIPE CLEANING AND STERILIZATION
A.
Domestic water piping shall be thoroughly flushed and then treated and sterilized with
liquid chlorine gas, water solution, or direct chlorine gas placed in upstream side in
amounts to give dosage of 50 ppm chlorine calculated on volume of water piping will
contain.
1.
Minimum residual of 5-ppm chlorine shall remain in entire system for minimum of 24
hours.
2.
After sterilizing, flush lines thoroughly. In accordance with EPA, National Primary
Drinking Water Regulations, concentration of chlorine shall not exceed 4 mg/L
Maximum Residual Disinfectant Level (MRDL).
B.
1.
Foregoing shall be considered minimum requirements.
Sterilization shall be in strict accordance with City Water Department requirements.
C.
Under no circumstances shall any portion of domestic water system be used until it has
been properly sterilized and certified same by City Water Department.
D.
Provide temporary piping and connections required for cleaning, testing, flushing, draining
of systems.
E.
Replace any filters prior to final inspection and testing.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING
220001- 21
September 23, 2015
SECTION 23.00.00
HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
(Filed Sub-Bid)
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1
1.2
A.
Include the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1, General Requirements, as
part of this Section.
B.
Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements that affect work under
this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C.
Coordinate work of this Section with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by, this
contract.
FILED SUB
A.
Bidding procedures shall be in accordance with the latest edition of Massachusetts General
(1984) and Chapter 30B, Uniform Procurement Act (1990). Time and place for submission
of sub-bids is given in Advertisement for Bids.
B.
Sub-Bids for work under this section shall be for complete work and shall be filed in a
sealed envelope with Awarding Authority, at time and place specified in Advertisement for
Bids. Following shall appear on face of envelope:
PROJECT NAME
SECTION 230001- Mechanical
C.
Every sub-bid submitted for work under this section shall be on forms furnished by
Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of General Laws, and
specified in Advertisement for Bids.
D.
Sub-bids filed with Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by bid deposits in the form
of a bid bond, cash, certified check, or a treasurer's or cashier's check, issued by a
responsible bank or trust company, payable to the awarding authority in compliance with
Chapter 149, Section 44B. Amount of bid deposit shall be 5 percent of value of bid.
E.
Work to be done under this section is shown on the following drawings. : M-001, M-002,
M101, M102, M201, & M202
1.3
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Included in this Section is the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and accessories
required to provide a complete installation of the work described herein and on the
Drawings. Build the work of other trades into the work of this Section as required.
HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
230001- 1
1.4
September 23, 2015
B.
Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees and backcharges and obtain
necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction, as required to perform work in
accordance with all legal requirements and with Specifications, Drawings, Addenda, all of
which are part of Contract Documents.
C.
The work under this Section consists of
1.
Ducted Fan Coils
2.
Energy Recovery Ventilator (ERV)
3.
Air Filters
4.
Exhaust Fans
5.
Hydronic Coils
6.
Panel Radiators
7.
Pumps
8.
Ductwork
9.
Piping and Fittings
10.
Valves and Unions
11.
Piping Accessories
12.
Hydronic Specialties
13.
Vibration Isolation
14.
Insulation
15.
16.
Sleeves
17.
Test and Balance for all Mechanical systems
18.
Supply Access Panels
19.
Mechanical Identification
20.
Automatic Temperature Controls
21.
Provide Close-Out procedures per Division 1.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM NARRATIVE
A.
The following narrative describes the Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning
(Mechanical) systems and their function. The intent of this narrative is to comply with the
requirements of Section 1301.1.1 of the Massachusetts State Building Code 780 CMR (7th
Edition), as amended to adopt the International Energy Conservation Code (IECC 2009),
Section 104.2 Information on Construction Documents.
B.
Design Intent
1.
Heating:
a. Existing gas fired, condensing boilers provide heating for the building. New
heating for the areas of this renovation shall connect to this existing hydroinic
system.
230001- 2
September 23, 2015
b. Radiators provide heating to basement areas. Non-electric zone valves provide
independent, non-programmable control to each respective area.
c. Fan coil unit with a hydronic coil provides heating to the program space.
d. A hydronic coil provides heating of outside air after the ERV.
2.
Ventilating: A Energy Recovery Ventilator (ERV) provides outside air to support
occupancy within the basement space. The ERV also functions to provide bathroom
exhaust and general exhaust from storage and utility areas.
3.
Cooling:
a. None. (N/A)
4.
C.
Controls: Controls consist of electronic, programmable controls.
Basis of Design
1.
This project involves renovation of a community rooms within the basement of an
existing building located with Climate Zone #5a, (Lincoln, Massachusetts)
2.
The following Thermal Design Criteria were used to calculate the capacities and
parameters for the building as required by Section 302 of the IECC.
a. Interior Design Conditions
1)
Heating: 72 deg. F
2)
Cooling: N/A
b. Outdoor Design Conditions
3.
1)
Heating: 7 deg. F winter
2)
Cooling: N/A
System Intent: The intent of the heating system is to satisfy the minimum indoor
temperature requirements as defined by 105 CMR, Section 410.
a. Habitable rooms shall maintain least 68°F between 7:00 A.M. and 11:00 P.M. and
at least 64°F between 11:01 P.M. and 6:59 A.M. every day, other than during the
period from June15th to September 15th.
b. The indoor temperature shall be met at a height of five feet above floor level on a
wall any point more than five feet from the exterior wall
D.
Sequence of Operations and Interactions
1.
AHU
2.
ERV
3.
Bath exhaust fans
4.
Panel Radiators
5.
Basement Zone Pump
E.
1.
F.
Systems and Equipment Capacities
Refer to schedules on the associated drawings for equipment capacities.
Testing
230001- 3
1.
G.
1.
H.
1.
I.
1.5
Operation Manuals and Maintenance Manuals
When the building is completed and ready for occupancy, the contractor shall provide
operation manuals and maintenance manuals as required by the contract documents.
Record Drawings and Control Documents
When the building is completed and ready for occupancy, the contractor shall provide
Record Drawings and Test and Balance reports as required by the contract documents.
All maintenance recommended by the various equipment manufacturers.
2.
Each fan coil, air handler, and heat exchanger should be inspected twice per year, filters
changed and the condensate drain pan cleaned with a bleach solution at the end of the
cooling season (late fall).
RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
The following work is not included in this Section and will be performed under other
Sections:
Electrical, Section 260001
ITEMS SUPPLIED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION BY THIS
SECTION
A.
1.8
The contractor shall provide complete testing and balancing for all new air systems,
hydronic systems installed by this project.
1.
1.
1.7
September 23, 2015
Future Maintenance: Recommended maintenance includes but is not limited to:
A.
1.6
None.
ITEMS SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SECTION FOR INSTALLATION BY OTHER
SECTIONS
A.
Access Panels
B.
Disconnects
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in strict accordance with rules, regulations, standards, codes, ordinances, and
laws of local, state, and Federal governments, and other authorities having lawful
jurisdiction, and be responsible for compliance therewith. Such authorities include but are
not limited to the following:
1.
Local and state building, plumbing, Mechanical, electrical, fire, and health department
and public safety codes.
2.
International Energy Conservation Code (IECC 2009)
3.
The International Mechanical Code (IMC 2009)
4.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
5.
American Insurance Association (A.I.A.)
6.
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
7.
Factory Mutual Association (FM).
8.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA).
230001- 4
9.
1.9
September 23, 2015
Material and equipment shall be Underwriter's Laboratory (UL), ASME and AGA
approved, as applicable, for intended service.
B.
When two or more codes, regulations, etc. conflict with each other or with Contract
Documents, the more severe requirement shall govern conduct of work. The Engineer may
relax this requirement at his sole discretion when such relaxation does not violate ruling of
any authority having jurisdiction. Approval for such relaxation must be obtained in
writing.
C.
Most recent editions of applicable specifications and publications of the following
organizations form part of the Contract Documents.
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
2.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
3.
National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
4.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
5.
American Society for Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE).
6.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA).
7.
National Insulation Manufacturers Association (NIMA).
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division-1
Specification Sections.
B.
Material and equipment requiring Shop Drawings or Product Data submittal shall include
but shall not be limited to:
1.
Ducted Fan Coils
2.
Energy Recovery Ventilator (ERV)
3.
Air Filters
4.
Exhaust Fans
5.
Hydronic Coils
6.
Panel Radiators
7.
Pumps
8.
Ductwork
9.
Piping and Fittings
10.
Valves and Unions
11.
Piping Accessories
12.
Hydronic Specialties
13.
Vibration Isolation
14.
Insulation
15.
16.
Sleeves
230001- 5
17.
Test and Balance for all Mechanical systems
18.
Access Panels
19.
Mechanical Identification
C.
1.
September 23, 2015
Automatic Temperature Control System Submittal: The following items shall be included
in the automatic temperature controls submittal. Controls system shall be submitted as a
single package. All items indicated below shall be included in package or entire submittal
will be rejected.
Shop drawings: Shop drawings shall include the following:
a. Job specific wiring diagrams showing physical location of all wiring runs, ladder
diagrams of control logic, schematics showing terminal strips, controller diagram
formatted on 11” x17” sheets.
b. Riser diagram shall show schematically the entire system with all major
components identified.
c. Written sequence of control operation for each controlled device including control
interlocks to other systems. Sequences must be full and complete. (Resubmission
of engineer’s sequences will not be acceptable.)
2.
Products
a. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and
maintenance and repair data under applicable provisions.
3.
1.10
Prior to substantial completion contractor shall submit a summary list of initial set points
for all controllers.
D.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, service manuals, parts lists. under
applicable provisions.
E.
Submit a line item schedule of values for review prior to equipment submittals and for use
in the requisition process.
F.
Submit a schedule for the work in coordination with the GC's schedule.
G.
Submit blank test and balance report forms.
H.
At substantial completion prepare a set of as built drawings.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
The following paragraphs supplement Division 1.
B.
Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and maintenance and
repair data under applicable provisions.
C.
Provide O&M Manual, three copies in three ring binders marked on the cover with the
name of the project and the date of final completion. Each binder shall be divided with
labeled tab dividers for the following:
1.
Contact information for the installing contractor and the 24-hour service provider.
2.
Equipment Warranties,
3.
Approved submittals,
4.
Operations and maintenance manuals parts lists.
230001- 6
1.11
A.
The provisions under Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 are included.
B.
Guarantee work of this Section in writing for one year from date of Substantial Completion.
1.
Defects in materials, equipment, workmanship or installation that develop within this
period shall be repaired and replaced promptly to the Engineer's satisfaction at no cost to
owner.
2.
Written guarantee shall stipulate that damage caused in making necessary repairs and
replacements shall be corrected at no cost to Owner.
3.
The Mechanical systems will be considered substantially complete only after the system
has been fully tested and balanced and the engineer has signed off on the completed test
and balance forms.
1.
Guarantee shall include provision of 24-hour service for complete system during guarantee
period at no cost to Owner.
Choice of service organization shall be subject to Owner's approval.
D.
Submit written guarantee to the Engineer through Contractor before final payment.
E.
Transfer individual equipment and material guarantees, which are still in force to Owner at
end of guarantee period.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Work to be performed under this Section is shown on the accompanying drawings.
B.
Listing of drawings does not limit responsibility of determining full extent of work required
by Contract Documents.
1.
Refer to Architectural, Plumbing, Electrical, Structural and other drawings on file, as well
as other specifications sections, which indicate type of construction in which the work
must be installed.
2.
Locations shown on Drawings shall be checked against general and detailed drawings of
the construction proper.
C.
1.
D.
1.
1.13
September 23, 2015
GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
C.
1.12
Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangements of systems and work
included in Contract.
Drawings are not intended to specify or to show every offset, fitting, or component;
however, Contract Documents require components and materials, whether or not
indicated or specified, as necessary to make installations fully complete and operational.
Questions regarding drawings or specifications shall be addressed to the Engineer in
writing prior to Award of Contract.
Otherwise the Engineer's interpretation of meaning and intent of drawings and
specifications shall be final.
DISCREPANCIES IN DOCUMENTS
A.
1.
Where Drawings or Specifications indicate discrepancies or ambiguities, advise the
Engineer in writing before Award of Contract.
Otherwise, the Engineer's interpretation of documents shall be final; no additional
compensation shall be permitted due to discrepancies or ambiguities thus resolved.
230001- 7
B.
1.
C.
September 23, 2015
Where drawings or specifications do not coincide with recommendations of manufacturer
of material or piece of equipment, alert the Engineer in writing before installation of item in
question.
Otherwise, make changes in installation, as the Engineer requires without additional cost
to owner.
When specifications and drawings are in conflict with each other, or with Contract
Documents, the more severe (costly) requirement shall be provided as part of the base bid
work.
1.
The Engineer may relax this requirement at his sole discretion when such relaxation does
not violate ruling of any authority having jurisdiction.
2.
Approval for such relaxation must be obtained in writing.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1
ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR (ERV)
A.
Provide ERV meeting the capacity and performance as identified on the assoicated
drawings. Unit shall be a packaged static plate enthalpic-energy recovery ventilator.
B.
Units with integral blowers shall be listed under UL 1812 Standard for Ducted Air to Air
Heat Exchangers.
C.
The energy recovery cores shall be certified by ARI under its Standard 1060 for Energy.
Recovery Ventilators. ARI published certifications shall confirm manufacturers published
performance for airflow, static pressure, temperature and total effectiveness, purge air
(OACF) and exhaust air leakage (EATR). Products that are not currently ARI Certified will
not be accepted. Manufacturer shall be able to provide evidence of independent testing of
the core by Underwriters Laboratory (UL), verifying a maximum flame spread index (FSI)
of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index (SDI) of 50 thereby meeting NFPA 90A and
NFPA 90B requirements for materials in a compartment handling air intended for
circulation through a duct system. The method of test shall be UL Standard 723.
D.
The Heat Exchanger core shall be warranted to be free of manufacturing defects and to
retain its functional characteristics, under circumstances of normal use, for a period of ten
years from the date of purchase. Balance of Unit shall be warranted to be free of
manufacturing defects and to retain its functional characteristics, under circumstances of
normal use, for a period of two years from the date of purchase.
E.
Unit shall be capable of transferring both sensible and latent energy between air streams.
Latent energy transfer shall be accomplished by direct water vapor transfer from one air
stream to the other, without exposing transfer media in succeeding cycles directly to the
exhaust air and then to the fresh air.
F.
Energy-transfer element shall perform without condensing or frosting under normal
operating conditions (defined as outside temperatures above humidity below 40%). Occasional extreme conditions shall not affect the usual function or
performance of the element. No condensate drains will be allowed.
G.
Unit shall have the capacity to operate continuously without the need for bypass,
recirculation, preheaters, or defrost cycles under normal operating conditions.
230001- 8
2.2
September 23, 2015
H.
Water vapor transfer shall be through molecular transport by hydroscopic resin and shall
not be accomplished by “porous plate” mechanisms. Exhaust and fresh airstreams shall at
all times travel in separate passages, and airstreams shall not mix.
I.
Airflow through the energy exchange element shall be laminar, avoiding deposition of
particulates on the interior of the energy exchange plate material.
J.
Fixed-plate energy-exchange element. Energy-exchange module shall be of fixed-plate
cross-flow construction, with no moving parts. No condensate drain pans or drains shall be
allowed and unit shall be capable of operating in winter and summer conditions without
generating condensate.
K.
The unit case shall be constructed of galvanized, 20-gauge steel, with lapped corners.
1.
Flange components shall be provided suitable for connection of ductwork.
2.
Access doors shall provide easy access to blowers, energy transfer elements, and filters.
Panel shall be gasketed to provide air-tight seal.
3.
Case walls and doors shall be insulated with 1” FSK high-density board insulation,
eliminating the possibility of exposing the fresh air to glass fibers.
L.
30% efficient 2” nominal pleated, disposable filters shall protect energy-exchange element.
Provide spares as specified.
M.
Units with blowers shall have single-point power connection.
N.
Blower motors shall be thermally protected with automatic reset, or supplied with starters.
Motors shall be variable speed DC motors of the ECM type.
O.
Unit shall be as manufactured by Renewaire, Lennox, or Lossnay.
AIR HANDLING UNITS
A.
Provide, per drawing schedule, indoor mounted central station air-handling units designed
to provide specified performance requirements for ventilation, heating, cooling, filtration,
and distribution. Unit shall be assembled for draw-through application and shall be
arranged to discharge conditioned air horizontally or vertically as shown on the contract
drawings.
B.
Unit performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 430 for Central
Station Air-Handling Units.
C.
Unit shall be stored and handled in accordance with the unit manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Factory assembled, single-piece central station air-handler. Unit may consist of a fan and
coil section with a factory-installed chilled water coil, heating coil section, filter section,
mixing box or combination mixing box, and access section as indicated on the equipment
schedules.
E.
Unit Cabinet:
1.
Unit panels shall be constructed of milled galvanized steel. Casing panels shall be
removable for easy access to the unit.
2.
Hinged access doors shall be double wall with 1.5 lb. dual density fiberglass between
galvanized steel panels.
3.
Insulation for casing panels on unit shall be 1 in. minimum thickness dual-density
fiberglass insulation with a density of not less than nominal 1.5 lb. per cubic foot.
4.
Insulation shall be secured to casing with waterproof adhesive.
230001- 9
5.
F.
September 23, 2015
Sloped, self-draining condensate drain pans shall have double-wall construction with
threaded drain connection.
Fan Section:
1.
Fan sections shall be constructed of galvanized steel and have a formed channel base for
integral mounting of fan, motor, and casing panels. Fan scroll, wheel shaft, and bearings
are to be mounted on spring mounts to the air handling base, minimum one inch static
deflection.
2.
Each unit shall have one fan wheel and scroll only. Fans shall be double width, double
inlet type, with forward-curved blades. Wheels shall be bonderized steel painted with
baked enamel, or galvanized steel.
3.
Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft and shall be designed for continuous operation at
the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fan wheels and shafts shall be
selected to operate at least 25% below the first critical speed, and shall be statically and
dynamically balanced as an assembly.
4.
Fan shafts shall be solid steel, turned, ground, and polished.
5.
Fan bearings shall be self-aligning, pillow block regreasable ball type selected for an
average life of 200,000 hours at design operation conditions; per ANSI/AFBMA
Standard 9-1978.
6.
Fan motor shall be mounted within the fan section casing on slide rails having 2 adjusting
screws. Motor shall be NEMA Design B with sizes and electrical characteristics as
shown on the equipment schedule.
7.
Fan drive shall be designed for a 1.3 service factor and shall be factory mounted and
aligned. Belt drive shall be variable or fixed-pitch type.
G.
Coil Sections:
1.
All coils shall have mill galvanized steel casings. They shall be tested at 400 psig air
pressure while submerged in water. Coil performance shall be certified in accordance
with ARI Standard 410.
2.
Chilled water coils shall have aluminum plate fins with belled collars bonded to 1/2 in.
minimum OD copper tubes by Mechanical expansion. Coils shall have galvanized steel
casings and steel headers with threaded connections. Working pressure shall be 300 psig
promoting devices will be permitted inside the tubes. Headers shall have drain and vent
connections.
3.
Direct Expansion (DX) coils shall have rippled aluminum plate fins bonded to copper
tubes by Mechanical expansion. Coils shall have galvanized steel casing. Coils shall
have brass liquid distributors and sweat type copper suction connections. Coils shall be
fitted with a Thermal Expansion Valve(s) (TXV
4.
Hot water heating coils shall have aluminum plate fins with belled collars bonded to
copper tubes by Mechanical expansion. Coils shall have galvanized steel casings and
steel headers with threaded connections. Working pressures shall be 175 psig at 400
Headers shall have drain and vent connections.
5.
All water and refrigerant coils shall be factory tested for leakage at 400 psig air pressure
with coils submerged in water. After testing, direct-expansion coils shall be dehydrated
and charged with dry air.
230001- 10
2.3
2.4
September 23, 2015
H.
Filter Sections: Filter section shall be designed and constructed to house the specified type
of filter. Provide spares as specified.
I.
Special Features:
1.
Unit Cabinet: Air-dry paint finish on exterior of unit.
2.
Provide high efficiency motor.
3.
Supply motor controller/starter.
4.
Provide variable pitch drive where indicated.
5.
For base mounted units, provide welded angle iron base of sufficient height to permit
piping to travel beneath the unit.
6.
For base mounted units, provide ribbed neoprene and cork vibration isolation mounting
pads.
7.
For suspended units, provide unit strut suspension frame, ready rod, means of securing to
structure above and neoprene and spring vibration isolation mounting hardware.
8.
Connections to duct work shall be made with continuous flexible duct material.
HEATING COIL
A.
Heating coils shall have aluminum plate fins with belled collars bonded to copper tubes by
Mechanical expansion.
B.
Coils shall have galvanized steel casings.
C.
Working pressures shall be 175 psig at 400
connections.
D.
Coil shall have burst proof return bends or plugs and shall be guaranteed against freeze
damage by the manufacturer..
E.
Coils shall conform to ARI 410 Standard.
F.
Coils shall be as manufactured by USA coil & air or equivalent by Rahn Industries or
Super Radiator Coils.
AIR FILTERS
A.
Air handlers, fan coils, and heat exchanger supply air intakes shall each have a separate
filter section at the air inlet side.
B.
Filter housings shall either be integral to the manufactured unit or shall be fabricated of 18
gauge-galvanized steel reinforced with corner gussets and supports.
1.
Doors shall be fully gasketed and fitted with quick action positive pressure latches.
2.
Metal to metal interfaces shall be sealed with silicone compound.
3.
Filters shall be sealed by the use of extruded aluminum tracks combined with a woven
nylon pile seal.
4.
Housing to be constructed such that the filter elements are accessible from the access side
of the unit.
C.
Provide air filters for air handling equipment according the schedule below.
Air Handling
MERV Rating
Minimum Final
Remarks
230001- 11
Equipment
Fan Coil Units FCU’
ERV’s
2.6
2.7
September 23, 2015
Resistance (in wc)
0.6
0.6
2”, anti-microbial
2”, anti-microbial
1.
Filters shall be rated in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.2 Minimum Efficiency
Reporting Value (MERV).
2.
Filters shall be as manufactured by American Air Filter, 3M or Fiberbond.
D.
2.5
8
8
Replacement schedule:
1.
Just prior to occupancy, provide a new set of filters for all fan coils.
2.
In addition to the original filters and the set installed just prior to occupancy, provide two
full sets of disposable panel filters as extra for future maintenance purposes. Store at the
direction of the Owner's representative.
CEILING MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN
A.
Provide ceiling mounted exhaust fan performance identified in the equipment schedule on
the drawings.
B.
Unit shall be Energy Star rated and certified by the Home Ventilating Institute (HVI).
C.
Fan motor shall be totally enclosed, four pole condenser type, with integral thermal
protection, engineered to run continuously.
D.
Housing shall be galvanized steel with rustproof painted finish.
E.
Unit shall include ABS grille attached to housing with torsion springs.
F.
Unit shall be as manufactured by Panasonic.
MOTORIZED DAMPERS
A.
Dampers shall be opposed blade, gasketed, suitable for motorized operation.
B.
Dampers which provide an air barrier to separate the outside air from the building interior
or interior air systems shall have a leakage no greater than 3 cfm/ft2 at 1.0" w.g. when
tested in accordance with AMCA 500.
C.
Coordinate damper dimension with louver plenum and ductwork.
D.
Unit shall be as manufactured by Buckley or equivalent unit by Dayton or Carnes.
DAMPER MOTORS
A.
Provide damper motors (actuators) for all dampers installed under Section above.
B.
Open/closed spring return damper actuators shall be direct-coupled type which require no
crank arm and linkage and be capable of direct-mounting to the damper jack shaft.
C.
Actuators shall be capable of clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation.
D.
Actuators shall be protected from overload at all angles of rotation.
E.
Coordinate selection of actuators with the size of the damper they control.
F.
Actuators shall be UL listed and CSA certified., with a two year warranty.
G.
Actuators shall be as manufactured by Bellimo, or similar unit by Honeywell, Robertshaw,
or approved equal.
230001- 12
2.8
2.9
September 23, 2015
STEEL PANEL RADIATORS (BUDERUS STYLE)
A.
Provide panel radiator with fluted front panel, constructed of 0.049” steel with convection
tunnels welded on the water channels.
B.
Radiators shall be finished with white polyester-epoxy powder coating.
C.
Radiator shall have integral air bleeder and flow setter valves.
D.
Piping connections shall be located at the bottom of the radiator.
E.
Fittings exposed to view must be nickel or chrome plated as by Oventrop or equal. No
piping shall be run horizontally exposed below radiator. MC is responsible for roughing
F.
Provide dry fit up of one sample radiator for review prior to completing the rest.
G.
Mount to wall using factory approved mounting brackets.
H.
Radiators to be as manufactured by Buderus or approved equal by Myson or Biasi.
I.
Each radiator shall be equipped with a non-electric zone valve (NEZV) with adjustable
temperature sensing actuator.
J.
Accessories: For all radiators in public areas and stairways, provide tamper proof cover for
NEZVs that prohibit adjustment after the initial setting, provide submittal.
K.
Provide radiator valve for supply and return unless indicated otherwise. If indicated on
drawings or in schedules replace the radiator valve on the supply and return with H-pattern
bypass radiator valve. Provide escutcheon plates on both supply and return piping where it
penetrates the floor or wall.
VARIABLE SPEED PUMPS
A.
Provide speed-controlled, in-line, wet-rotor circulators meeting the performance identified
in the pump schedule on the drawings.
B.
Unit shall include an integrated frequency converter. Integral controller is programmed to
provide speed control and automatically adjusts for optimum flow.
C.
The pumps shall have the following features:
1.
The pump housing shall be of the in-line type and have a stainless steel neck ring to
minimize recirculation and increase pump efficiency.
2.
The impellers shall be of the radial type with curved blades. The impeller shall be secured
to the shaft by a split cone and nut.
3.
The suction and discharge flanges shall be tapped and drilled to allow gauge installation on
the pump.
4.
Pump Construction.
a. Pump housing: Cast iron EN-JL-1040 (35B-40B) or Stainless Steel 1.4408
(CF8M)
b. Impellers, rotor can: 304 Stainless Steel
c. Rotor cladding: 316 Stainless Steel
d. Shaft: 303 Stainless Steel
e. Thrust Bearing: Tungsten Carbide
230001- 13
f.
September 23, 2015
Axial thrust bearing: Carbon MY106
g. Journal: Tungsten Carbide
h. O-rings: EPDM
i.
D.
Integrated Variable Frequency drive Motor
1.
Each motor shall be 4- or 8-pole, synchronous, permanent-magnet (PM motor) and tested
with the pump as one unit by the same manufacturer.
2.
Each motor shall be of the Integrated Variable Frequency Drive design consisting of a
motor and a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) built and tested as one unit by the same
manufacturer.
3.
The stator housing shall be made of pressure die cast aluminum. The stator housing shall
have 12 drain holes to enable condensed water to escape.
4.
The motor shall be cooled by the pumped fluid.
5.
Motor shall be self ventilating. The stator housing shall have nickel plated brass
inspection screw.
6.
Minimum insulation class for the motors shall be Class F.
7.
The integrated VFD control shall utilize an energy optimization algorithm to minimize
energy consumption by reducing the factory-set setpoint and adjust to actual system
characteristics. This shall be accomplished without the need of any external sensors or
input.
E.
2.10
Bearing plate: 304 Stainless Steel
The terminal box shall be made of black composite material. Enclosure class shall be IP44.
Aluminum terminal boxes shall not be acceptable.
1.
The terminal box shall be able to connect directly to the mains without the need of an
external contactor.
2.
The terminal box shall be suitable to accept add-on modules.
F.
GeniBus module for communication between two pumps piped in parallel. The duty pump
shall operate when called, the standby pump will be off and exercised at a fixed frequency.
If the duty pump stops due to a fault the standby pump will automatically start.
G.
Operating panel and remote control for self diagnostics.
H.
The pump shaft shall be installed horizontally per manufacturer’s recommendations. The
terminal box shall be located as per manufacturer’s recommendations. The system shall be
vented out from a higher location form the pump. The required inlet pressure by the pump
shall be available at the pump inlet.
I.
Variable speed pumps shall be Magna series as manufactured by Grundfos, or equal.
PIPING AND FITTINGS
A.
Unless otherwise noted, all piping fittings, including nipples, shall be new material
absolutely perfect throughout, scale free, and of the best grade guaranteed full weight. All
steel pipe shall be as manufactured by National Tube Co., Youngstown Sheet & Tube Co.,
Bethlehem Steel Co.. Copper tubing shall be as manufactured by Bridgeport Brass,
American Brass, Revere Copper and Brass. The manufacturer’s name or brand shall be
rolled or stamped on each length of pipe and nipple. All piping shall conform to American
Standards Association “Code for Pressure Piping”
230001- 14
September 23, 2015
B.
All nipples and fittings shall be of the same material and thickness as the pipe which they
are used, except as otherwise noted and/or where screwed fitting are used on steel pipe, in
which case they shall have band and clean cut, full taper thread. Welding fittings shall be
standard weight, conforming to ASA B36.10. Welding elbows shall be long radius patter,
unless otherwise specifically authorized for each location.
C.
Schedule of Pipe Fitting Materials
SERVICE
Hydronic
Hydronic
2.11
MATERIAL
Steel
Schedule 40
Copper
Type - L
JOINTS
Up to 2 inch: Threaded;
Larger than 2 inch: Welded*
Copper **
Soldered ***
FITTINGS
Malleable Iron/Steel
Schedule 40
Wrought Copper
1.
* Grooved piping system shall not be considered as an equal.
2.
** PEX piping will be accepted as an alternative for selected portions of the hydronic
system if requested in writing and accepted by the Engineer and the Owner. No fittings
buried in walls or floors will be allowed.
3.
*** Viega Pro-Press system will be accepted as an alternative to soldered joints
VALVES AND UNIONS
A.
1.
Isolation Valves:
Up to 2 Inches:
a. Provide bronze two-piece, ¼ turn, full port ball valve with chrome-plated brass
ball, blowout proof stem and lever handle.
b. Provide extended valve stems where insulation thickness is greater than 1” or
where handle movement is impeded by insulation.”
c. Valve shall have PTFE seats and stem packing seal.
d. Rated for 600 PSIG WOG service.
e. As manufactured by Apollo, Watts, Jenkins or approved equal.
2.
2 inch and larger, provide butterfly valve: Iron body, cast iron nickel plated disc, resilient
EPDM replaceable seat for service to 250 degrees F, wafer or lug ends, extended neck,
infinite position lever handle with memory stop.
3.
Install ball or butterfly valves for all shut-off, bypass and to isolate equipment, part of
systems, or vertical risers.
4.
Provide extended valve stems where pipe insulation is greater than 1” thick.
B.
Check valves:
1.
Up to 2 in. and smaller shall be bronze, screwed ends, spring type.
2.
2-1/2 in. and larger shall be iron body, flanged ends, bronze mounted, spring type.
C.
Non-electric-zone-valve actuators
1.
Provide non-electric zone valve actuators (NEZV) for all panel type radiators.
2.
NEZV's shall be of the angle pattern self contained type for steel radiators.
230001- 15
September 23, 2015
3.
The thermostatic control (control head) shall have an integral, calibrated, user-adjustable
thermostat, with a high limit of 78 degrees F. Do not include a zero setting.
4.
Pipe NEZV's with careful attention to the direction of fluid flow. Fluid must flow in the
direction of the arrow stamped on the valve body.
D.
2.12
Radiator Valves
1.
Provide balancing, isolation, fill and drain valve with integral union for direct connection
to radiator.
2.
Valve to be bronze/brass body with bronze/brass valve disc and EPDM O-ring seal.
Valve to be nickel plated.
3.
Provide suitable connection for threaded, soldered or compression fitting. Provide in
angle pattern or straight through configuration as required for specific location.
4.
Provide “Combi 4” as manufactured by Oventrop or equal by Buderus or Myson.
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A.
Air Vents
1.
The top of main forced hot water supply and return risers shall be provided with an
automatic air vent.
2.
Air vents shall be "Spirotop" automatic air vent as manufactured by Spirotherm, Inc. or
approved equal.
3.
Float Type: Brass or semi-steel body, copper or plastic float, stainless steel valve and
valve seat; unit shall allow manual disassembly for repair or float replacement; suitable
for system operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve.
4.
Provide isolation valve for each vent to allow work on the vent without requiring system
drainage.
5.
Coordinate permanent access with GC.
B.
1.
C.
Relief Valves
Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure
actuated, capacities ASME certified and labeled.
Dielectric Connections:
1.
Connections shall be of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint,
plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
2.
Insulating material shall be suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
3.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working
pressure at 180 deg F.
4.
Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150-psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
5.
Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges,
full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves,
phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
a. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150-psig minimum
working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
230001- 16
2.13
September 23, 2015
6.
Dielectric Couplings:
Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive,
thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225
deg F.
7.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225
deg F.
8.
All piping connections between dissimilar materials shall use dielectric connection where
materials are joined.
PIPING ACCESSORIES
A.
2.14
The Contractor is expected to furnish and install all accessories, valves, fittings, specialties,
and similar items commonly used for installations of this type. This includes, but is not
necessarily limited to shut-off valves to isolate components for repair or replacement,
safety controls usually associated with these system types, connection to controls as
required, and any other items that the contractor deems suitable or desirable for the
installation.
PIPE INSULATION
A.
1.
All pipes, valves, fittings, flanges, and similar elements conveying fluids above or below
ambient temperature shall be insulated as follows:
Provide material and thickness as indicated in the table below.
Fluid
Hydronic
Heating
and systems
B.
C.
1.
Pipe insulation minimum thickness (inches)
Insulation conductivity
Nominal pipe size
Conductivity (K) Mean Temp
< 1"
1" to 1½"
1½"<
btu*in/(h*ft2 * °F)
Rating
0.27
75°F
1.50
1.50
2.0
Insulation, jackets and adhesives shall be flame retardant. Fire and smoke Hazard ratings
to be as tested under procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723, not exceeding:
Flame Spread
25
Smoke Developed
50
Fiberglass: Insulation shall be rigid, molded, noncombustible complying with the
requirements of ASTM C 547, ASTM C 585, and ASTM C 795.
Pipe Insulation
a. K factor as indicated in the table above.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 1000º F.
c. Vapor Retarder Jacket: Jacket shall conform to ASTM C 1136 Type I, secured
with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
d. Insulation shall be as manufactured by Owens-Corning, Certain-Teed, Manville or
Knauf.
2.
Field-Applied Jackets or Fitting Covers
230001- 17
September 23, 2015
a. Fitting Covers: Fitting cover system shall consists of pre-molded, high-impact
PVC materials with fiber glass inserts. Fiber glass insert has a thermal
conductivity (‘K’) of 0.26 at 75° F. mean temperature.
b. Closures: PVC adhesive
D.
1.
E.
2.15
Exterior Pipe Insulation
For piping exposed to the elements, jacketing shall be Outdoor Weatherable PVC with a
minimum thickness of 0.020 inches. Fitting covers shall be of similar materials.
Flexible Foam: Insulation shall be flexible elastomeric expanded closed-cell foam, thermal
insulation complying with the requirements of ASTM C 534, and ASTM D 1056.
1.
Tubing to be factory slit.
2.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 Btu in/h°F.
3.
For foam insulation exposed to sunlight: coat with compatible exterior paint-on coating to
prevent degradation by UV light. Provide separate submittal for this product.
4.
Insulation shall be as manufactured by Armaflex by Armstrong or equal by Armacell or
K-Flex.
F.
Use glues, tapes and mastics that are from the same manufacturer as the insulation itself
and compatible with the insulation material. Provide separate submittal for these products
G.
Insulation Covering for Impact Protection: Covering to be Aluminum, 0.016-inch thick
with embossed finish with factory applied moisture barrier. Overlap shall be 2-inch
minimum. Fittings shall be die-shaped with factory-applied moisture barrier.
A.
Uninsulated pipes 2 inch and smaller:
1.
2.
Adjustable steel swivel J-hanger.
3.
4.
5.
Adjustable steel clevis hanger. (MSS Type 1)
B.
Uninsulated pipes 2-1/2 inch and larger:
1.
2.
Pipe roll with sockets.
3.
Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll.
C.
1.
Insulated pipe- Hot or steam piping:
2.
2-1/2 inch and larger pipes:
a. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering protection saddle.
b. Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection saddle.
3.
230001- 18
D.
1.
September 23, 2015
Insulated pipe- Cold or chilled water piping:
2.
6 inch and larger pipes:
a. Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection saddle.
b. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering protection saddle.
E.
PEX tubing (cross linked Polyethylene)
1.
Use only plastic tubing supports.
2.
Select supports with respect to service temperature of tubing to ensure maximum
continuous working temperature of support is not exceeded.
3.
Provide suspension clips or approved plastic insulator at penetrations through studs/joists
and where abrasion is a concern. Provide nailing plates to protect tubing concealed
within the wall.
4.
Support horizontal PEX every 32” with U-clips or suspension clips.
5.
Support vertical PEX every 48” and at each floor using J-Clamp or lock clip style
fasteners.
6.
Provide ear drop bend support where PEX turns sharply to exit a wall (e.g.
connection to a radiator).
7.
Supports shall be as manufactured by Viega, Sioux Chief, or Uponor.
F.
1.
G.
for
Pipe Clamps
When flexibility in the hanger assembly is required due to horizontal movement, use pipe
clamps with weldless eye nuts. For insulated lines use double bolted pipe clamps.
Multiple or Trapeze Hanger
1.
Trapeze hangers shall be constructed from 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A1011 SS Grade
33 structural steel channel, 1-
2.
Mount pipes to trapeze with 2 piece pipe straps sized for outside diameter of pipe.
H.
For pipes subjected to axial movement:
1.
Strut mounted roller support. Use pipe protection shield or saddles on insulated lines.
2.
Strut mounted pipe guide.
I.
Wall Supports
1.
Pipes 4 inch and smaller:
a. Carbon steel hook.
b. Carbon steel J-hanger.
2.
Pipes larger than 4 inch:
a. Welded strut bracket and pipe straps.
b. Welded steel brackets, with roller chair or adjustable steel yoke pipe roll.
pipe protection shield or saddles on insulated lines.
J.
Use
Floor Supports
230001- 19
1.
September 23, 2015
Hot piping under 6 inch and all cold piping:
a. Carbon steel adjustable pipe saddle and nipple attached to steel base stand sized
for pipe elevation. Pipe saddle shall be screwed or welded to appropriate base
stand.
2.
Hot piping 6 inch and larger:
a. Roller stand with base plate
b. Adjustable roller support and steel support sized for elevation.
K.
1.
L.
Vertical Supports
Steel riser clamp sized to fit outside diameter of pipe.
Copper Tubing Supports
1.
Hangers shall be sized to fit copper tubing outside diameters.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
For supporting vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps,.
7.
For supporting copper tube to strut use epoxy painted pipe straps sized for copper tubing
or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps.
M.
Insulation Shields:
1.
Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel shield over
insulation to cover the lower 180 degree of pipe, minimum 12 inches long centered on
pipe support.
2.
Shields for Insulated Piping 2-1/2” and larger: 16 gage galvanized steel shield over
insulation to cover the lower 180 degree of pipe, minimum 12 inches long centered on
pipe support.
3.
Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead.
N.
1.
O.
1.
Pipe Protection Saddles
Pipe protection saddles shall be formed from carbon steel, 1/8 inch minimum thickness,
sized for insulation thickness. Saddles for pipe sizes greater than 12 inch shall have a
center support rib.
Hanger Finishes
Indoor Finishes
a. Hangers and clamps for support of bare copper piping shall be coated with copper
colored epoxy paint. Additional PVC coating of the epoxy painted hanger shall
be used where necessary.
b. Hangers for other than bare copper pipe shall be zinc plated in accordance with
ASTM B633.
c. Strut channels shall be pre-galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 SS Grade
33 G90 or have an electro-deposited green epoxy finish.
230001- 20
2.
September 23, 2015
Outdoor and Corrosive Area Finishes
a. Hangers and strut located outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in
accordance with ASTM A123. All hanger hardware shall be hot dip galvanized or
stainless steel. Zinc plated hardware is not acceptable for outdoor use.
2.16
DUCTWORK
A.
General
1.
Material, construction and installation shall meet requirements of most recent editions of
the following standards and references, except as otherwise specified or shown on
Drawings:
Standard
As Applicable To
SMACNA Low Pressure duct
Low Pressure Duct
Construction Standards
(SMACNA-LPDS)
NFPA 90A
Fire Dampers; Fire Resistance Standard for Ducts and
Liners
ADC Test Code 106 R4
Ratings of Diffusers, Registers, Grilles
2.
Provide supporting and hanging devices necessary to attach entire Mechanical system
including ductwork and equipment, and to prevent vibration.
3.
Provide vertical and horizontal supports as required by codes to meet minimum
earthquake resistance standard for geographical area.
B.
General - Sheet Metal Ductwork
1.
Ductwork shall be free from vibration under all conditions of operation.
2.
Pipe or conduit crossing duct:
a. No pipe or conduit shall pass through duct without approval of Engineer.
b. Where it is impossible to re-route pipe or conduit and when written approval has
been obtained, increase duct size to maintain constant cross-sectional area at point
of interference.
c. Provide streamlined enclosure for pipe or conduit, as illustrated in SMACNA
LPDS.
3.
When making offsets and transformations necessary to accommodate structural
conditions, preserve full cross-sectional area of ductwork shown on Drawings.
4.
Ductwork shall have the following pressure-velocity classifications:
Duct Class
Low Pressure
5.
Static Pressure
Rating
2 in.
Pressure
Pos or Neg
SMACNA
Seal Class
B
Velocity
2500 fpm of less
Sealants
a. Seal duct joints and joints between fittings and ducts with 3M, United Sheet metal
or approved equal sealant as required by manufacturer's instructions.
b. Make and seal duct joints properly. Apply sealant over joint lines and screws.
Coverage shall be 1-inch wide on each side of joint. When joint is inaccessible
230001- 21
September 23, 2015
for sealing from outside, cut hand-hole in duct to seal joint form inside. Where
possible, sealing shall be on inside of ductwork.
c. Before assembling fittings and joints, apply sealer to rivets, grooved seams and
top-off collars on inside of ductwork. Flood Pittsburgh lock pocket and the
zoning plants with sealer.
d. Brush sealer around washers, corners, notches and top-off collars after assembling
ducts.
e. Coat inside of connecting lap of slip joints and duct surface with sealer.
f.
Do not use tape to seal sheet metal ducts.
6.
Provide volume damper, or other approved air balancing device, with indicating and
locking quadrant at each branch from main duct, at each duct take-off and at each neck to
individual diffuser or register in supply, return or exhaust ducts.
7.
Support
a. Support vertical duct on each floor or slab it penetrates.
b. Supports for ductwork and equipment shall be galvanized unless specified
otherwise.
8.
Connections
a. Provide flexible connections at all RTU connections. Flexible connections shall
be fire retardant fabric, by Vent fabrics or approved equal.
9.
Construction
a. No sharp metal edges shall extend into air streams.
b. Install slip on air-leaving side of duct with sheet metal screws on 6-inch centers.
10.
Joints
a. Longitudinal lock seams shall be double-locked and flattened to make tight joints.
b. Make transverse joints, field connections, collar attachments and flexible
connections to ducts and equipment with sheet metal screws or bolts and nuts. Do
not use rivets and staples.
11.
Elbows and Bends
a. Elbows and bends for rectangle ducts shall have centerline radius of 1½ times duct
width wherever possible.
b. Where centerline radius is less than 1 ½ times duct width (on supply and return
duct work), supply air elbows shall have single thickness turning vanes. Fasten
vanes to runners in installed operating position. Install vanes in accordance with
SMACNA LPDS.
12.
Duct Termination
a. End of duct sections shall be notched and lapped on. Connect ends with bar slips,
S-slip and drive caps. Slips shall be made in form of frames, mitered and riveted
at corners to prevent leakage.
13.
Leakage
230001- 22
September 23, 2015
a. Test ducts before applying exterior insulation. Correct leaks. Leakage noise shall
not be audible from any point in ductwork at distance of 3 feet, as determined by
Engineer.
14.
Materials
a. Sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of hot-dipped galvanized sheet metal with
G90 commercial costing according to ASTM 525 unless specified otherwise.
C.
Low Pressure Ductwork - Rectangular
1.
Ducts wider than 19 inches with more than 10 square feet of unbraced panel shall be
beaded or cross-broken, unless they have nonconductive covering or acoustical liner.
2.
Use internal stiffening struts where required and where directed by Engineer.
3.
Make changes in duct size with tapered connections as required by SMACNA LPDS.
4.
Transverse joints shall be made with sip joints; use flat or standing seam according to
SMACNA LPDS. Where duct size requires standing seam but space restrictions dictate
flat seam, flat seam may be used if shown and approved on shop drawings.
D.
Low Pressure Ductwork - Spiral Sheet Metal Ductwork
1.
Construct per SMACNA. Provide submittal detailing spiral duct manufacturing
standards and custom fabricated connection from spiral to diffusers.
2.
Provide acid wash and proper preparation for painting.
3.
Provide one coat of compatible primer. Provide submittal.
4.
Provide two finish coats of paint, coordinate color selection with Engineer by providing a
submittal.
E.
Low Pressure Ductwork – Round
1.
Construct per SMACNA.
2.
Seal all joints with liquid sealer.
F.
Low Pressure Ductwork – Bathroom Exhausts
1.
All ductwork shall be rigid Aluminum.
2.
Provide liquid sealant for all joints and seems.
3.
All longitudinal seams shall be oriented up. Avoid dips and sags in which condensate
can collect.
G.
Low Pressure Ductwork - Pre Insulated Flexible Ductwork
1.
Flexible ducts shall have an impervious core with wire reinforcement. the inner duct
shall be covered with fiberglass insulation with an vapor barrier covering.
2.
See insulation specification for requirements.
3.
Flex duct shall be UL 181 listed, and shall meet all local codes.
4.
Adjustable stainless steel or nylon bands shall be used to connect duct to registers and
fittings. a second band shall be installed over the outer jacket, to maintain the vapor
barrier.
5.
Flexible duct length shall be limited to connections between trunk ducts and diffusers, not
to exceed four feet.
230001- 23
2.18
September 23, 2015
6.
All flexible ducts shall be fully stretched to reduce resistance.
7.
Support the flexible duct with adequate hangers to relieve the strain on any fittings.
Unnecessary bends, twists, etc. will not be permitted.
H.
2.17
Duct Access Doors
1.
Provide 1" Insulated Access Doors in Ducts at each automatic or motor-operated
Damper, Fire Damper, smoke damper, combination smoke fire damper, at all main trunk
duct manual Dampers, and at fresh air, exhaust air and other major manual Dampers and
any other location where there is equipment mounted within the ductwork. Access Doors
shall be Buckley Model C-10 (Double Cam) or H-10 (Single Cam and Hinge) as
manufactured by Buckley Associates.
2.
Access Door Panels shall be constructed from 24 Gauge Galvanized Steel (22 gauge on
14 x 14 and larger). Both sides of the Door will have 1/8" Neoprene gaskets to prevent
leakage.
3.
Access door shall be sized to allow for access and maintenance of equipment within duct.
GRILLES, DIFFUSERS, LOUVERS AND AIR TERMINATIONS
A.
Shall be ADC certified and tested and shall be rated in accordance with ADC.
B.
Shall handle air quantities at operating velocities with maximum diffusion within space
supplied or exhausted.
C.
Shall operate without objectionable air movement as determined by Engineer.
D.
Shall operate with sound pressure levels not to exceed NC 25.
E.
Return grilles shall be provided for return inlets and shall be sized, at no greater than 300
feet per minute face velocity.
F.
Diffusers, registers and grilles shall be furnished with gaskets and installed with faces set
level and plumb, tightly against mounting surface. See drawings for schedule. All air
terminations shall be white.
G.
All supply diffusers shall be supplied with opposed blade volume damper operable through
the face of the diffuser.
H.
Exterior Louver supplied by MC installed by GC.
1.
Louvers to be extruded aluminum construction. With 45 degree angle blade.
2.
Louver to be 2” depth.
3.
Provide bird screen for all louvers.
4.
Provide anodized aluminum finish. Color to be chosen by architect from manufacturers
standard color chart. Provide color palette as part of louver submittal.
5.
Coordinate frame type with wall construction. Coordinate rough opening size with GC.
DUCT INSULATION
A.
1.
Duct liner: Provide duct liner, for both supply and return rectangular ducting connected to
air handlers, ducted fan coils, and heat exchangers.
Duct liner shall be flexible glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM c553, class 1; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75
degrees f; 24 lb/cu.ft. minimum density; coated air side for maximum 4,000 ft/min. air
velocity.
230001- 24
September 23, 2015
2.
Use one-inch thick insulation.
3.
Secure duct liner with Mechanical fasteners on 15-inch centers on top and side of
ductwork with any dimension exceeding 20 inches. Seal and smooth joints do not use
nail type fasteners.
4.
Ductwork dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for airflow. Increase
outside ductwork dimensions as required allowing for insulation thickness.
5.
Materials and installation shall meet following standards, as applicable:
a. NFPA-90A
b. Fire hazard classifications of 25-flame spread, 50 smoke developed, and 50 fuel
contributed according to ASTM E-84, NFPA 255, UL 723 Class I.
B.
Exterior duct insulation: Insulate the exterior of all concealed supply duct work that is not
lined, duct that runs in unconditioned space, attics, and outside air intake ducts.
1.
Duct Insulation: Flexible glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C553, Class 1; 'K' value of 0.30 per
inch at 75 degrees F; covered with foil faced vapor barrier.
2.
Use thickness to achieve a minimum of R-3 in conditioned spaces.
3.
Use thickness to achieve a minimum of R-3 for outside air intake ductwork and outside
air plenums.
4.
Use thickness to achieve a minimum of R-8 in unconditioned spaces.
5.
Secure duct insulation with manufacturers tapes and methods. Assure continuous vapor
barrier.
6.
Materials and installation shall meet following standards, as applicable:
a. NFPA-90A
b. Fire hazard classifications of 25-flame spread, 50 smoke developed, and 50 fuel
contributed according to ASTM E-84, NFPA 255, UL 723 Class I.
2.19
2.20
VIBRATION ISOLATION
A.
For each element of rotating Mechanical equipment, provide vibration isolation to reduce
the transmission of vibration from the equipment to the supporting building member.
B.
Provide ribbed neoprene and cork pads for mounting of floor mounted air handling and fan
coil units.
C.
Provide spring and neoprene hangers for horizontal air handlers, fan coils, exhaust fans,
supply fans, and air to air heat exchanger units.
D.
Provide spring and neoprene hangers for isolating the piping in the boiler room from any
attachment to the ceiling. Rack pipes and suspend racks with isolation hangers.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
A.
Provide identification of all new Mechanical systems. Colors per ANSI/ASME A13.1
unless otherwise specified.
B.
Equipment
1.
Identify exhaust fans, supply fans, and heat exchangers with stencil lettering, minimum
two inches in height.
230001- 25
September 23, 2015
2.
Identify pumps as per schedule with embossed phenolic name plate secured to the pump
housing not motor.
3.
Identify all motor starters per equipment schedule with embossed phenolic nameplate
secured to the front face of the starter.
C.
Controls: Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with
embossed phenolic nameplates.
D.
Piping: Identify piping with plastic tape markers. Identify service, and flow direction.
Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20
feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side
of penetration of structure or enclosure and at each obstruction.
E.
Valves: Identify valves in main and branch piping with embossed brass tags.
F.
Provide valve chart and schedule for inclusion in three ring project manual and framed for
installation in the boiler room.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1
SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Coordination: Cooperate and coordinate with other trades in executing work of this section
as described hereunder.
1.
Perform work so that progress of entire project including work of other trades whether
involved in work of this or other Sections shall not be interfered with or delayed.
2.
Provide information as requested on items furnished under this Section which shall be
installed under other Sections.
3.
Obtain detailed information from manufacturers of equipment to be provided under this
Section as to proper methods of installation.
4.
Obtain final roughing dimensions or other information as needed for complete
installation of all items furnished under other Sections or by Owner.
5.
Keep fully informed as to shape, size and position of openings required for material or
equipment to be provided under this and other Sections.
a. Give full information so that openings required by work of this Section may be
coordinated with other work and other openings may be provided for in advance.
b. In case of failure to provide necessary and sufficient information in proper time,
trade involved will be required to do cutting and patching or have same done, at
own expense and to full satisfaction of Engineer.
6.
Notify Engineer of location and extent of piping, ductwork and equipment of other trades
which interferes with the work of this section.
a. In coordination with and with approval of Engineer, relocate such piping, wiring
and equipment to permit new work to be provided as required by Contract
Documents.
B.
Maintenance of equipment and systems: Provide maintenance for Mechanical equipment
and systems until final acceptance by Engineer and Owner, and take such measures as
necessary to ensure adequate protection of equipment and material during delivery, storage,
installation and shutdown conditions.
230001- 26
1.
C.
1.
September 23, 2015
This responsibility shall include provisions required to meet conditions incidental to
delays pending final test of systems and equipment under seasonal conditions.
Use of Premises: Use of premises shall be restricted as directed in Division 1 and as
required below.
As required, during progress of work, remove and properly dispose of resultant dirt and
debris, and keep premises reasonably clean.
a. Upon completion of work, remove equipment and unused material provided for
work, and put building and premises in neat and clean condition, and do cleaning
and washing required to provide acceptable appearance and operation of
equipment, to satisfaction of Engineer, and as specified under paragraph
"CLEANING".
2.
Conduct work so as not to interfere with functioning of existing sewers and water and gas
mains.
a. Extreme care shall be observed to prevent debris from entering piping. Confer
with Engineer as to disruption of water service or other utilities due to testing or
connection of new work to existing.
D.
1.
Superintendence: Keep superintendent or foreman on site during progress of work.
Instructions given to such representative by Engineer shall be binding of Contractor.
Do not change representative without prior notification to Engineer.
E.
Inspections by Engineer: Undertaking of periodic inspections by Engineer or designated
agent shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, nor make either
responsible for providing safe place for performance of work of various trades or suppliers,
or for visitors or occupants, or make either responsible for omission of safety devices called
for by codes, ordinances, or specifications of manufacturer of equipment supplied.
F.
Surveys and Measurements
1.
Base measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on reference points established by
Contractor and be responsible for correct laying out of work.
2.
In event of discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify
Engineer in writing and do not proceed with work until Engineer has issued written
instructions.
G.
Firestopping and fireproofing:
1.
Coordinate the work of this section with fire stopping provided by others for all
penetrations at fire rated partitions.
2.
The GC shall provide fire stopping for all new penetrations at fire-rated partitions made
by this contractor.
3.
Provide a marked plan set for reference by the GC indicating all penetrations that require
fire stopping.
4.
Patching and repairing of spray fireproofing due to cutting or damaging to fireproofing
during course of work specified under this Section shall be performed by installer of
fireproofing and paid for by trade responsible for damage and shall not constitute grounds
for an extra to Owner.
230001- 27
3.2
September 23, 2015
A.
Hangers shall be arranged to maintain the required grading and pitch of piping, to prevent
vibrations, and to provide free, guided, expansion and contraction between anchors.
B.
Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
C.
Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
D.
Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers. Trapeze hangers shall be spaced according to the smallest pipe size, or
install intermediate supports according to schedule in this section.
E.
Install hangers to provide minimum ½ inch space between finished covering and adjacent
work.
F.
Horizontal piping shall be supported in accordance with MSS SP-69 and as follows:
PIPE SIZE
½ to 1-1/4 inch
1-1/2 to 2 inch
2-1/2 to 3 inch
4 to 6 inch
8 to 12 inch
3.3
MAX. HANGER SPACING
6'-0"
10'-0"
10'-0"
10'-0"
14'-0"
HANGER DIAMETER
3/8"
3/8"
1/2"
5/8"
7/8"
G.
Support vertical piping at each floor but no more than ten-foot intervals.
H.
Provide means of preventing dissimilar metal contact such as plastic coated hangers, copper
colored epoxy paint, or non adhesive isolation. Galvanized felt isolators sized for copper
tubing may also be used.
I.
Do not support piping from other pipes, ductwork or other equipment that is not building
structure.
J.
PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
General Installation Requirements
1.
Insulation shall be installed by insulation firm regularly specializing in this work and
employing men particularly skilled therein. (No covering applied by pipe fitters or
helpers will be acceptable.) All materials shall be installed in strict accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations, building codes, and industry standards.
2.
Install insulation materials only after piping has been inspected, tested and approved.
3.
All pipes, valves, fittings, flanges, and similar elements shall be insulated.
4.
Locate insulation and cover seams in the least visible location. All surface finishes shall
be extended to protect all surfaces, ends and raw edges of insulation, ends or raw edges of
insulation terminations at equipment connections, or fittings shall be sealed with vapor
retarder mastic.
5.
All pipe insulation shall be continuous through walls, ceiling or floor openings, or
sleeves.
230001- 28
September 23, 2015
6.
PIPE SUPPORTS SHALL BE EXTERNAL TO THE INSULATION. Where pipe
supports cannot be installed external of the insulation, (Split ring hangers on vertical
piping.) the support rods shall be insulated for 6” beyond pipe insulation.
7.
Any piping located exposed in occupied spaces within 6 ft of the floor shall be provided
with insulation covering for impact protection.
8.
Install per manufacturers recommended installation instructions.
B.
General Installation Requirements for Fiberglass Pipe Insulation
1.
All insulation ends must be firmly butted to eliminate all voids and secured with
appropriate butt-strip material. Longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips shall be smoothly
secured according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Care shall be taken to ensure that
no folds or air pockets are created when jacket laps and butt strips are secured.
2.
Galvanized metal shields shall be applied between hangers or supports and the pipe
insulation. Shields shall be formed to fit the insulation and shall extend up to the
centerline of the pipe and shall be of the length specified for the insulation hanger inserts
less 4" to allow for vapor retarding butt joints on each side of the shields.
3.
Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed on pipe sizes 1½" or larger under outside
hangers. The thickness of inserts shall be equal to the thickness of the adjoining
insulation and shall be provided with vapor retarder seals. Insulation inserts shall not be
less than 12” for all pipes up to 6” in diameter.
C.
General Exterior Pipe Insulation Installation Requirements for Fiberglass Pipe Insulation
1.
The insulation and jacketing shall be held firmly in place with a friction type Z lock or a
minimum 2” overlap joint.
2.
All joints shall be sealed completely along the longitudinal seam and installed so as to
shed water. (For horizontal piping all seems shall point down.) All circumferential joints
shall be sealed by use of preformed butt strips; minimum 2" wide or a minimum 2"
overlap. Butt strips shall overlap the adjacent jacketing a minimum ½-inch and be
completely weather sealed.
3.
A 6" to 10" unsealed slide joint shall be installed every 25 to 30 lineal feet for the thermal
expansion of the pipe and jacketing. A thin bead of silicone grease shall be applied in the
overlap to prevent water migration while allowing the joint to slide. Where distance
between fittings exceeds 8 lineal feet, an unsealed slide joint shall be installed.
D.
General Installation Requirements for flexible foam Insulation
1.
All insulation ends must be firmly butted to eliminate all voids and secured with
appropriate butt-seam adhesive.
2.
Seal longitudinal seam with appropriate adhesive.
3.
Allow a minimum of 36 hours before system operation to allow for adhesive to fully
cure.
4.
Fabricate fitting covers for valves, elbows, tees, etc from miter-cut pieces of insulation.
Fitting cover should overlap the pipe insulation by at least one inch.
5.
Install per manufacturers installation instructions.
E.
1.
Heating only Hydronic Systems
All insulation shall be Fiberglass except where noted otherwise.
230001- 29
3.4
September 23, 2015
2.
Insulate all system elements including pipes, valves, fittings, flanges, pump volutes, air
separators and similar elements.
3.
PEX Piping: All PEX piping shall be insulated with flexible foam insulation.
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A.
3.5
Work shall be executed in workmanlike manner and shall present neat and Mechanical
appearance when completed.
1.
Ductwork and piping shall run concealed except in Mechanical rooms and areas where no
hung ceiling exists unless otherwise shown on drawings.
2.
Material and equipment shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommended best
practice such that completed installation shall operate safely and without leakage, undue
wear, noise, vibration, corrosion, or water hammer.
3.
Use of dielectric couplings between dissimilar materials is mandatory. Work shall be
properly and effectively protected, and pipe openings shall be temporarily closed to
prevent obstruction and damage prior to completion.
B.
Fully insure workmen and work as required.
C.
Except as otherwise noted, material or equipment mentioned in these Specifications or on
Drawings shall be furnished new.
1.
Provide supplies, appliances and connections necessary for complete and operational
installation.
2.
Equipment shall be provided with components required or recommended by OSHA and
applicable NFPA documents, and shall be UL approved where applicable.
3.
Protection facilities including expanded metal guards over belt drives and couplings shall
be provided in conformance with OSHA standards and all other applicable regulations.
D.
Notwithstanding any reference in Specifications or on Drawings to material or piece of
equipment by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall be interpreted as
establishing type, function, and standard of quality desired and shall not be construed as
limiting competition.
E.
Finish of materials, components and equipment shall not be less than industry good
practice. When material or equipment is visible or subject to corrosive or atmospheric
conditions, finish shall be as approved by Engineer.
F.
Owner shall not be responsible for material and equipment prior to testing and acceptance.
BULLETINS, MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Obtain at time of purchase of equipment, three copies of operation, lubrication and
maintenance manuals for all items.
1.
Assemble literature in coordinated manuals with additional information describing
combined operation of field-assembled units, including as-built wiring diagrams.
2.
Manual shall contain names and addresses of manufacturers and local representatives
who stock or furnish repair parts for items or equipment.
B.
1.
Furnish three copies of manuals to Engineer for approval and distribution to Owner.
Deliver manuals no less than 30 days prior to acceptance of equipment to permit Owner's
personnel to become familiar with equipment and operation prior to acceptance.
230001- 30
C.
3.6
3.7
September 23, 2015
Operating instructions: Upon completion of installation or when Owner accepts portions of
building and equipment for operational use, instruct Owner's operating personnel in any or
all parts of various systems.
1.
Such instructions shall cover period of control such as will take Mechanical equipment
through complete cycle.
2.
Make adjustments under actual operating condition.
Provide a minimum of three
separate training sessions, each of up to one days duration.
CONTINUITY OF SERVICES
A.
Do not interrupt existing or temporary services without Owner's approval and coordination
with the GC.
B.
Schedule interruptions in advance, according to Owner's instructions. Submit, in writing,
with request for interruption, methods proposed to minimize the length of interruption.
C.
Interruptions shall be scheduled at such times of the day and work so that they have
minimal impact on Owner's operations.
ACCESS AND ACCESS PANELS
A.
1.
B.
1.
C.
1.
D.
3.8
Perform work required so as to provide proper access to material or equipment, which may
need inspection, replacement, repair or service.
If proper access cannot be provided, confer with Engineer as to best method of approach
to minimize effect of reduced access, which may result.
Supply access panels for installation under other Sections where shut-off valves, control
valves, check valves, or any items requiring access which are installed under this Section
and concealed in floor, wall, furred space or above the ceiling.
Access panels shall be by Knapp, Milcor, Way Loctor, or approved equal; coordinate
selection with other trades supplying similar access panels.
Ceiling consisting of lay-in or removable splined tiles do not require access panels.
Valves above the ceiling shall have locations marked with thumb tacks on finished
ceiling panels; locations shall be noted on record drawings.
Access panels shall have same fire rating classification as surface penetrated.
SLEEVES, PLATES, AND INSERTS
A.
1.
Lay out chases, openings and partitions before installation to permit provision in work.
Sleeves and inserts shall be set in forms before concrete is poured.
Extra work required where sleeves, chase openings or inserts have been omitted or
improperly placed shall be performed at expense of trade which made error or omission.
B.
Sleeves provided for piping between floors and through fire walls or smoke partitions shall
be installed with approved packing between sleeves and piping to provide for fire stop.
C.
Pipe passing through floors, walls and partitions shall be provided with 122 USGG
galvanized iron sleeve, first pipe size larger than outside diameter of insulation to be
sleeved.
D.
Sleeves installed in floors of toilet rooms and apparatus rooms shall extend two inches
above finished floor.
230001- 31
E.
1.
3.9
1.
Inserts used shall be cast iron or steel of type to receive machine bolt head or nut after
installation.
Inserts shall permit adjustment of bolt in one horizontal direction and shall, when
installed in properly cured concrete, develop full strength of bolt.
Escutcheons shall be installed around exposed pipe passing through finished floor, wall, or
ceiling.
Escutcheons shall be heavy cast brass, chromium-plated, unless otherwise noted,
adjustable, and shall be of sufficient outside diameter to cover sleeve opening and shall
fit snugly around pipe.
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
A.
Install equipment so as to avoid interference with structure and with work of other trades,
preserving adequate headroom and clearing doors and passageways, to satisfaction of
Engineer and in accordance with code requirements.
B.
Install equipment so as to properly distribute equipment loads in building structural
members provided for equipment support under other Sections.
1.
Roof-mounted equipment shall be installed and supported on separate supports as
previously specified.
C.
Provide suspended platforms, strap hangers, brackets, shelves, stands or legs as necessary
for floor, wall or ceiling mounting of equipment provided under this Section (e.g. heating
and ventilating units, fans, ducts and piping) as indicated on Drawings and in
Specifications.
D.
Provide steel supports and hardware for proper installation of hangers, anchors, guides, etc.
E.
Provide cuts, weights, and other pertinent data required for proper coordination of
equipment support provisions and installation.
F.
Structural steel and hardware shall conform to Standard Specifications of ASTM; use of
steel and hardware shall conform to requirements of Section Five of Code of Practice of
American Institute of Steel Construction.
G.
Verify site electrical conditions prior to purchase of equipment. Coordinate voltage of all
equipment requiring electrical connections with EC prior to purchase. Notify engineer of
any discrepancies.
H.
Verify site conditions and dimensions of equipment to ensure access for proper installation
of equipment without disassembly, which will void warranty.
1.
3.11
September 23, 2015
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
3.10
Report in writing to Engineer, prior to purchase or shipment of equipment involved, on
conditions, which may prevent proper installation.
ADJUSTING
A.
1.
B.
Provide start-up service, make any required adjustments and efficiency tests, and provide
one, minimum three-hour instruction periods to owner's representative at the site.
This is in addition to the separately specified control system training.
Include a minimum of three separate visits to the site after substantial completion for the
purpose of assisting the Owner's representatives in proper operation.
230001- 32
3.12
See drawings for correct pipe sizing and locations.
2.
Pipe materials and fitting materials shall be as indicated in Schedule of Pipe and Fitting
Materials.
3.
After completion, fill, clean, drain and refill systems; pressure test boiler piping.
B.
Provide shut-offs at the base of each riser, at each major piece of equipment and at
appropriate locations to facilitate service of components.
C.
Provide balancing valves at the outlet of all hydronic coils and radiation.
D.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
E.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
F.
Install unions at equipment that does not have flanged connections between equipment and
isolation valves.
JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS
Joints and connections shall be permanent and shall be gas-and water-tight. Jointing shall
be types specified for service indicated. Joints and connections shall meet requirements of
manufacturers best recommended practice. All transitions between different piping
materials shall be made using approved adapters. Adapters for transitions between two
types of piping materials shall be manufactured for purpose intended.
EXPANSION PROVISIONS
A.
1.
B.
Installation of piping must allow for expansion using offsets, loops, swing joints, expansion
joints, etc. as shown and as necessary to prevent undue strain.
Take-offs from mains to runouts shall not have less than three elbow swings.
Mains and risers with loops or offsets shall be securely anchored to structure so as to impart
expansion towards loops or offsets.
1.
Anchors shall be constructed of heavy forged wrought iron, secured to pipe and to
structure.
2.
Provide vibration isolation as required.
C.
3.15
Install piping as required for a complete installation. Conform to the best practice of the
trade.
1.
A.
3.14
September 23, 2015
PIPING AND FITTINGS
A.
3.13
Provide pipe alignment guides as required to guide expanding pipe to move freely from
anchor points toward expansion joints, offsets, etc.
TESTING, INSPECTION, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING
A.
1.
General
Provide the services of an independent test and balance company certified by the ABA
who shall supply qualified personnel, equipment, apparatus and services for testing,
inspection, balancing and adjusting of Mechanical systems, to performance data shown in
schedules, as specified, and as required by codes, standards, regulations and authorities
having jurisdiction including City Inspectors, Owner and Engineer.
230001- 33
September 23, 2015
a. Notify Engineer and involved authorities at least 48 hours prior to testing or
inspection.
b. Do not cover work (this includes application of insulation) prior to testing or
inspection.
2.
Testing, inspection, balancing and adjusting shall in no way relieve or reduce guarantee
requirements.
3.
The Mechanical systems are not to be considered substantially complete until the test and
balance work is complete and the submitted paper work detailing results has been
approved by the engineer.
4.
Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms and test equipment for review prior to
testing and balancing.
5.
Notify Engineer and authorities involved at least 48 hours prior to testing.
6.
Do not cover or conceal work prior to testing and inspection and obtaining approval.
7.
Prior to date of acceptance, furnish Engineer with certificates of testing and inspection for
Mechanical systems indicating approval of authorities having jurisdiction and
conformance with requirements of Contract Documents.
a. Instruments used for testing and balancing shall have been calibrated with six
months prior to testing or balancing.
b. Calibration shall be certified.
8.
Leaks, damage and defects discovered or resulting from tests shall be repaired or replaced
to like-new condition with acceptable materials.
a. Tests shall be continued until system operates without adjustments or repairs.
9.
Report on standard reporting forms.
10.
Submit six copies of testing and balancing reports to Engineer for approval.
11.
Prove capacity and performance of equipment by field testing. Install equipment and
instruments required for testing, thermo-wells and gauge connections at no additional
cost to Owner.
12.
Qualified representative of equipment manufacturer shall be present at test.
13.
Tests: No tests shall be started until systems have been flushed.
a. Fill system and allow to sit for 24 hours or more.
b. Drain and refill system.
c. Provide temporary piping and connections for testing, flushing, or draining
systems to be tested.
d. If leaks develop, repairs shall be made and tests repeated.
e. Tests shall be continued until systems operate without adjustments and repair to
equipment or piping.
f.
B.
1.
Tests are further specified under other paragraphs of this Section.
Hydronic Piping Systems
Leak tests shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI B31.9 "Building Service Piping"
and as specified herein.
230001- 34
2.
September 23, 2015
Test system to 1.5 times working pressure, but not less than 100 psig.
a. Pipe shall be capable of holding test pressure for a minimum of fifteen (15)
minutes with no perceivable pressure reduction.
b. Test shall be conducted using compressed air.
3.
Test shall be documented by the contractor and written report shall be provided to the
engineer.
4.
Equipment shall be valved off or removed during test if equipment pressure rating is less
than test pressure.
5.
Where more than one pipe is being installed and tested, testing shall be performed
individually unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
6.
Leaks discovered during testing shall be repaired at no cost to Owner; retest system.
C.
Non-electric zone valves. Check for proper operation under system operation and proper
piping and flow direction.
D.
Duct System Testing
1.
Adjust all air handling equipment to provide required or design supply, return and
ventilation air quantities.
2.
Test duct leakage in accordance with Energy Star for Home Indoor Air Package and
requirements below.
a. Duct system leakage shall be measured at 25 Pascals and shall be no greater than 6
cfm per 100 sq ft of conditioned space.
3.
Measure air quantities at all risers and adjust related manual balancing damper. (Airflow
shall be balanced between 100% and 120% of specified flow rate.)
4.
Measure air quantities at all inlets and outlets.
a. Adjust distribution system to obtain indicated airflows, uniform space
temperatures, and free from objectionable drafts and noise. (Airflow shall be
balanced between 100% and 120% of specified flow rate.)
5.
Use volume control devices to extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air
motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers
and splitters.
6.
Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes
required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
7.
Measure static air pressure conditions on AHU's, including filter and coil pressure drops,
and total pressure across the fan. Make allowance for 50% loaded filter.
8.
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust air dampers for
design conditions.
E.
Test of Air Handlers
1.
Measure air quantities at all inlets and outlets.
2.
Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable
drafts and noise.
3.
Measure static air pressure conditions at AHU's, including filter and coil pressure drops,
and total pressure across the fan.
230001- 35
September 23, 2015
a. Make allowance for 50 percent loaded filter.
4.
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust air dampers for
design conditions.
END OF SECTION
230001- 36
September 23, 2015
SECTION 26.00.01
ELECTRICAL
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1
A. Include the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1, General Requirements, as part
of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements that affect work under this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Coordinate work of this Section with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by, this
contract.
1.2
FILED SUB-BID
A. Bidding procedures shall be in accordance with the latest edition of Massachusetts General
(1984) and Chapter 30B, Uniform Procurement Act (1990). Time and place for submission of
sub-bids is given in Advertisement for Bids.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this section shall be for complete work and shall be filed in a sealed
envelope with Awarding Authority, at time and place specified in Advertisement for Bids.
Following shall appear on face of envelope:
PROJECT NAME
SECTION 260001- ELECTRICAL
C. Every sub-bid submitted for work under this section shall be on forms furnished by Awarding
Authority, as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of General Laws, and specified in
Advertisement for Bids.
D. Sub-bids filed with Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by bid deposits in the form of a
bid bond, cash, certified check, or a treasurer's or cashier's check, issued by a responsible bank
or trust company, payable to the Awarding Authority in compliance with Chapter 149, Section
44B. Amount of bid deposit shall be 5 percent of value of bid.
E. Work to be done under this section is shown on the following drawings. : E001, E101, E102
1.3
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Included in this Section is the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and accessories
required to provide a complete installation of the work described herein and on the Drawings.
Build the work of other trades into the work of this Section as required.
B. Installation of all materials to be furnished under this Section, and without limiting the
generality thereof, includes all materials, equipment, hoisting, rigging, staging, labor and
services required for furnishing, delivering, and installing the principal items of work
hereinafter, and all items incidental thereto, as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.
ELECTRICAL
260001- 1
September 23, 2015
C. The complete removal and disconnection of all electrical components, as required.
D. Electrical work shall include, but not be limited to, the following systems:
1. Selective demolition including cutting, capping and making safe branch circuits serving
areas of the basement to be renovated.
2. Lock out/tag out to facilitate demolition work.
3. Provide electrical disconnect and connections to new space heating equipment and controls.
Provide connections to existing branch circuits.
4. Disconnect switches
5. Emergency call system for new bathrooms including remote alarm in first floor
management office
6. Circuit Breakers
7. Lighting fixtures
8. Modifications to existing fire alarm
9. All grounding required by the Massachusetts Electrical Code
10. Operating and maintenance manuals
11. Record drawings
12. Testing
13. Control wiring of over 30 volts to mechanical equipment.
1.4
RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect Work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that directly relate to Work of this Section include, but are not limited to
the following:
1. 23.00.01 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
a. All temperature control wiring below 30 volts and oil burner control wiring shall be
furnished and installed by the HVAC Contractor, unless shown otherwise.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in strict accordance with rules, regulations, standards, codes, ordinances, and
laws of local, state, and Federal governments, and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction,
and be responsible for compliance therewith. Such authorities include but are not limited to the
following:
1. Installation shall comply in all details with the Massachusetts Electrical Code with its latest
revisions and all prevailing federal, state and local codes.
2. All material and equipment shall be Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. listed, where a
standard has been established.
3. Manufacturers' names and nomenclature facilitates descriptions of certain materials and
equipment, and are used to establish type, quality and function.
4. Unless otherwise specified, all work shall be manufactured, tested and installed in
accordance with the latest editions of applicable publications and standards of the following
organizations:
ELECTRICAL
260001- 2
September 23, 2015
5. American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM).
6. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.)
7. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA).
8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
9. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
10. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
11. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
12. National Electrical Code (NEC).
13. Massachusetts Electrical Code (MEC).
14. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Public Law 101-336.
15. Commonwealth of Massachusetts State Building Code (SBC)
16. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
B. Should specifications, Engineers' instructions, laws, ordinances or public authority require any
special tests or approvals, arrange for these and give the Engineer timely notice. If the
inspection is by another authority other than the Engineer, notify the Engineer of the dates fixed
for such inspection.
C. Where reference is made to Codes and Standards, these shall be interpreted as minimum
requirements. Requirements in excess of these codes and standards may be indicated on the
Drawings or in the Specifications and shall be so included in the contract work. Compliance
with such code requirements only shall not be construed as fulfillment of the contract work,
where the plans and/or Specifications indicate additional work which may exceed such code
standards.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections:
B. Data sheets shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following items:
1. Wires, cables and raceways
2. Disconnect switches
3. Emergency call
4. Circuit Breakers
5. Lighting fixtures
6. Fire alarm devices and wiring
7. Operating and maintenance manuals
8. Record drawings
9. Test results
10. Guarantee
C. The acceptance of systems, equipment and data sheets is a general approval subject to the
contract Drawings, Specifications, and verification of all measurements at the job. Acceptance
does not relieve the Electrical Contractor from the responsibility of data sheet errors or
ELECTRICAL
260001- 3
September 23, 2015
omissions. Quantity of items indicated on submittal is the responsibility of the Electrical
Contractor.
D. Submit samples of all materials requested by the Engineer.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all materials delivered to the site in
connection with the work and pay all charges for cartage, scaffolds, planking, rigging and
erecting. Take every precaution necessary to protect equipment and installation, in addition to
plugging and protecting open ends of all pipes, outlet boxes, panelboxes and junction boxes.
All equipment shall be stored in a clean, dry place to preserve the quality of materials being
use. Equipment and/or materials damaged during construction shall be replaced at no
additional cost to the Owner.
B. All materials and equipment required by this Specification shall be new, clean and free from
defects at the time of installation. The Manufacturer's and Underwriters’ label shall appear on
all material and equipment, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Owner.
1.8
GUARANTEES AND WARRATNIES
A. The provisions under Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 are included.
B. Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantee for work under this Section. However,
such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which the
manufacturer and Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract
Documents.
C. All material, items of equipment and workmanship furnished under this Section shall carry for
this standard warranty against all defects in material and workmanship. Any fault due to
defective or improper material, equipment, workmanship or design which may develop shall be
made good forthwith, by and at the expense of the Electrical Contractor, including all other
damage done to areas, materials and other systems resulting from this failure.
D. Electrical Contractor shall guarantee that all elements of the systems are of sufficient capacity
to meet the specified performance requirements as set forth herein or as indicated.
E. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner indicating failure of any part of the systems or
equipment during the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced by the
Electrical Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
F. Furnish, before the final payment is made, a written guarantee covering the above requirements
for a period of two years.
1.9
RECORD DRAWINGS
A. In accordance with requirements, furnish and keep in the job at all times, two (2) complete and
separate sets of blackline prints of the electrical work on which shall be clearly, neatly and
accurately noted, promptly as the work progresses, all electrical changes, revisions and
additions to the work. Wherever work is installed otherwise than as shown on the Contract
Drawings, such changes shall be noted.
B. At the conclusion of work, prepare Record Drawings in accordance with General Conditions.
1.10
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Instruct, to the Owner's satisfaction, such persons as the Owner designates, in the proper
operation and maintenance of the systems and their parts.
ELECTRICAL
260001- 4
September 23, 2015
B. Furnish operating and maintenance manuals and forward same to the Engineer for transmittal to
the Owner.
C. Operating instructions shall be specific for each system and shall include copies of posted
specific instructions.
D. For maintenance purposes, provide shop drawings, parts lists, specifications, and
manufacturer's maintenance bulletins for each piece of equipment.
E. Provide name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service
company for each piece of equipment so that service or spare parts can be readily obtained.
1.11
WORKMANSHIP
A. The entire work provided in this Specification shall be constructed and finished in every respect
in a workmanlike and substantial manner. Equipment shall be securely installed plumb and/or
level. No electrical equipment shall be supported by work of other trades.
B. Obtain detailed information from the manufacturers of apparatus as to the proper method of
installing and connecting equipment. Obtain all information from the General Contractor and
other Subcontractors which may be necessary to facilitate work and the completion of the
whole project.
C. Remove daily all rubbish and debris and all refuse from workmen's lunches and at completion,
remove all their surplus materials, and leave the work in clean condition acceptable to the
Engineer.
1.12
PROTECTION
A. This Contractor shall be responsible for the electrical work and equipment until finally
inspected, tested and accepted. Carefully store materials and equipment which are not
immediately installed after delivery to site.
1.13
EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Before submitting his proposal, this Contractor shall visit the premises and review the entire
project, including ballasts in the existing fixtures, existing transformers and other devices
classified as hazardous disposal. The Contractor shall determine the difficulties, conditions and
disposal requirements which may be encountered during the work. All charges related to
meeting the intent of the drawings and specifications shall be incorporated in his bid. No
additional charges will be allowed due to existing conditions.
1.14
SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT
A. If the Electrical Contractor wishes to use materials or equipment other than those specifically
designated herein, as being equal to those so specifically designated BEFORE PURCHASING
AND/OR FABRICATION, the Electrical Contractor shall submit the proposed substitution in
accordance with the requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, and the decision of
whether or not it is equal to that specified shall be determined by the Engineer.
B. Unless requests for substitution are made in accordance with the above instructions and the
instructions of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, supported by sufficient proof of equality, the
successful Contractor will be required to furnish the specifically named items designated under
the base bid.
C. If the apparatus or materials substituted for those specified necessitate changes or additional
connections, piping supports, or construction, same shall be provided and the Electrical
Contractor shall assume the cost and the entire responsibility thereto.
ELECTRICAL
260001- 5
September 23, 2015
D. The Engineer's permission to make such substitution shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor
from full responsibility for the work.
1.15
DRAWINGS
A. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope of work and
indicate general arrangements of equipment, ducts, conduits, piping and fixtures. The locations
of all items shown on the Drawings or called for in the Specifications that are not definitely
fixed by dimensions, are approximate only.
B. The drawings showing layout of the electrical systems indicated the approximate location of
existing outlets and equipment. The outlets, as shown on the drawings, are not intended to
show the routing of the wire. The final determination as to the routing shall be governed by
field conditions. This shall not be construed to mean the design of the system may change. It
merely refers to the exact run of raceway between two points.
1.16
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall verify, in the field, all measurements necessary for his work and
shall assume responsibility for their accuracy.
1.17
PERMITS, LAWS, ORDINANCES & CODES
A. The Electrical Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits in connection with
the work of this trade. Associated fees will be paid by the Owner. The EC shall file all
necessary plans, prepare all necessary documents and obtain all necessary approvals of state
authorities, all local town, city, or county departments having jurisdiction; obtain all required
certificates of inspection for his work.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor,
materials, services, apparatus, drawings in addition to Contract Drawings and Documents, in
order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations whether or not
shown on the drawings and/or specified.
1.18
DEFINITIONS
A. "This Contractor" means specifically the Electrical Contractor working under this Section of
the Specifications.
B. “Furnish and Install" means to supply, erect, install and connect up, complete for regular
operation, the particular item referred to, unless otherwise specified.
C. “Install" means to mount, erect and connect up, complete for regular operation, the particular
item referred to, unless otherwise specified.
D. "Piping" includes, in addition to pipe, all fittings, boxes, hangers and other accessories relating
to such piping.
E. “Provide" means to furnish and install.
F. "Concealed" means hidden from sight as in trenches, chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung
ceilings, embedded into construction, ground or concealed as defined above.
1.19
GROUNDING
A. A complete grounding system shall be furnished and installed in full compliance with the latest
edition of the NEC.
ELECTRICAL
260001- 6
September 23, 2015
B. The equipment and materials required under this Section are included under PART 2 PRODUCTS.
C. Ground all systems and equipment in accordance with the best industry practice. Size all
conductors per the latest addition of the NEC.
D. Conductors utilized for grounding and bonding shall have type "THHN" or better insulation,
color coded green.
E. For each feeder or run of lighting and appliance branch circuitry, include equipment and
raceway grounding conductors run within the raceways. The indicated quantities of conductors
do not include the ground wires.
F. Provide supplementary ground bonding where metallic conduits terminate at metal clad
equipment (or at the metal pull box of equipment) for which a ground bus is specified.
Accomplish this by equipping the conduits with bushings of the grounding type connected
individually by means of jumpers to the ground bus.
1.20
NEUTRAL WIRING
A. For 120 volt branch circuit wiring to receptacles, common neutrals shall not be permitted.
B. Individual neutral conductors shall be installed within the raceways and be run with the branch
circuit.
C. Conductors utilized for neutral wiring shall have type "TW" or better insulation, color coded
white.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A. All materials and equipment necessary to make the installation complete in every detail shall be
furnished and installed under this Contract, whether or not specifically indicated on the
Drawings or specified herein. All materials and equipment shall be new.
B. It is the intent of the Specifications that one manufacturer be selected, not a combination, for
any particular classification of material; for example, all wire of one manufacturer, all switches
of one manufacturer, etc., except specific material classifications in which delivery time
becomes a problem. The Engineer may give specific exemption from the requirements.
C. Where materials, equipment, apparatus, or other products are specified by manufacturer, brand
name, type or catalog number, such designation is to establish standards of performance,
quality, type and style.
2.2
PULL BOXES, WIREWAYS AND CHANNELS
A. Pull boxes shall be code gauge galvanized steel with screw covers to match. Pull boxes and
wireways shall be as shown on Drawings and/or as required by NEC and/or job conditions,
with steel barriers separating systems.
B. Wireways shall be galvanized steel, manufactured standard sections and fittings, with
combination hinged and screw covers.
C. Steel channel supports shall be minimum 1⅝ inch mold strip steel with minimum 105 inch
wall thickness, Unistrut P1000, Kindorf, Husky Products, or equal.
D. Steel support rods or support bolts for conduits shall be ⅛" diameter for each inch or fraction
thereof of diameter of conduit size, but no rod or bolt shall be less than ¼ "in diameter.
ELECTRICAL
260001- 7
September 23, 2015
E. Metal conduit fittings shall be of cast malleable iron, cadmium plated with neoprene gaskets
and cast malleable iron covers. Fittings shall be as manufactured by Steel City, Appleton, or
RACO.
2.3
OUTLET BOXES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Provide galvanized sheet steel outlet boxes for all outlets unless otherwise noted. Provide
single gang “Old Work” style boxes for retrofit.
B. Fixture outlet boxes shall have ⅜" solid male fixture studs and auxiliary fixture stems shall be
supported from 3/8" male fixture studs.
C. All outlet boxes for concealed work shall be galvanized, stamped steel; those for fixtures,
furnished with a fixture stud.
D. Outlet boxes shall be of size and type to accommodate (1) structural conditions, (2) size and
number of raceways, conductors or cables entering, and (3) devices or fixtures for which they
are required.
E. Install blank plates on all outlet boxes, in which no apparatus is installed, which do not
integrally provide a cover for the box.
F. Special care shall be taken to set all boxes correctly square and true with the building finish.
G. Outlet boxes and accessories shall be as manufactured by Steel City, Appleton, Raco, or equal.
2.4
RACEWAYS
A. Electric metallic tubing shall be electrogalvanized or sheradized steel. EMT shall be used in all
exposed areas which are not subject to physical abuse. Couplings and connectors for electrical
metallic tubing shall be galvanized steel set-screw. Tubing shall be as manufactured by Pyle
National, Allied Tube and Conduit Corp., Wheatland Tube Company, or equal.
B. Flexible metal conduit shall be type MC aluminum armor cable with current carrying
conductors as required. MC cable shall also have full size separate copper grounding
conductor. Flexible conduit shall be used above hung ceiling areas, in wall partitions and in
other concealed areas not subject to moisture or physical abuse.
C. Flexible conduit shall be manufactured by American Flexible Conduit, Eastern Wiring Conduit,
International Metal Hose Company, or equal.
D. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be galvanized steel with separate copper grounding
conductor. The outer jacket shall be an extruded, moisture and oil proof, covering of polyvinyl
chloride. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for the final connections to motors
and other equipment are subject to an oil or moisture type environment. Liquid-tight flexible
metal conduit shall be manufactured by American Flexible Conduit, Eastern Wiring Conduit,
International Metal Hose Company, or equal.
E. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC) shall be made of zinc coated steel. GRC conduit shall
be installed as shown on the drawings, as specified, and in all areas subject to physical abuse.
F. Steel support rods or support bolts for conduits shall be ⅛" diameter for each inch or fraction
thereof of diameter of conduit size, but no rod or bolt shall be less than 1¼“ in diameter.
G. For 20 ampere branch circuit wiring furnish and install the number of individual conduits
required to limit the number of conductors in each conduit to a number which will not require
derating to a value below 100 percent of the current rating of the circuit overcurrent protective
device.
ELECTRICAL
260001- 8
2.5
September 23, 2015
WIRE AND CABLE
A. Branch circuits shall be type MC or EMT wiring methods with copper conductors.
B. Wiring shall be minimum of #12 AWG solid copper.
C. Provide single conductor wire and cable with 600V insulation. Wire size #8 AWG and larger
shall be stranded. Wire of size smaller than #8 AWG shall be solid. Conductors shall be soft
drawn copper with conductivity of not less than 98% of ANSI Standard for annealed copper.
D. Wire and cable shall be Type THWN-THHN building wire, 600V, rated for 75oC in wet
locations and 90oC in dry locations.
E. All wire and cable shall be copper, no aluminum is permitted.
F. Wire and cable shall be manufactured by American Flexible Conduit, General Cable Co., and
Southwire Company.
2.6
WIRING DEVICES
A. General
1. All wiring devices shall be of a single manufacturer, as manufactured by Pass and
Seymour, Hubbell, or Cooper/Arrow Hart. Manufacturers listed below establish minimum
requirements. Coordinate color with Engineer for wiring devices and wiring device plates.
B. Single Pole Switches
1. Wall switches shall be of the quiet toggle type, single pole, rated at 15 Amperes-120 Volt.
Switch shall be rated per UL-20 for motor loads up to 1/2hp at 120VAC (12A max).
Switches shall be Arrow Hart CS115V (Ivory).
C. Receptacles - 15A rated
1. Receptacles shall be commercial grade, duplex type, polarized slot with side wired
terminals, grounded as required, and rated at 15 Amperes-125 Volts. Receptacles shall be
Cooper/Arrow Hart
2.7
WIRING DEVICE PLATES
A. Wall plates shall be provided for all receptacles, switches, blank junction boxes and special
purpose outlets. Device plates shall be:
1. Type 403 stainless steel, 0.032" nominal thickness
2. All plates shall have color-matched mounting screws and conform to UL, CSA and NEMA
standards.
B. Device plates shall be by same manufacturer as devices.
2.8
LIGHTING
A. Provide lighting fixtures and lamps as shown in the lighting fixture schedule on the drawings.
B. Coordinate locations with architectural reflected ceiling plans.
C. Lighting shall be as manufactured by GE, Lightolier, or Lithonia.
2.9
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
A. Provide emergency call system to serve new bathrooms.
ELECTRICAL
260001- 9
September 23, 2015
B. System shall include call switches with string pulls. When activated the switch shall create a
visual and audible alarm at the remote receiver via a wireless signal.
C. System shall be as manufactured by National Call Systems, TekTone or Cornell.
2.10
FIRE ALARM
A. Provide fire alarm devices listed for use with existing MIRCOM FA-1000 fire alarm control
system.
B. Initial devices shall include smoke detectors, heat detectors and pull stations.
C. Notification devices shall include strobe, horns, and/or combination units.
D. Provide Tier 2 shop drawings including product submittals, point to point wiring, battery
calculations,
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1
SERVICE TO THE FACILITY
A. Electrical power outages must be minimized as not to interfere with the buildings operation.
The time and duration of any power outage must be approved by and scheduled with the
building owner/authority. The Electrical Contractor shall notify the owner/authority at least ten
calendar days from the date of proposed power outage in the facility.
3.2
DEMOLITION, RELOCATION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING WIRING
A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all electrical demolition, relocation of circuits and
removal of existing wiring necessary for the electrical work.
3.3
SPECIAL COORDINATION INSTRUCTIONS
A. Coordination with work of other trades is required. The following special instructions shall also
be carefully noted:
1. Locations and mounting height of all wall outlets and lighting fixtures shall be verified with
the Engineer prior to roughing-in.
2. All feeder, branch circuit or auxiliary system wiring passing through pull boxes and/or
being made up in panelboards shall be properly grouped, bound and tied together in a neat
and orderly manner, in keeping with the highest standards of the trade, with plastic cable
ties.
3. All duplex convenience and power receptacles shall be mounted vertically with the
grounding post to the bottom as the outlet is viewed from the front.
4. All miscellaneous hardware and support accessories, including support rods, nuts, bolts,
screws, and other such items, shall be of a galvanized or cadmium plated finish, or of other
approved rust-inhibiting coatings. Care should be taken that fixtures shall not be installed
on both sides of existing or new building expansion joints.
5. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all materials, equipment and workmanship to
provide for adequate protection of all electrical equipment during the course of construction
of the project.
6. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install approved insulation at terminal
connection points for all electrical conducting materials, such as transformer terminals,
terminal studs, and at any other special locations as directed by the Engineer.
ELECTRICAL
260001- 10
September 23, 2015
7. Prior to installation of conduit and wire, the Electrical Contractor shall coordinate wiring
requirements with actual equipment supplied.
3.4
CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING
A. The Electrical Contractor shall perform plaster cutting and channeling and drilling necessary
for the installation of electrical work through walls, floors and ceiling construction.
B. The General Contractor shall be responsible for all patching which shall match existing base
materials in looks and color.
3.5
COOPERATION AND WORK PROGRESS
A. The Electrical work shall be carried on under the usual construction conditions, in conjunction
with all other work at the site. The Electrical Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer and
all Contractors and equipment suppliers working on the site, coordinate the work, and proceed
in a manner so as not to delay the progress of the project.
B. The Electrical Contractor has a responsibility to coordinate the exact mounting arrangement
and location of equipment indicated on the Drawings to allow for proper space requirements for
equipment access, operation and maintenance.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to coordinate the delivery of electrical
equipment to the project prior to the time installation of equipment will be required.
3.6
INSTALLATION OF WIRING & CONDUIT
A. In general, all conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise indicated to be run exposed.
Unless otherwise indicated, all wiring shall be 2-#12 and 1-#12 ground, 1/2"C.
B. Conduit ends shall be cut square, threaded and reamed to remove burrs and sharp edges. Offsets
and bends for changes in elevation of exposed conduit runs shall be made at walls or beams and
not in open spaces between walls or beams. Conduits shall be routed so as not to interfere with
the operation or maintenance of any equipment. The entire job shall be done in a neat and
workmanlike manner, as approved by the Engineer. Steel supports or racks shall be galvanized
steel channel and fittings. Supports shall be manufactured by Unistrut, Kindorf, Husky Products
Company, or equal.
C. Exposed conduits shall be run parallel to, or at right angles to, the walls of the building, and all
bends shall be made with standard conduit ells or conduits bent to, not less than, the same
radius. Horizontal runs of exposed conduits shall be close to ceiling beams, passing over water
or other piping where possible and shall be supported by pipe straps or by other approved
means, not more than 5' apart. Installation of exposed conduits in finished areas of the building
shall be checked with the Engineers for layout before installation to conform to the pattern of
the structural members, and when completed, is to present the most unobtrusive appearance
possible. No exposed conduits will be permitted on walls or partitions in public areas, unless
specifically noted.
D. Conduits shall not be installed within 3" of hot water pipes, or appliances, except where
crossing is unavoidable and, in that case, the conduit shall be kept at least 1 from covering or
pipe crossed.
E. Conduits shall be supported on approved type galvanized wall brackets, ceiling trapeze, strap
hangers or pipe straps, secured by means of toggle bolts on hollow masonry units or expansion
bolts in concrete or brick.
F. In general, no splices or joints will be permitted in either feeder or branches except at outlets or
accessible junction boxes.
ELECTRICAL
260001- 11
September 23, 2015
G. All splices in wire #8 AWG and smaller shall be standard pigtail, made mechanically tight and
insulated with proper thickness of insulating tape. Wire splicing nuts as manufactured by
Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company (Scotch Lock) or Ideal wire nuts may be used,
subject to the local wire inspector.
H. Wire #6 and larger shall be connected to panels and apparatus by means of approved lugs or
connectors. Connectors shall be solderless type, sufficiently large to enclose all strands of the
conductor and securely fastened.
I.
3.7
Provide all required branch circuit wiring for electrical devices and lighting fixtures.
Designations shown on drawings are diagrammatic only. Circuit numbers beside receptacles
and lighting fixtures convey that a complete branch circuit is required back to electrical
panelboard. Switch control letters adjacent to lighting fixtures indicate branch wiring required
from lighting fixture to light switch or dimmer.
COLOR CODING
A. Provide color coding for secondary service, feeders and branch circuits as follows:
PHASE
120/240V, 1 phase, 3 wire, wye:
A
B
Neutral
Ground
COLOR
Black
Red
White
Green
B. Provide same color coding for switch legs as corresponding phase conductor. Provide colored
plastic tape of specified color code identification for large size conductors available only in
black.
3.8
MOTORS, CONNECTIONS AND CONTROLS
A. Splices and Terminations:
1. Make splices and terminations equivalent electrically and mechanically to conductor
insulation.
2. Make splices in branch circuit wiring with solderless, screw-on connectors Ideal,
Scotchlok, T&B or equal, rated 600V, of size and type required by manufacturer's
recommendation, with temperature ratings equal to those of cable insulation. Insulate
splices with integral covers or with plastic, rubber, or friction tape, Permacal or equal, to
maintain integrity of cable insulation.
3.9
SLEEVES, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS
A. Furnish and install all inserts, conduit hangers, anchors and steel supports necessary for the
support and installation of all electrical equipment.
B. Where openings are required in walls and floors for the passing of raceways the Electrical
Contractor shall furnish the General Contractor with the necessary information regarding
dimensions and locations so that he may install suitable concrete stops to provide these
openings. Such openings shall be by the General Contractor in such a manner so as not to
interfere with the fireproof integrity of the building.
C. The Electrical Contractor is responsible for the location of, and maintaining the proper position
of sleeves, inserts and anchor bolts supplied and/or set in place. In the event that failure to do so
requires cutting and patching of finished work, such work shall be done by the General
Contractor at the Electrical Contractor's expense.
ELECTRICAL
260001- 12
3.10
September 23, 2015
SALVAGE
A. The Electrical Contractor shall remove all electrical equipment not to be used.
B. All electrical equipment removed and deemed salvageable by the Owner shall be stored in an
area designated by the Owner.
C. Any electrical equipment removed that is not desired by the Owner shall be disposed of at the
expense of the Electrical Contractor.
3.11
SUPPORTS AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Boxes and pendants for surface mounted fixtures shall be supported in an approved manner.
Boxes and supports shall be fastened with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick,
with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, with machine screws on steel work with locknuts.
Threaded studs shall be provided with lock-washers and nuts.
3.12
TESTS
A. Furnish all labor, material, instruments, supplies, and services and bear all costs for the
accomplishment of tests herein specified. Correct all defects appearing under test, repeat the
tests until no defects are disclosed. Leave the equipment clean and ready for use.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall perform any test other than herein specified which may be
specified by legal authorities or by agencies to whose requirements this work is to conform.
3.13
FINAL INSPECTION AND TEST
A. Prior to test, feeders and branches shall be continuous from service contact point to each outlet;
all panels, feeders and devices connected and fuses in place. Test system free from short
circuits and grounds with insulation resistances not less than outlines in the National Electrical
Code. Provide testing equipment necessary and conduct test in presence of the Owner's
authorized representative.
B. The final inspection and test shall include the following:
1. Testing of the impedance of the grounding system.
2. Testing of the fire alarm system devices that were added to existing system.
3. Testing of branch and feeder conductors for continuity.
4. Testing of motors, verifying proper current balance and voltage.
5. Testing of fire alarm system.
END OF SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL
260001- 13

bemis hall basement renovations

Transcription

Similar documents

THE FINLEY

130 Empire Ave

Canadian firm pays $35M for Lincoln Road shop

CNC Machining Department

Subway Directions to Medgar Evers College Mathematics Department

“How to Become a Writer” by Lorrie Moore from Charters, Ann, Ed

Thrislington Cubicles - design management europe award

The Edgemont, 241 Mulberry Row Ct.

Professional Services Contracts for Arden

Brochure